This is a modern-English version of A Tract on Monetary Reform, originally written by Keynes, John Maynard. It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling, and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.

Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.

Transcriber’s Note

Transcription Note

Larger versions of most illustrations may be seen by right-clicking them and selecting an option to view them separately, or by double-tapping and/or stretching them.

Larger versions of most illustrations can be viewed by right-clicking on them and choosing an option to see them separately, or by double-tapping and/or stretching them.

Cover created by Transcriber from the original Title page and placed into the Public Domain.

Cover created by Transcriber from the original title page and made available in the public domain.

BY THE SAME AUTHOR

BY THE SAME AUTHOR

INDIAN CURRENCY AND FINANCE.
Pp. viii + 263. 1913.
7s. 6d. net.

THE ECONOMIC CONSEQUENCES
OF THE PEACE.

Pp. vii + 279. 1919.
8s. 6d. net.

A TREATISE ON PROBABILITY.
Pp. xi + 466. 1921.
18s. net.

A REVISION OF THE TREATY.
Pp. viii + 223. 1922.
7s. 6d. net.

INDIAN CURRENCY AND FINANCE.
Pp. viii + 263. 1913.
7s. 6d. net.

THE ECONOMIC CONSEQUENCES
OF THE PEACE.

Pp. vii + 279. 1919.
8s. 6d. net.

A TREATISE ON PROBABILITY.
Pp. xi + 466. 1921.
18s. net.

A REVISION OF THE TREATY.
Pp. viii + 223. 1922.
7s. 6d. net.

A TRACT
ON MONETARY REFORM


logo

MACMILLAN AND CO., Limited
LONDON · BOMBAY · CALCUTTA · MADRAS
MELBOURNE

MACMILLAN AND CO., Limited
LONDON · MUMBAI · KOLKATA · CHENNAI
MELBOURNE

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
NEW YORK · BOSTON · CHICAGO
DALLAS · SAN FRANCISCO

THE MACMILLAN COMPANY
NEW YORK · BOSTON · CHICAGO
DALLAS · SAN FRANCISCO

THE MACMILLAN CO. OF CANADA, Ltd.
TORONTO

THE MACMILLAN CO. OF CANADA, Ltd.
TORONTO


A TRACT
ON
MONETARY REFORM

A Guide
ON
MONETARY REFORM

BY
JOHN MAYNARD KEYNES
FELLOW OF KING’S COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE

BY
JOHN MAYNARD KEYNES
Fellow of King's College, Cambridge

MACMILLAN AND CO., LIMITED
ST. MARTIN’S STREET, LONDON
1923

MACMILLAN AND CO., LIMITED
ST. MARTIN’S STREET, LONDON
1923


COPYRIGHT

COPYRIGHT

PRINTED IN GREAT BRITAIN

PRINTED IN THE UK


v

v

PREFACE

We leave Saving to the private investor, and we encourage him to place his savings mainly in titles to money. We leave the responsibility for setting Production in motion to the business man, who is mainly influenced by the profits which he expects to accrue to himself in terms of money. Those who are not in favour of drastic changes in the existing organisation of society believe that these arrangements, being in accord with human nature, have great advantages. But they cannot work properly if the money, which they assume as a stable measuring-rod, is undependable. Unemployment, the precarious life of the worker, the disappointment of expectation, the sudden loss of savings, the excessive windfalls to individuals, the speculator, the profiteer—all proceed, in large measure, from the instability of the standard of value.

We leave saving to private investors and encourage them to mainly put their savings into cash equivalents. We assign the responsibility of getting production started to business people, who are primarily motivated by the profits they expect to make in cash. Those who oppose drastic changes to the current structure of society believe that these systems, which align with human nature, have significant benefits. However, they can't function properly if the money, which they consider a stable measure, is unreliable. Unemployment, the precarious lives of workers, unmet expectations, sudden losses of savings, and extreme profits for certain individuals—the speculator, the profiteer—all largely result from the instability of the standard of value.

It is often supposed that the costs of production are threefold, corresponding to the rewards of labour, enterprise, and accumulation. But there is a fourth cost, namely risk; and the reward of risk-bearing isvi one of the heaviest, and perhaps the most avoidable, burden on production. This element of risk is greatly aggravated by the instability of the standard of value. Currency Reforms, which led to the adoption by this country and the world at large of sound monetary principles, would diminish the wastes of Risk, which consume at present too much of our estate.

It’s often thought that production costs are threefold, relating to the rewards of labor, enterprise, and investment. However, there's a fourth cost: risk. The reward for taking on risk is one of the biggest and possibly the most avoidable burdens on production. This risk is made worse by the instability of the value standard. Currency reforms that result in adopting sound monetary principles would reduce the waste caused by risk, which currently consumes too much of our resources.

Nowhere do conservative notions consider themselves more in place than in currency; yet nowhere is the need of innovation more urgent. One is often warned that a scientific treatment of currency questions is impossible because the banking world is intellectually incapable of understanding its own problems. If this is true, the order of Society, which they stand for, will decay. But I do not believe it. What we have lacked is a clear analysis of the real facts, rather than ability to understand an analysis already given. If the new ideas, now developing in many quarters, are sound and right, I do not doubt that sooner or later they will prevail. I dedicate this book, humbly and without permission, to the Governors and Court of the Bank of England, who now and for the future have a much more difficult and anxious task entrusted to them than in former days.

Nowhere do conservative ideas feel more at home than in currency; yet nowhere is the need for innovation more pressing. People often say that a scientific approach to currency issues is impossible because the banking industry can't grasp its own problems. If that's true, then the order of society that they represent will crumble. But I don’t believe that. What we’ve been missing is a clear analysis of the actual facts, rather than the ability to understand an analysis that’s already been provided. If the new ideas emerging in various places are sound and valid, I have no doubt they will eventually take hold. I dedicate this book, humbly and without permission, to the Governors and Court of the Bank of England, who now and in the future face a much tougher and more anxious task than in the past.

J. M. KEYNES.

J.M. Keynes.

October 1923.

October 1923.


vii

vii

CONTENTS

PAGE
Introduction v
CHAPTER I
The Impact on Society of Changes in Money's Value 1
 I. As Affecting Distribution 5
1. The Investor 5
2. The Business Man 18
3. The Earner 27
II. As Affecting Production 32
CHAPTER II
Public Finance and Changes in Money Value 41
1. Inflation as a Method of Taxation 41
2. Currency Depreciation versus Capital Levy 63
CHAPTER III
The Theory of Money and Exchanges 74
1. The Quantity Theory re-stated 74
2. The Theory of Purchasing Power Parity 87
3. The Seasonal Fluctuation of the Exchanges 106
4. The Forward Market in Exchanges 115viii
CHAPTER IV
Alternative Goals in Monetary Policy 140
1. Devaluation versus Deflation 142
2. Stability of Prices versus Stability of Exchange 154
3. The Restoration of a Gold Standard 163
CHAPTER V
Constructive Ideas for the Future Management of Money 177
1. Great Britain 178
2. The United States 197
3. Other Countries 204
Table of Contents 207

[I have utilised, mainly in the first chapter and in parts of the second and third, the material, much revised and re-written, of some articles which were published during 1922 in the Reconstruction Supplements of the Manchester Guardian Commercial.—J. M. K.]

[I have used, mainly in the first chapter and in parts of the second and third, material that has been significantly revised and rewritten, from articles published in 1922 in the Reconstruction Supplements of the Manchester Guardian Commercial.—J. M. K.]


Money is only important for what it will procure. Thus a change in the monetary unit, which is uniform in its operation and affects all transactions equally, has no consequences. If, by a change in the established standard of value, a man received and owned twice as much money as he did before in payment for all rights and for all efforts, and if he also paid out twice as much money for all acquisitions and for all satisfactions, he would be wholly unaffected.

Cash only matters for what it can buy. So, a change in the currency, which operates the same way for everyone and impacts all transactions equally, has no real effects. If, due to a change in the standard of value, a person received and owned twice as much money as before in exchange for all rights and efforts, and if they also spent double the amount of money for everything they obtained and enjoyed, they would be completely unchanged.

It follows, therefore, that a change in the value of money, that is to say in the level of prices, is important to Society only in so far as its incidence is unequal. Such changes have produced in the past, and are producing now, the vastest social consequences, because, as we all know, when the value of money changes, it does not change equally for all persons or for all purposes. A man’s receipts and his outgoings are not all modified in one uniform proportion. Thus a change in prices and rewards,2 as measured in money, generally affects different classes unequally, transfers wealth from one to another, bestows affluence here and embarrassment there, and redistributes Fortune’s favours so as to frustrate design and disappoint expectation.

It follows that a change in the value of money, meaning changes in prices, matters to society only if it affects people unevenly. Such changes have led to significant social consequences in the past and continue to do so now because, as we know, when the value of money fluctuates, it doesn’t affect everyone or everything equally. A person's income and expenses don’t all change in the same way. Therefore, changes in prices and rewards, as measured in money, typically impact different classes differently, shifting wealth from one group to another, creating wealth in some areas while causing hardship in others, and redistributing fortune in a way that disrupts plans and disappoints expectations.2

The fluctuations in the value of money since 1914 have been on a scale so great as to constitute, with all that they involve, one of the most significant events in the economic history of the modern world. The fluctuation of the standard, whether gold, silver, or paper, has not only been of unprecedented violence, but has been visited on a society of which the economic organisation is more dependent than that of any earlier epoch on the assumption that the standard of value would be moderately stable.

The changes in the value of money since 1914 have been so extreme that they represent one of the most important events in the economic history of the modern world. The instability of the standard, whether it’s gold, silver, or paper, has not only been unprecedentedly severe, but it has impacted a society that relies more on the expectation of a moderately stable value standard than any previous era.

During the Napoleonic Wars and the period immediately succeeding them the extreme fluctuation of English prices within a single year was 22 per cent; and the highest price level reached during the first quarter of the nineteenth century, which we used to reckon the most disturbed period of our currency history, was less than double the lowest and with an interval of thirteen years. Compare with this the extraordinary movements of the past nine years. To recall the reader’s mind to the exact facts, I refer him to the table on the next page.

During the Napoleonic Wars and the years right after, English prices fluctuated by as much as 22 percent within a single year. The highest price level during the early nineteenth century, often considered the most tumultuous time in our currency history, was not even double the lowest price, and there was a gap of thirteen years. In contrast, look at the incredible changes that have happened over the past nine years. To remind the reader of the specific details, I refer you to the table on the next page.

I have not included those countries—Russia, Poland, and Austria—where the old currency has long been bankrupt. But it will be observed that,3 even apart from the countries which have suffered revolution or defeat, no quarter of the world has escaped a violent movement. In the United States, where the gold standard has functioned unabated, in Japan, where the war brought with it more profit than liability, in the neutral country of Sweden, the changes in the value of money have been comparable with those in the United Kingdom.

I haven't included those countries—Russia, Poland, and Austria—where the old currency has been out of commission for a long time. However, it’s noticeable that,3 even apart from the countries that have experienced revolution or defeat, no part of the world has avoided significant upheaval. In the United States, where the gold standard has remained intact, in Japan, where the war resulted in more gains than losses, and in the neutral country of Sweden, the fluctuations in the value of money have been similar to those in the United Kingdom.

Index Numbers of Wholesale Prices expressed as a Percentage of 1913 (1).

Index Numbers of Wholesale Prices shown as a Percentage of 1913 (1).

Monthly Average. United Kingdom (2). France. Italy. Germany. U.S.A. (3). Canada. Japan. Sweden. India.
1913 100 100 100        100 100 100 100 100 ..
1914 100 102   96        106 98 100   95 116 100
1915 127 140 133        142 101 109   97 145 112
1916 160 189 201        153 127 134 117 185 128
1917 206 262 299        179 177 175 149 244 147
1918 227 340 409        217 194 205 196 339 180
1919 242 357 364        415 206 216 239 330 198
1920 295 510 624     1,486 226 250 260 347 204
1921 182 345 577     1,911 147 182 200 211 181
1922 159 327 562   34,182 149 165 196 162 180
  1923A 159 411 582 765,000 157 167 192 166 179

(1) These figures are taken from the Monthly Bulletin of Statistics of the League of Nations. (2) Statist up to 1919; thereafter the median of the Economist, Statist, and Board of Trade Index Numbers. (3) Bureau of Labour Index Number (revised).

(1) These numbers are sourced from the Monthly Bulletin of Statistics of the League of Nations. (2) Statist until 1919; after that, it's the average of the Economist, Statist, and Board of Trade Index Numbers. (3) Bureau of Labour Index Number (revised).

A First half-year.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ First six months.

From 1914 to 1920 all these countries experienced an expansion in the supply of money to spend relatively to the supply of things to purchase, that is to say Inflation. Since 1920 those countries which have4 regained control of their financial situation, not content with bringing the Inflation to an end, have contracted their supply of money and have experienced the fruits of Deflation. Others have followed inflationary courses more riotously than before. In a few, of which Italy is one, an imprudent desire to deflate has been balanced by the intractability of the financial situation, with the happy result of comparatively stable prices.

From 1914 to 1920, all these countries went through an increase in the amount of money available to spend compared to the number of things to buy, which means Inflation. Since 1920, those countries that have4 regained control of their finances haven't just stopped the inflation; they've reduced their money supply and experienced the benefits of Deflation. Others have pursued inflationary policies even more aggressively than before. In a few cases, like Italy, a reckless eagerness to reduce inflation has been tempered by the stubbornness of the financial situation, leading to relatively stable prices.

Each process, Inflation and Deflation alike, has inflicted great injuries. Each has an effect in altering the distribution of wealth between different classes, Inflation in this respect being the worse of the two. Each has also an effect in overstimulating or retarding the production of wealth, though here Deflation is the more injurious. The division of our subject thus indicated is the most convenient for us to follow,—examining first the effect of changes in the value of money on the distribution of wealth with most of our attention on Inflation, and next their effect on the production of wealth with most of our attention on Deflation. How have the price changes of the past nine years affected the productivity of the community as a whole, and how have they affected the conflicting interests and mutual relations of its component classes? The answer to these questions will serve to establish the gravity of the evils, into the remedy for which it is the object of this book to inquire.

Each process, both Inflation and Deflation, has caused significant harm. Each impacts the distribution of wealth among different classes, with Inflation being the worse offender in this regard. Both also influence the overstimulation or slowing down of the production of wealth, though Deflation tends to be more damaging here. The way we've divided our topic is the easiest to follow—first examining how changes in the value of money affect wealth distribution, focusing mainly on Inflation, and then looking at their impact on wealth production, paying more attention to Deflation. How have the price changes over the past nine years influenced the overall productivity of the community, and how have they affected the competing interests and relationships among its different classes? The answers to these questions will help highlight the seriousness of the issues that this book aims to address.

5

5

I.—Changes in the Value of Money, and Its Impact on Distribution

For the purpose of this inquiry a triple classification of Society is convenient—into the Investing Class, the Business Class, and the Earning Class. These classes overlap, and the same individual may earn, deal, and invest; but in the present organisation of society such a division corresponds to a social cleavage and an actual divergence of interest.

For this inquiry, it's helpful to classify society into three groups: the Investing Class, the Business Class, and the Earning Class. These groups often overlap, and a single person may earn, trade, and invest; however, in today's society, this division reflects a social split and a real difference in interests.

1. The Investing Class.

Of the various purposes which money serves, some essentially depend upon the assumption that its real value is nearly constant over a period of time. The chief of these are those connected, in a wide sense, with contracts for the investment of money. Such contracts—namely, those which provide for the payment of fixed sums of money over a long period of time—are the characteristic of what it is convenient to call the Investment System, as distinct from the property system generally.

Of the different purposes that money serves, some rely on the idea that its real value stays about the same over time. The main ones are those related, broadly speaking, to contracts for the investment of money. These contracts—specifically, those that guarantee the payment of fixed amounts of money for a long time—are key to what we refer to as the Investment System, which is different from the property system in general.

Under this phase of capitalism, as developed during the nineteenth century, many arrangements were devised for separating the management of property from its ownership. These arrangements were of three leading types: (1) Those in which the proprietor, while parting with the management6 of his property, retained his ownership of it—i.e. of the actual land, buildings, and machinery, or of whatever else it consisted in, this mode of tenure being typified by a holding of ordinary shares in a joint-stock company; (2) those in which he parted with the property temporarily, receiving a fixed sum of money annually in the meantime, but regained his property eventually, as typified by a lease; and (3) those in which he parted with his real property permanently, in return either for a perpetual annuity fixed in terms of money, or for a terminable annuity and the repayment of the principal in money at the end of the term, as typified by mortgages, bonds, debentures, and preference shares. This third type represents the full development of Investment.

Under this phase of capitalism, which developed during the nineteenth century, many systems were created to separate property management from ownership. There are three main types of these systems: (1) The first type is where the owner, while giving up management of their property, still keeps ownership of it—meaning the actual land, buildings, and machinery, or whatever else it includes; this is represented by holding ordinary shares in a joint-stock company; (2) The second type involves the owner temporarily giving up the property, receiving a fixed sum of money each year in the meantime, but eventually getting the property back, which is similar to a lease; and (3) The third type involves the owner permanently giving up their real property in exchange for either a perpetual annuity fixed in money or a terminable annuity with the principal repaid in money at the end of the term, as seen in mortgages, bonds, debentures, and preference shares. This third type represents the full development of Investment.

Contracts to receive fixed sums of money at future dates (made without provision for possible changes in the real value of money at those dates) must have existed as long as money has been lent and borrowed. In the form of leases and mortgages, and also of permanent loans to Governments and to a few private bodies, such as the East India Company, they were already frequent in the eighteenth century. But during the nineteenth century they developed a new and increased importance, and had, by the beginning of the twentieth, divided the propertied classes into two groups—the “business men” and the “investors”—with partly divergent7 interests. The division was not sharp as between individuals; for business men might be investors also, and investors might hold ordinary shares; but the division was nevertheless real, and not the less important because it was seldom noticed.

Contracts to receive fixed amounts of money at future dates (made without considering possible changes in the real value of money by those dates) must have existed as long as money has been lent and borrowed. In the form of leases and mortgages, as well as permanent loans to governments and a few private entities, like the East India Company, they were already common in the eighteenth century. However, during the nineteenth century, they took on new and greater significance, and by the early twentieth century, they had split the wealthy classes into two groups—the “business people” and the “investors”—with somewhat differing7 interests. The distinction was not clear-cut among individuals; business people could also be investors, and investors might hold common shares; yet the distinction was still real and important, even if it was rarely acknowledged.

By this system the active business class could call to the aid of their enterprises not only their own wealth but the savings of the whole community; and the professional and propertied classes, on the other hand, could find an employment for their resources, which involved them in little trouble, no responsibility, and (it was believed) small risk.

By this system, the active business class could leverage not only their own wealth but also the savings of the entire community for their enterprises. Meanwhile, the professional and property-owning classes could find a way to invest their resources that required little effort, involved no responsibility, and was thought to carry minimal risk.

For a hundred years the system worked, throughout Europe, with an extraordinary success and facilitated the growth of wealth on an unprecedented scale. To save and to invest became at once the duty and the delight of a large class. The savings were seldom drawn on, and, accumulating at compound interest, made possible the material triumphs which we now all take for granted. The morals, the politics, the literature, and the religion of the age joined in a grand conspiracy for the promotion of saving. God and Mammon were reconciled. Peace on earth to men of good means. A rich man could, after all, enter into the Kingdom of Heaven—if only he saved. A new harmony sounded from the celestial spheres. “It is curious to observe how, through the wise and beneficent arrangement of Providence, men thus do the greatest service to the public, when they are8 thinking of nothing but their own gain”1; so sang the angels.

For a hundred years, the system operated across Europe with remarkable success, fostering unprecedented wealth growth. Saving and investing became both a responsibility and a joy for a large portion of society. Savings were rarely withdrawn and, accumulating interest over time, enabled the material achievements we now take for granted. The morals, politics, literature, and religion of the era collaborated in a grand effort to encourage saving. God and wealth were brought together. Peace on earth for those with good means. A rich man could indeed enter the Kingdom of Heaven—if only he saved. A new harmony resonated from the heavens. “It’s interesting to see how, through the wise and beneficial arrangement of Providence, people serve the public best when they are8 thinking solely of their own gain”1; so the angels sang.

1 Easy Lessons on Money Matters for the Use of Young People. Published by the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge. Twelfth Edition, 1850.

1 Simple Money Lessons for Young People. Published by the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge. Twelfth Edition, 1850.

The atmosphere thus created well harmonised the demands of expanding business and the needs of an expanding population with the growth of a comfortable non-business class. But amidst the general enjoyment of ease and progress, the extent, to which the system depended on the stability of the money to which the investing classes had committed their fortunes, was generally overlooked; and an unquestioning confidence was apparently felt that this matter would look after itself. Investments spread and multiplied, until, for the middle classes of the world, the gilt-edged bond came to typify all that was most permanent and most secure. So rooted in our day has been the conventional belief in the stability and safety of a money contract that, according to English law, trustees have been encouraged to embark their trust funds exclusively in such transactions, and are indeed forbidden, except in the case of real estate (an exception which is itself a survival of the conditions of an earlier age), to employ them otherwise.2

The atmosphere created balanced the needs of growing businesses and an expanding population alongside the rise of a comfortable non-business class. Yet, amid the general enjoyment of ease and progress, people generally overlooked how much the system relied on the stability of the money that the investing classes had tied their fortunes to; there seemed to be an unquestioning belief that this issue would take care of itself. Investments spread and increased, until the gilt-edged bond became a symbol of permanence and security for the middle classes around the world. The conventional faith in the stability and safety of a money contract has become so entrenched in our time that, under English law, trustees have been encouraged to invest their trust funds solely in such dealings and are actually prohibited, except in the case of real estate (which is itself a leftover from earlier times), from using them in any other way.2

2 German trustees were not released from a similar obligation until 1923, by which date the value of trust funds invested in titles to money had entirely disappeared.

2 German trustees weren’t freed from a similar obligation until 1923, by which point the value of trust funds invested in monetary titles had completely vanished.

As in other respects, so also in this, the nineteenth century relied on the future permanence of its own9 happy experiences and disregarded the warning of past misfortunes. It chose to forget that there is no historical warrant for expecting money to be represented even by a constant quantity of a particular metal, far less by a constant purchasing power. Yet Money is simply that which the State declares from time to time to be a good legal discharge of money contracts. In 1914 gold had not been the English standard for a century or the sole standard of any other country for half a century. There is no record of a prolonged war or a great social upheaval which has not been accompanied by a change in the legal tender, but an almost unbroken chronicle in every country which has a history, back to the earliest dawn of economic record, of a progressive deterioration in the real value of the successive legal tenders which have represented money.

Just like in other ways, the nineteenth century depended on the lasting nature of its own9 positive experiences and ignored the warnings from past troubles. It chose to overlook the fact that there’s no historical basis for believing that money can be consistently represented by a fixed amount of a specific metal, let alone by stable purchasing power. However, money is simply what the government declares from time to time to be a valid way to settle monetary contracts. In 1914, gold hadn’t been the standard in England for a century, nor had it been the only standard in any other country for half a century. There’s no record of a long war or major social upheaval that hasn’t brought about a change in legal tender, but there’s a nearly continuous record in every country with a history, dating back to the earliest economic records, showing a steady decline in the real value of the various legal tenders that have represented money.

Moreover, this progressive deterioration in the value of money through history is not an accident, and has had behind it two great driving forces—the impecuniosity of Governments and the superior political influence of the debtor class.

Moreover, this ongoing decline in the value of money throughout history is not a coincidence and has been driven by two major forces—the financial struggles of governments and the stronger political power of the debtor class.

The power of taxation by currency depreciation is one which has been inherent in the State since Rome discovered it. The creation of legal-tender has been and is a Government’s ultimate reserve; and no State or Government is likely to decree its own bankruptcy or its own downfall, so long as this instrument still lies at hand unused.

The power of taxation through currency depreciation is something the State has always had since Rome figured it out. The creation of legal tender has been and still is a government's ultimate safeguard; no State or Government is likely to declare its own bankruptcy or downfall as long as this tool is still available and unused.

10

10

Besides this, as we shall see below, the benefits of a depreciating currency are not restricted to the Government. Farmers and debtors and all persons liable to pay fixed money dues share in the advantage. As now in the persons of business men, so also in former ages these classes constituted the active and constructive elements in the economic scheme. Those secular changes, therefore, which in the past have depreciated money, assisted the new men and emancipated them from the dead hand; they benefited new wealth at the expense of old, and armed enterprise against accumulation. The tendency of money to depreciate has been in past times a weighty counterpoise against the cumulative results of compound interest and the inheritance of fortunes. It has been a loosening influence against the rigid distribution of old-won wealth and the separation of ownership from activity. By this means each generation can disinherit in part its predecessors’ heirs; and the project of founding a perpetual fortune must be disappointed in this way, unless the community with conscious deliberation provides against it in some other way, more equitable and more expedient.

Besides this, as we will see below, the benefits of a depreciating currency aren’t just for the Government. Farmers, debtors, and anyone who has to pay fixed money obligations also gain from it. Just like today's business people, these groups were once the driving and constructive forces in the economy. Therefore, those changes in the past that devalued money helped new individuals and freed them from the restrictions of the old ways; they benefited new wealth while disadvantaging the old and empowered enterprise against accumulation. The trend of money to lose value has historically been a significant balancing factor against the cumulative effects of compound interest and the inheritance of wealth. It has acted as a loosening influence against the rigid distribution of wealth amassed through the ages and the separation of ownership from productive activity. This way, each generation can partially disinherit the heirs of their predecessors, and the idea of establishing a perpetual fortune will likely fail, unless the community actively takes measures to counter it in a more fair and practical way.

At any rate, under the influence of these two forces—the financial necessities of Governments and the political influence of the debtor class—sometimes the one and sometimes the other, the progress of inflation has been continuous, if we consider long11 periods, ever since money was first devised in the sixth century B.C. Sometimes the standard of value has depreciated of itself; failing this, debasements have done the work.

At any rate, influenced by these two factors—the financial needs of governments and the political power of the debtor class—sometimes one and sometimes the other, the trend of inflation has been continuous, when we look at long11 periods, ever since money was first created in the sixth century BCE Sometimes the value standard has declined on its own; when that hasn’t happened, devaluations have taken care of it.

Nevertheless it is easy at all times, as a result of the way we use money in daily life, to forget all this and to look on money as itself the absolute standard of value; and when, besides, the actual events of a hundred years have not disturbed his illusions, the average man regards what has been normal for three generations as a part of the permanent social fabric.

Nevertheless, it's always easy, because of how we use money in everyday life, to forget all this and think of money as the ultimate standard of value. And when, on top of that, the events of a hundred years haven't shaken his beliefs, the average person sees what has been normal for three generations as a part of the permanent social structure.

The course of events during the nineteenth century favoured such ideas. During its first quarter, the very high prices of the Napoleonic Wars were followed by a somewhat rapid improvement in the value of money. For the next seventy years, with some temporary fluctuations, the tendency of prices continued to be downwards, the lowest point being reached in 1896. But while this was the tendency as regards direction, the remarkable feature of this long period was the relative stability of the price level. Approximately the same level of price ruled in or about the years 1826, 1841, 1855, 1862, 1867, 1871, and 1915. Prices were also level in the years 1844, 1881, and 1914. If we call the index number of these latter years 100, we find that, for the period of close on a century from 1826 to the outbreak of war, the maximum fluctuation in either direction was12 30 points, the index number never rising above 130 and never falling below 70. No wonder that we came to believe in the stability of money contracts over a long period. The metal gold might not possess all the theoretical advantages of an artificially regulated standard, but it could not be tampered with and had proved reliable in practice.

The events of the nineteenth century supported these ideas. In the first quarter, the extremely high prices from the Napoleonic Wars were followed by a fairly quick improvement in the value of money. For the next seventy years, despite some temporary ups and downs, prices generally trended downward, reaching their lowest point in 1896. However, the remarkable aspect of this long period was the relative stability of the price level. The price was roughly at the same level around the years 1826, 1841, 1855, 1862, 1867, 1871, and 1915. Prices were also stable in 1844, 1881, and 1914. If we consider these latter years to have an index number of 100, we find that over nearly a century from 1826 to the outbreak of war, the maximum fluctuation in either direction was12 30 points, with the index number never exceeding 130 and never dropping below 70. It's no surprise that we came to trust in the stability of money contracts over a long period. While the metal gold may not have all the theoretical advantages of a controlled standard, it couldn't be manipulated and had proven to be reliable in practice.

At the same time, the investor in Consols in the early part of the century had done very well in three different ways. The “security” of his investment had come to be considered as near absolute perfection as was possible. Its capital value had uniformly appreciated, partly for the reason just stated, but chiefly because the steady fall in the rate of interest increased the number of years’ purchase of the annual income which represented the capital.3 And the annual money income had a purchasing power which on the whole was increasing. If, for example, we consider the seventy years from 1826 to 1896 (and ignore the great improvement immediately after Waterloo), we find that the capital value of Consols rose steadily, with only temporary set-backs, from 79 to 109 (in spite of Goschen’s conversion from a 3 per cent rate to a 2¾ per cent rate in 1889 and a 2½ per cent rate effective in 1903), while the purchasing power of the annual dividends, even after allowing for the reduced rates of interest, had increased 50 per13 cent. But Consols, too, had added the virtue of stability to that of improvement. Except in years of crisis Consols never fell below 90 during the reign of Queen Victoria; and even in ’48, when thrones were crumbling, the mean price of the year fell but 5 points. Ninety when she ascended the throne, they reached their maximum with her in the year of Diamond Jubilee. What wonder that our parents thought Consols a good investment!

At the same time, investors in Consols in the early part of the century did very well in three different ways. The “security” of their investment was seen as nearly perfect. Its capital value consistently increased, partly for the reason mentioned, but mainly because the steady decline in interest rates boosted the number of years’ purchase of the annual income that represented the capital. And the annual money income had a purchasing power that was generally increasing. For example, if we look at the seventy years from 1826 to 1896 (ignoring the significant improvement right after Waterloo), we see that the capital value of Consols steadily rose, with only temporary dips, from 79 to 109 (despite Goschen’s conversion from a 3 percent rate to a 2¾ percent rate in 1889 and a 2½ percent rate effective in 1903), while the purchasing power of the annual dividends, even accounting for the lower interest rates, increased by 50 percent. Additionally, Consols also added the benefit of stability to that of improvement. Except during years of crisis, Consols never dropped below 90 during Queen Victoria's reign; even in '48, when kingdoms were falling apart, the average price for the year only fell by 5 points. Starting at 90 when she became queen, they peaked during her Diamond Jubilee year. No wonder our parents thought Consols was a smart investment!

3 If (for example) the rate of interest falls from 4½ per cent to 3 per cent, 3 per cent Consols rise in value from 66 to 100.

3 If, for instance, the interest rate drops from 4.5 percent to 3 percent, 3 percent Consols increase in value from 66 to 100.

Thus there grew up during the nineteenth century a large, powerful, and greatly respected class of persons, well-to-do individually and very wealthy in the aggregate, who owned neither buildings, nor land, nor businesses, nor precious metals, but titles to an annual income in legal-tender money. In particular, that peculiar creation and pride of the nineteenth century, the savings of the middle class, had been mainly thus embarked. Custom and favourable experience had acquired for such investments an unimpeachable reputation for security.

Thus, during the nineteenth century, a large, powerful, and highly respected group of individuals emerged. They were each doing well financially and collectively very wealthy, but they didn't own buildings, land, businesses, or precious metals; instead, they held titles to an annual income in cash. Specifically, the distinctive creation and pride of the nineteenth century—savings from the middle class—had largely been invested this way. Tradition and positive experiences had given these investments an unassailable reputation for security.

Before the war these medium fortunes had already begun to suffer some loss (as compared with the summit of their prosperity in the middle ’nineties) from the rise in prices and also in the rate of interest. But the monetary events which have accompanied and have followed the war have taken from them about one-half of their real value in England, seven-eighths in France, eleven-twelfths14 in Italy, and virtually the whole in Germany and in the succession states of Austria-Hungary and Russia.

Before the war, these medium fortunes had already started to lose some value (compared to their peak prosperity in the mid-'90s) due to rising prices and increasing interest rates. However, the financial events that came with and followed the war have stripped them of about half their real value in England, seven-eighths in France, eleven-twelfths14 in Italy, and nearly all of it in Germany and the successor states of Austria-Hungary and Russia.

The loss to the typical English investor of the pre-war period is sufficiently measured by the loss to the investor in Consols. Such an investor, as we have already seen, was steadily improving his position, apart from temporary fluctuations, up to 1896, and in this and the following year two maxima were reached simultaneously—both the capital value of an annuity and also the purchasing power of money. Between 1896 and 1914, on the other hand, the investor had already suffered a serious loss—the capital value of his annuity had fallen by about a third, and the purchasing power of his income had also fallen by nearly a third. This loss, however, was incurred gradually over a period of nearly twenty years from an exceptional maximum, and did not leave him appreciably worse off than he had been in the early ’eighties or the early ’forties. But upon the top of this came the further swifter loss of the war period. Between 1914 and 1920 the capital value of the investor’s annuity again fell by more than a third, and the purchasing power of his income by about two-thirds. In addition, the standard rate of income tax rose from 7½ per cent in 1914 to 30 per cent in 1921.4 Roughly estimated in round numbers, the change may be represented thus in15 terms of an index of which the base year is 1914:

The loss for the average English investor before the war can be measured by the decline in the value of Consols. As we’ve already noted, this investor was steadily improving his situation, aside from temporary fluctuations, up until 1896. In that year and the one following, two peaks were hit at the same time—both the capital value of an annuity and the purchasing power of money. However, between 1896 and 1914, the investor experienced a significant loss—the capital value of his annuity dropped by about a third, and the purchasing power of his income also decreased by nearly a third. This loss occurred gradually over nearly twenty years from an exceptional high, leaving him not significantly worse off than he was in the early '80s or '40s. However, this was compounded by the rapid losses during the war period. From 1914 to 1920, the capital value of the investor’s annuity fell again by more than a third, and the purchasing power of his income dropped by about two-thirds. Additionally, the standard income tax rate increased from 7.5% in 1914 to 30% in 1921. Roughly estimated in round numbers, the change may be represented thus in15 terms of an index of which the base year is 1914:

4 Since 1896 there has been the further burden of the Death Duties.

4 Since 1896, there has been the additional burden of the Death Duties.

  Purchasing Power of the Income of Consols.5 Do. after deduction of Income Tax at the standard rate. Money price of the capital value of Consols. Purchasing Power of the capital value of Consols.
1815   61   59   92   56
1826   85   90 108   92
1841   85   90 122 104
1869   87   89 127 111
1883 104 108 138 144
1896 139 145 150 208
1914 100 100 100 100
1920   34   26   64   22
1921   53   39   56   34
1922   62   50   76   47

5 Without allowance for the reduction of the interest from 3 to 2½ per cent.

5 Without adjusting for the decrease of the interest from 3% to 2.5%.

The second column well illustrates what a splendid investment gilt-edged stocks had been through the century from Waterloo to Mons, even if we omit altogether the abnormal values of 1896–97. Our table shows how the epoch of Diamond Jubilee was the culminating moment in the prosperity of the British middle class. But it also exhibits with the precision of figures the familiar bewailed plight of those who try to live on the income of the same trustee investments as before the war. The owner of consols in 1922 had a real income, one half of what he had in 1914 and one third of what he had in 1896. The whole of the improvement of the nineteenth century had been obliterated, and his16 situation was not quite so good as it had been after Waterloo.

The second column clearly shows what a great investment gilt-edged stocks were throughout the century from Waterloo to Mons, even if we ignore the unusual values of 1896–97. Our table reveals that the period of the Diamond Jubilee marked the peak of prosperity for the British middle class. However, it also illustrates with precise figures the well-known struggles of those who try to live off the income from the same trustee investments as before the war. The owner of consols in 1922 had a real income that was half of what it was in 1914 and one third of what it was in 1896. The entire improvement of the nineteenth century had been wiped out, and his situation was not quite as good as it had been after Waterloo.

Some mitigating circumstances should not be overlooked. Whilst the war was a period of the dissipation of the community’s resources as a whole, it was a period of saving for the individuals of the saving class, who with their larger holdings of the securities of the Government now have an increased aggregate money claim on the receipts of the Exchequer. Also, the investing class, which has lost money, overlaps, both socially and by the ties of family, with the business class, which has made money, sufficiently to break in many cases the full severity of the loss. Moreover, in England, there has been a substantial recovery from the low point of 1920.

Some important factors shouldn't be ignored. While the war was a time when the community's resources were largely wasted, it was also a time of savings for individuals in the upper class, who, with their greater holdings of Government securities, now have a larger total money claim on the Exchequer's receipts. Additionally, the investing class, which has lost money, has significant social and familial connections with the business class, which has profited, enough to cushion the impact of the losses in many cases. Furthermore, in England, there has been a significant rebound from the low point of 1920.

But these things do not wash away the significance of the facts. The effect of the war, and of the monetary policy which has accompanied and followed it, has been to take away a large part of the real value of the possessions of the investing class. The loss has been so rapid and so intermixed in the time of its occurrence with other worse losses that its full measure is not yet separately apprehended. But it has effected, nevertheless, a far-reaching change in the relative position of different classes. Throughout the Continent the pre-war savings of the middle class, so far as they were invested in bonds, mortgages, or bank deposits, have been largely or entirely wiped out. Nor can it be doubted that this experience must17 modify social psychology towards the practice of saving and investment. What was deemed most secure has proved least so. He who neither spent nor “speculated,” who made “proper provision for his family,” who sang hymns to security and observed most straitly the morals of the edified and the respectable injunctions of the worldly-wise,—he, indeed, who gave fewest pledges to Fortune has yet suffered her heaviest visitations.

But these things don't lessen the importance of the facts. The impact of the war, along with the monetary policies that came before and after it, has significantly diminished the real value of the investments held by the investing class. The loss has occurred so quickly and has been mixed in with other even worse losses that its full extent is not yet fully recognized. However, it has caused a profound shift in the relative status of different classes. Across the Continent, the pre-war savings of the middle class, particularly those invested in bonds, mortgages, or bank deposits, have been largely or completely wiped out. It’s undeniable that this experience will change the way society views saving and investing. What was considered the safest has turned out to be the least secure. Those who neither spent recklessly nor “speculated,” who made “proper provisions for their families,” who sang praises about security and strictly followed the morals of the respectable and the worldly-wise—those who offered the fewest commitments to Fortune have, in fact, faced her harshest blows.

What moral for our present purpose should we draw from this? Chiefly, I think, that it is not safe or fair to combine the social organisation developed during the nineteenth century (and still retained) with a laisser-faire policy towards the value of money. It is not true that our former arrangements have worked well. If we are to continue to draw the voluntary savings of the community into “investments,” we must make it a prime object of deliberate State policy that the standard of value, in terms of which they are expressed, should be kept stable; adjusting in other ways (calculated to touch all forms of wealth equally and not concentrated on the relatively helpless “investors”) the redistribution of the national wealth, if, in course of time, the laws of inheritance and the rate of accumulation have drained too great a proportion of the income of the active classes into the spending control of the inactive.

What lesson should we take from this for our current situation? Mainly, I believe it’s that it’s not safe or fair to mix the social organization established in the nineteenth century (which we're still using) with a laissez-faire approach to the value of money. It’s not accurate to say our previous arrangements have been effective. If we want to keep channeling the community's voluntary savings into “investments,” we need to make it a top priority of deliberate government policy to ensure that the standard of value, in which those savings are expressed, remains stable. We should adjust other factors (in ways that affect all forms of wealth equally and don’t just target the relatively vulnerable “investors”) to redistribute national wealth if, over time, the laws of inheritance and rates of accumulation have siphoned too much income from the working class into the hands of the inactive.

18

18

2. The Business Class.

It has long been recognised, by the business world and by economists alike, that a period of rising prices acts as a stimulus to enterprise and is beneficial to business men.

It has long been recognized by the business world and economists that a period of rising prices encourages entrepreneurship and is good for businesspeople.

In the first place there is the advantage which is the counterpart of the loss to the investing class which we have just examined. When the value of money falls, it is evident that those persons who have engaged to pay fixed sums of money yearly out of the profits of active business must benefit, since their fixed money outgoings will bear a smaller proportion than formerly to their money turnover. This benefit persists not only during the transitional period of change, but also, so far as old loans are concerned, when prices have settled down at their new and higher level. For example, the farmers throughout Europe, who had raised by mortgage the funds to purchase the land they farmed, now find themselves almost freed from the burden at the expense of the mortgagees.

In the first place, there's the advantage that balances out the loss to the investors we just looked at. When the value of money decreases, it's clear that those who have agreed to pay fixed amounts of money each year from their business profits will benefit, as their fixed expenses will take up a smaller portion of their total income. This benefit continues not just during the period of change, but also, in terms of old loans, after prices have stabilized at their new, higher level. For example, farmers across Europe who took out mortgages to buy the land they farm now find themselves almost free from that burden at the expense of the lenders.

But during the period of change, while prices are rising month by month, the business man has a further and greater source of windfall. Whether he is a merchant or a manufacturer, he will generally buy before he sells, and on at least a part of his stock he will run the risk of price changes. If, therefore, month after month his stock appreciates on his hands, he is always selling at a better price than he19 expected and securing a windfall profit upon which he had not calculated. In such a period the business of trade becomes unduly easy. Any one who can borrow money and is not exceptionally unlucky must make a profit, which he may have done little to deserve. The continuous enjoyment of such profits engenders an expectation of their renewal. The practice of borrowing from banks is extended beyond what is normal. If the market expects prices to rise still further, it is natural that stocks of commodities should be held speculatively for the rise, and for a time the mere expectation of a rise is sufficient, by inducing speculative purchases, to produce one.

But during this time of change, as prices keep rising each month, business owners have an even greater source of unexpected gains. Whether they're a retailer or a manufacturer, they usually buy before they sell, and they'll take on some risk with their inventory regarding price fluctuations. So, if their stock continues to increase in value month after month, they end up selling for a higher price than they anticipated, securing unexpected profits they hadn’t planned for. In such times, doing business becomes surprisingly easy. Anyone who can borrow money and isn't extremely unlucky is likely to make a profit, even if they haven't done much to earn it. This ongoing experience of profits creates an expectation that they will continue. The practice of borrowing from banks extends beyond what’s typical. If the market anticipates prices will keep rising, it's natural for stocks of goods to be held with the hope of a price increase, and for a while, just the expectation of a rise can spark speculative buying, which actually drives prices up.

Take, for example, the Statist index number for raw materials month by month from April, 1919, to March, 1920:

Take, for example, the Statist index number for raw materials month by month from April 1919 to March 1920:

April, 1919 100
May 108
June 112
July 117
August 120
September 121
October 127
November 131
December 135
January, 1920 142
February 150
March 146

It follows from this table that a man, who borrowed money from his banker and used the proceeds to purchase raw materials selected at random, stood to make a profit in every single month of this period with the exception of the last, and would have cleared 46 per cent on the average of the year. Yet bankers were not charging at this time above 7 per cent for their advances, leaving a clear profit of between20 30 and 40 per cent per annum, without the exercise of any particular skill, to any person lucky enough to have embarked on these courses. How much more were the opportunities of persons whose business position and expert knowledge enabled them to exercise intelligent anticipation as to the probable course of prices of particular commodities! Yet any dealer in or user of raw materials on a large scale who knew his trade was thus situated. The profits of certain kinds of business to the man who has a little skill or some luck are certain in such a period to be inordinate. Great fortunes may be made in a few months. But apart from all such, the steady-going business man, who would be pained and insulted at the thought of being designated speculator or profiteer, may find windfall profits dropping into his lap which he has neither sought nor desired.

It follows from this table that a man who borrowed money from his bank and used it to buy randomly selected raw materials could make a profit every month during this period except for the last one, and would have averaged a 46 percent profit for the year. At this time, banks weren't charging more than 7 percent for their loans, which left a clear profit of between2030 and 40 percent per year, without needing any special skills, for anyone lucky enough to take these chances. How much more could those whose business acumen and expertise allowed them to intelligently predict price trends for certain goods profit! However, any dealer or large-scale user of raw materials who understood his industry was in this position. The profits for certain types of businesses during this time could be extraordinarily high for someone with a bit of skill or luck. Great fortunes could be made in just a few months. Yet, even for the steady businessperson, who would be upset at being called a speculator or profiteer, unexpected profits might come their way that they neither sought nor wanted.

Economists draw an instructive distinction between what are termed the “money” rate of interest and the “real” rate of interest. If a sum of money worth 100 in terms of commodities at the time when the loan is made is lent for a year at 5 per cent interest, and is only worth 90 in terms of commodities at the end of the year, the lender receives back, including his interest, what is only worth 94½. This is expressed by saying that while the money rate of interest was 5 per cent, the real rate of interest had actually been negative and equal to minus 5½ per cent. In the same way, if at the end of the period the value of21 money had risen and the capital sum lent had come to be worth 110 in terms of commodities, while the money rate of interest would still be 5 per cent the real rate of interest would have been 15½ per cent.

Economists make an important distinction between the “money” interest rate and the “real” interest rate. If a sum of money valued at 100 in terms of goods when the loan is made is lent for a year at a 5 percent interest rate, and it’s only worth 90 in terms of goods at the end of the year, the lender receives back, including interest, what is only worth 94.5. This is described by saying that while the money interest rate was 5 percent, the real interest rate was actually negative and equal to -5.5 percent. Similarly, if at the end of the period the value of money had increased and the amount lent was worth 110 in terms of goods, while the money interest rate would still be 5 percent, the real interest rate would have been 15.5 percent.

Such considerations, even though they are not explicitly present to the minds of the business world, are far from being academic. The business world may speak, and even think, as though the money rate of interest could be considered by itself, without reference to the real rate. But it does not act so. The merchant or manufacturer, who is calculating whether a 7 per cent bank rate is so onerous as to compel him to curtail his operations, is very much influenced by his anticipations about the prospective price of the commodity in which he is interested.

Such considerations, even if they aren’t directly on the minds of business people, are anything but theoretical. The business world might talk and even think as if the money interest rate can be looked at on its own, without considering the real rate. But that’s not how it behaves. A merchant or manufacturer trying to determine if a 7 percent bank rate is too burdensome to continue their operations is heavily influenced by their expectations regarding the future price of the commodity they are focused on.

Thus, when prices are rising, the business man who borrows money is able to repay the lender with what, in terms of real value, not only represents no interest, but is even less than the capital originally advanced; that is, the real rate of interest falls to a negative value, and the borrower reaps a corresponding benefit. It is true that, in so far as a rise of prices is foreseen, attempts to get advantage from this by increased borrowing force the money rates of interest to move upwards. It is for this reason, amongst others, that a high bank rate should be associated with a period of rising prices, and a low bank rate with a period of falling prices. The apparent abnormality of the money rate of interest22 at such times is merely the other side of the attempt of the real rate of interest to steady itself. Nevertheless in a period of rapidly changing prices, the money rate of interest seldom adjusts itself adequately or fast enough to prevent the real rate from becoming abnormal. For it is not the fact of a given rise of prices, but the expectation of a rise compounded of the various possible price-movements and the estimated probability of each, which affects money rates; and in countries where the currency has not collapsed completely, there has seldom or never existed a sufficient general confidence in a further rise or fall of prices to cause the short-money rate of interest to rise above 10 per cent per annum, or to fall below 1 per cent.6 A fluctuation of this order is not sufficient to balance a movement of prices, up or down, of more than (say) 5 per cent per annum,—a rate which the actual price movement has frequently exceeded.

Thus, when prices are rising, a businessman who borrows money can repay the lender with funds that, in real value, not only don't represent any interest but are even less than the original capital advanced; in other words, the real interest rate falls to a negative value, and the borrower benefits accordingly. It’s true that, as long as a price increase is anticipated, efforts to take advantage of this by borrowing more will push money interest rates up. This is one reason, among others, that a high bank rate is linked to a period of rising prices, while a low bank rate is associated with a period of falling prices. The apparent oddity of the money interest rate during such times is simply the other side of the attempt to stabilize the real interest rate. However, in times of rapidly changing prices, the money interest rate rarely adjusts adequately or quickly enough to stop the real rate from becoming abnormal. It’s not just the fact of a price increase that matters, but the expectation of a rise made up of different possible price movements and the estimated likelihood of each one, which impacts money rates; and in countries where the currency hasn’t completely collapsed, there has often or never been enough general confidence in further price rises or falls to cause the short-term money interest rate to exceed 10 percent per year or drop below 1 percent. A fluctuation of this magnitude is not enough to offset a price movement up or down of more than (say) 5 percent per year, a rate that actual price movements have often surpassed.

6 The merchant, who borrows money in order to take advantage of a prospective high real rate of interest, has to act in advance of the rise in prices, and is calculating on a probability, not upon a certainty, with the result that he will be deterred by a movement in the money rate of interest of much less magnitude than the contrary movement in the real rate of interest, upon which indeed he is reckoning, yet is not reckoning with certainty.

6 The merchant, who borrows money to benefit from a potential rise in the real interest rate, needs to act before prices go up. He's making a calculation based on probability, not certainty, which means he can be discouraged by a change in the money interest rate that's smaller than the opposite change in the real interest rate that he’s counting on, even though he's not completely sure about it.

Germany has recently provided an illustration of the extraordinary degree in which the money rate of interest can rise in its endeavour to keep up with the real rate, when prices have continued to rise for so long and with such violence that, rightly or23 wrongly, every one believes that they will continue to rise further. Yet even there the money rate of interest has never risen high enough to keep pace with the rise of prices. In the autumn of 1922, the full effects were just becoming visible of the long preceding period during which the real rate of interest in Germany had reached a high negative figure, that is to say during which any one who could borrow marks and turn them into assets would have found at the end of any given period that the appreciation in the mark-value of the assets was far greater than the interest he had to pay for borrowing them. By this means great fortunes were snatched out of general calamity; and those made most who had seen first, that the right game was to borrow and to borrow and to borrow, and thus secure the difference between the real rate of interest and the money rate. But after this had been good business for many months, every one began to take a hand, with belated results on the money rate of interest. At that time, with a nominal Reichsbank rate of 8 per cent, the effective gilt-edged rate for short loans had risen to 22 per cent per annum. During the first half of 1923, the rate of the Reichsbank itself rose to 24 per cent, and subsequently to 30, and finally 108 per cent, whilst the market rate fluctuated violently at preposterous figures, reaching at times 3 per cent per week for certain types of loan. With the final currency collapse of July-September 1923, the open market24 rate was altogether demoralised, and reached figures of 100 per cent per month. In face, however, of the rate of currency depreciation, even such figures were inadequate, and the bold borrower was still making money.

Germany has recently shown just how high interest rates can go in an attempt to keep up with the real rate when prices have been rising for so long and so violently that, rightly or wrongly, everyone believes they will keep rising. Yet even there, interest rates have never climbed high enough to match the price increases. In the fall of 1922, the effects of a long period where the real rate of interest in Germany was very negative became clear. This meant that anyone who could borrow marks and invest them would find that over time, the increase in the mark’s value of those investments was much greater than the interest they had to pay on the loans. This way, many people made fortunes despite the overall disaster; those who realized first that the trick was to borrow and keep borrowing to capture the difference between the real interest rate and the nominal rate did best. But after this strategy proved successful for several months, everyone jumped in, leading to delayed impacts on the interest rate. At that time, with a nominal Reichsbank rate of 8 percent, the actual gilt-edged rate for short loans had climbed to 22 percent per year. In the first half of 1923, the Reichsbank’s rate itself rose to 24 percent, then to 30, and finally 108 percent, while the market rate swung wildly at outrageous levels, sometimes reaching 3 percent per week for certain types of loans. With the total collapse of the currency from July to September 1923, the open market rate became completely chaotic, hitting 100 percent per month. However, given the rate of currency devaluation, even those numbers were insufficient, and daring borrowers were still profiting.

In Hungary, Poland, and Russia—wherever prices were expected to collapse yet further—the same phenomenon was present, exhibiting as through a microscope what takes place everywhere when prices are expected to rise.

In Hungary, Poland, and Russia—wherever prices were expected to drop even more—the same situation was evident, showing in detail what happens everywhere when prices are predicted to go up.

On the other hand, when prices are falling 30 to 40 per cent between the average of one year and that of the next, as they were in Great Britain and in the United States during 1921, even a bank rate of 1 per cent would have been oppressive to business, since it would have corresponded to a very high rate of real interest. Any one who could have foreseen the movement even partially would have done well for himself by selling out his assets and staying out of business for the time being.

On the other hand, when prices drop by 30 to 40 percent from the average of one year to the next, like they did in Great Britain and the United States in 1921, even a bank rate of 1 percent would have been burdensome for businesses, as it would reflect a very high real interest rate. Anyone who could have anticipated this trend, even to some extent, would have been wise to liquidate their assets and step away from business for a while.

But if the depreciation of money is a source of gain to the business man, it is also the occasion of opprobrium. To the consumer the business man’s exceptional profits appear as the cause (instead of the consequence) of the hated rise of prices. Amidst the rapid fluctuations of his fortunes he himself loses his conservative instincts, and begins to think more of the large gains of the moment than of the lesser, but permanent, profits of normal business. The welfare25 of his enterprise in the relatively distant future weighs less with him than before, and thoughts are excited of a quick fortune and clearing out. His excessive gains have come to him unsought and without fault or design on his part, but once acquired he does not lightly surrender them, and will struggle to retain his booty. With such impulses and so placed, the business man is himself not free from a suppressed uneasiness. In his heart he loses his former self-confidence in his relation to society, in his utility and necessity in the economic scheme. He fears the future of his business and his class, and the less secure he feels his fortune to be the tighter he clings to it. The business man, the prop of society and the builder of the future, to whose activities and rewards there had been accorded, not long ago, an almost religious sanction, he of all men and classes most respectable, praiseworthy and necessary, with whom interference was not only disastrous but almost impious, was now to suffer sidelong glances, to feel himself suspected and attacked, the victim of unjust and injurious laws,—to become, and know himself half-guilty, a profiteer.

But if the decline in the value of money benefits the businessman, it also brings criticism. To consumers, the extraordinary profits of businesspeople seem to be the reason (rather than the result) for the disliked increase in prices. Amid the swift ups and downs of his fortunes, he loses his cautious instincts and starts to focus more on the big gains of the moment rather than the smaller, yet stable, profits of regular business. The future welfare of his enterprise matters less to him than before, and he entertains thoughts of making a quick fortune and getting out. His excessive profits have come to him unexpectedly and without any wrongdoing or intent on his part, but once he has them, he doesn't easily let them go and will fight to keep his spoils. With these impulses and his position, the businessman isn’t free from an underlying anxiety. Deep down, he loses his former self-assurance regarding his role in society, and his usefulness and necessity in the economic system. He worries about the future of his business and his class, and the less secure he feels his wealth is, the more tightly he clings to it. The businessman, who is the backbone of society and the architect of the future, whose efforts and rewards were once viewed with near-reverence, now finds himself subjected to suspicious glances, feeling suspected and attacked, becoming the victim of unfair and harmful laws,—to become, and see himself as half-guilty, a profiteer.

No man of spirit will consent to remain poor if he believes his betters to have gained their goods by lucky gambling. To convert the business man into the profiteer is to strike a blow at capitalism, because it destroys the psychological equilibrium26 which permits the perpetuance of unequal rewards. The economic doctrine of normal profits, vaguely apprehended by every one, is a necessary condition for the justification of capitalism. The business man is only tolerable so long as his gains can be held to bear some relation to what, roughly and in some sense, his activities have contributed to society.

No person with ambition will agree to stay poor if they think that those above them got their wealth through luck. Turning the businessperson into a profiteer undermines capitalism because it disrupts the psychological balance that allows for unequal rewards to continue. The economic idea of normal profits, which everyone has a basic understanding of, is essential for justifying capitalism. A businessperson is only acceptable as long as their earnings can be seen as somewhat related to what their actions have contributed to society. 26

This, then, is the second disturbance to the existing economic order for which the depreciation of money is responsible. If the fall in the value of money discourages investment, it also discredits enterprise.

This is the second disruption to the current economic system caused by the devaluation of money. When the value of money drops, it not only discourages investment but also undermines entrepreneurship.

Not that the business man was allowed, even during the period of boom, to retain the whole of his exceptional profits. A host of popular remedies vainly attempted to cure the evils of the day; which remedies themselves—subsidies, price and rent fixing, profiteer hunting, and excess profits duties—eventually became not the least part of the evils.

Not that the businessman was allowed, even during the boom, to keep all of his exceptional profits. A slew of popular solutions tried unsuccessfully to fix the problems of the day; those solutions—subsidies, price and rent controls, cracking down on profiteers, and excess profits taxes—ended up being a significant part of the issues themselves.

In due course came the depression, with falling prices, which operate on those who hold stocks in a manner exactly opposite to rising prices. Excessive losses, bearing no relation to the efficiency of the business, took the place of windfall gains; and the effort of every one to hold as small stocks as possible brought industry to a standstill, just as previously their efforts to accumulate stocks had over-stimulated it. Unemployment succeeded Profiteering as the27 problem of the hour. But whilst the cyclical movement of trade and credit has, in the good-currency countries, partly reversed, for the time being at least, the great rise of 1920, it has, in the countries of continuing inflation, made no more than a ripple on the rapids of depreciation.

In due time, the depression hit, causing prices to drop, which affects stockholders in a way that's completely opposite to rising prices. Massive losses, unrelated to how well the business is running, replaced unexpected gains; and everyone's effort to keep their stock levels as low as possible brought industries to a halt, just as their previous drive to stockpile had over-stimulated them. Unemployment took the place of profiteering as the major issue of the moment. However, while the cyclical nature of trade and credit has, in countries with good currency, partly reversed the significant rise of 1920 for now, in countries experiencing ongoing inflation, it’s barely made a dent in the rapid depreciation.

3. The Earner.

It has been a commonplace of economic text-books that wages tend to lag behind prices, with the result that the real earnings of the wage-earner are diminished during a period of rising prices. This has often been true in the past, and may be true even now of certain classes of labour which are ill-placed or ill-organised for improving their position. But in Great Britain, at any rate, and in the United States also, some important sections of labour were able to take advantage of the situation not only to obtain money wages equivalent in purchasing power to what they had before, but to secure a real improvement, to combine this with a diminution in their hours of work (and, so far, of the work done), and to accomplish this (in the case of Great Britain) at a time when the total wealth of the community as a whole had suffered a decrease. This reversal of the usual course has not been due to an accident and is traceable to definite causes.

It has been a common point in economic textbooks that wages usually fall behind prices, resulting in a decrease in the real earnings of wage-earners during times of rising prices. This has often been the case in the past and may still apply to certain groups of workers who are poorly positioned or not well organized to improve their situation. However, in Great Britain, at least, and in the United States as well, some important labor groups were able to leverage the situation not only to secure wages that maintained their purchasing power but also to achieve a genuine improvement. They managed to reduce their working hours (and, so far, the amount of work done) during a time when the overall wealth of the community had actually decreased in Great Britain. This shift from the usual pattern has not been random and can be traced back to specific causes.

The organisation of certain classes of labour—railwaymen, miners, dockers, and others—for the28 purpose of securing wage increases is better than it was. Life in the army, perhaps for the first time in the history of wars, raised in many respects the conventional standard of requirements,—the soldier was better clothed, better shod, and often better fed than the labourer, and his wife, adding in war time a separation allowance to new opportunities to earn, had also enlarged her ideas.

The organization of certain labor groups—like railway workers, miners, dock workers, and others—to secure wage increases is in a better state than it used to be. Life in the military, possibly for the first time in the history of warfare, raised the usual standards in many ways—the soldier had better clothing, better footwear, and often better nutrition than the laborer. His wife, receiving a separation allowance during the war along with new opportunities to earn, also expanded her perspectives.

But these influences, while they would have supplied the motive, might have lacked the means to the result if it had not been for another factor—the windfalls of the profiteer. The fact that the business man had been gaining, and gaining notoriously, considerable windfall profits in excess of the normal profits of trade, laid him open to pressure, not only from his employees but from public opinion generally; and enabled him to meet this pressure without financial difficulty. In fact, it was worth his while to pay ransom, and to share with his workmen the good fortune of the day.

But these influences, while they could have provided the motivation, might have lacked the means to achieve the result if it hadn't been for another factor—the unexpected gains of the profiteer. The fact that the businessman had been earning, and earning significantly, substantial windfall profits beyond the normal profits of trade made him vulnerable to pressure, not just from his employees but also from public opinion in general; and it allowed him to handle this pressure without financial strain. In fact, it made sense for him to pay a ransom and to share his good fortune with his workers.

Thus the working classes improved their relative position in the years following the war, as against all other classes except that of the “profiteers.” In some important cases they improved their absolute position—that is to say, account being taken of shorter hours, increased money wages, and higher prices, some sections of the working classes secured for themselves a higher real remuneration for each unit of effort or work done. But we cannot estimate29 the stability of this state of affairs, as contrasted with its desirability, unless we know the source from which the increased reward of the working classes was drawn. Was it due to a permanent modification of the economic factors which determine the distribution of the national product between different classes? Or was it due to some temporary and exhaustible influence connected with inflation and with the resulting disturbance in the standard of value?

Thus, the working classes improved their relative position in the years after the war, compared to all other classes except for the “profiteers.” In some significant cases, they also improved their absolute position—that is to say, taking into account shorter hours, increased wages, and higher prices, some segments of the working classes managed to secure a greater real pay for each unit of effort or work performed. However, we cannot assess29 the stability of this situation, as opposed to its desirability, without knowing where the increased rewards for the working classes came from. Was it the result of a permanent change in the economic factors that influence how the national product is distributed among different classes? Or was it due to a temporary and limited effect linked to inflation and the resulting disruption in the standard of value?

A violent disturbance of the standard of value obscures the true situation, and for a time one class can benefit at the expense of another surreptitiously and without producing immediately the inevitable reaction. In such conditions a country can without knowing it expend in current consumption those savings which it thinks it is investing for the future; and it can even trench on existing capital or fail to make good its current depreciation. When the value of money is greatly fluctuating, the distinction between capital and income becomes confused. It is one of the evils of a depreciating currency that it enables a community to live on its capital unawares. The increasing money value of the community’s capital goods obscures temporarily a diminution in the real quantity of the stock.

A violent disruption of the standard of value obscures the true situation, and for a while, one group can benefit at the expense of another secretly and without immediately triggering the inevitable fallout. Under these conditions, a country can unknowingly spend its savings on current consumption that it believes it is investing for the future; it can even draw on existing capital or fail to replace its current depreciation. When money value is fluctuating significantly, the line between capital and income becomes blurred. One of the downsides of a depreciating currency is that it allows a community to live off its capital without realizing it. The rising money value of the community’s capital goods temporarily obscures a decrease in the actual quantity of the stock.

The period of depression has exacted its penalty from the working classes more in the form of unemployment than by a lowering of real wages, and State assistance to the unemployed has greatly30 moderated even this penalty. Money wages have followed prices downwards. But the depression of 1921–22 did not reverse or even greatly diminish the relative advantage gained by the working classes over the middle class during the previous years. In 1923 British wage rates stood at an appreciably higher level above the pre-war rates than did the cost of living, if allowance is made for the shorter hours worked.

The period of depression has taken a toll on the working class mainly through unemployment rather than significantly lowering real wages, and state support for the unemployed has significantly lessened this burden. Money wages have fallen alongside prices. However, the depression of 1921–22 didn’t reverse or greatly reduce the relative advantage that the working class had gained over the middle class in the previous years. By 1923, British wage rates were noticeably higher than the pre-war rates, especially when you factor in the shorter hours worked, compared to the cost of living.

In Germany and Austria also, but in a far greater degree than in England or in France, the change in the value of money has thrown the burden of hard circumstances on the middle class, and hitherto the labouring class have by no means supported their full proportionate share. If it be true that university professors in Germany have some responsibility for the atmosphere which bred war, their class has paid the penalty. The effects of the impoverishment, throughout Europe, of the middle class, out of which most good things have sprung, must slowly accumulate in a decay of Science and Art.

In Germany and Austria, but even more so than in England or France, changes in the value of money have heavily impacted the middle class, placing a greater burden on them, while the working class has not fully shared this load. If it's true that university professors in Germany share some blame for the environment that led to war, their profession has faced the consequences. The decline in the middle class across Europe, from which most positive developments have emerged, will inevitably lead to a gradual decline in Science and Art.

* * * * *

We conclude that Inflation redistributes wealth in a manner very injurious to the investor, very beneficial to the business man, and probably, in modern industrial conditions, beneficial on the whole to the earner. Its most striking consequence is its injustice to those who in good faith have committed31 their savings to titles to money rather than to things. But injustice on such a scale has further consequences. The above discussion suggests that the diminution in the production of wealth which has taken place in Europe since the war has been, to a certain extent, at the expense, not of the consumption of any class, but of the accumulation of capital. Moreover, Inflation has not only diminished the capacity of the investing class to save but has destroyed the atmosphere of confidence which is a condition of the willingness to save. Yet a growing population requires, for the maintenance of the same standard of life, a proportionate growth of capital. In Great Britain for many years to come, regardless of what the birth-rate may be from now onwards (and at the present time the number of births per day is nearly double the number of deaths), upwards of 250,000 new labourers will enter the labour market annually in excess of those going out of it. To maintain this growing body of labour at the same standard of life as before, we require not merely growing markets but a growing capital equipment. In order to keep our standards from deterioration, the national capital must grow as fast as the national labour supply, which means new savings of at least £250,000,0007 per annum at present.32 The favourable conditions for saving which existed in the nineteenth century, even though we smile at them, provided a proportionate growth between capital and population. The disturbance of the pre-existing balance between classes, which in its origins is largely traceable to the changes in the value of money, may have destroyed these favourable conditions.

We conclude that inflation redistributes wealth in a way that hurts investors, benefits business owners, and is probably, under today’s industrial conditions, overall beneficial to workers. Its most obvious effect is its injustice to those who, in good faith, have invested their savings in money rather than in tangible assets. However, such widespread injustice has further repercussions. The discussion above indicates that the reduction in wealth production in Europe since the war has, to some extent, come at the expense not of any class's consumption but of capital accumulation. Additionally, inflation has not only reduced the investing class's ability to save but has also undermined the atmosphere of confidence that is essential for a willingness to save. Yet, a growing population needs, to maintain the same standard of living, a corresponding increase in capital. In Great Britain, for many years to come, regardless of what the birth rate may be moving forward (currently, the number of births per day is nearly double the number of deaths), over 250,000 new workers will enter the job market each year, exceeding those who leave it. To maintain this growing workforce at the same standard of living as before, we need not just larger markets but also a growing capital base. To prevent our standards from declining, national capital must grow as fast as the national labor supply, which means new savings of at least £250,000,0007 each year at present.32 The favorable conditions for saving that existed in the nineteenth century, even if we chuckle at them now, enabled a balanced growth between capital and population. The disruption of the previously existing balance between classes, which largely stems from changes in the value of money, may have wiped out these favorable conditions.

7 That is to say, it costs not less than £1000 in new capital outlay to equip a working man with organisation and appliances, which will render his labour efficient, and to house and supply himself and his family. Indeed this is probably an underestimate.

7 That means it takes at least £1000 in new investment to provide a worker with the tools and resources that will make his labor effective, as well as to support him and his family. In fact, this is likely an underestimate.

On the other hand Deflation, as we shall see in the second section of the next chapter, is liable, in these days of huge national debts expressed in legal-tender money, to overturn the balance so far the other way in the interests of the rentier, that the burden of taxation becomes intolerable on the productive classes of the community.

On the other hand, deflation, as we'll see in the second section of the next chapter, can, in today's world of massive national debts in legal-tender currency, tip the balance too far the other way in favor of the rentier, making the tax burden unbearable for the productive classes of society.

II.—Changes in the Value of Money as They Affect Production.

If, for any reason right or wrong, the business world expects that prices will fall, the processes of production tend to be inhibited; and if it expects that prices will rise, they tend to be over-stimulated. A fluctuation in the measuring-rod of value does not alter in the least the wealth of the world, the needs of the world, or the productive capacity of the world. It ought not, therefore, to affect the character or the volume of what is produced. A movement of relative prices, that is to say of the comparative prices of33 different commodities, ought to influence the character of production, because it is an indication that various commodities are not being produced in the exactly right proportions. But this is not true of a change, as such, in the general price level.

If, for any reason—right or wrong—the business world expects prices to drop, production processes tend to slow down; and if it expects prices to rise, they tend to ramp up too much. A change in the measuring stick of value does not change the wealth of the world, the world's needs, or its production capacity at all. Therefore, it shouldn't impact the nature or volume of what gets produced. A shift in relative prices, meaning the comparative prices of33 different goods, should affect the type of production, because it indicates that some commodities are not being produced in the right amounts. But this doesn't apply to a change, in itself, in the general price level.

The fact that the expectation of changes in the general price level affects the processes of production, is deeply rooted in the peculiarities of the existing economic organisation of society, partly in those described in the preceding sections of this chapter, partly in others to be mentioned in a moment. We have already seen that a change in the general level of prices, that is to say a change in the measuring-rod, which fixes the obligation of the borrowers of money (who make the decisions which set production in motion) to the lenders (who are inactive once they have lent their money), effects a redistribution of real wealth between the two groups. Furthermore, the active group can, if they foresee such a change, alter their action in advance in such a way as to minimise their losses to the other group or to increase their gains from it, if and when the expected change in the value of money occurs. If they expect a fall, it may pay them, as a group, to damp production down, although such enforced idleness impoverishes society as a whole. If they expect a rise, it may pay them to increase their borrowings and to swell production beyond the point where the real return is just sufficient to recompense society as a whole for the effort made.34 Sometimes, of course, a change in the measuring-rod, especially if it is unforeseen, may benefit one group at the expense of the other disproportionately to any influence it exerts on the volume of production; but the tendency, in so far as the active group anticipate a change, will be as I have described it.8 This is simply to say that the intensity of production is largely governed in existing conditions by the anticipated real profit of the entrepreneur. Yet this criterion is the right one for the community as a whole only when the delicate adjustment of interests is not upset by fluctuations in the standard of value.

The expectation of changes in the general price level impacts production processes, rooted deeply in the specific features of our current economic organization. These features were partly described in the earlier sections of this chapter and partly in what will be mentioned shortly. We’ve already noted that a change in the overall price level—essentially, a change in the measuring stick that determines the obligations of borrowers (who initiate production decisions) to lenders (who remain passive after lending their money)—results in a redistribution of real wealth between these two groups. Additionally, the active group can adjust their actions ahead of time if they anticipate such a change, allowing them to reduce their losses to the other group or to increase their gains when the expected change in the value of money happens. If they expect a decline, it might be beneficial for them, as a group, to slow down production, even though this enforced idleness harms society as a whole. If they expect a rise, it may make sense for them to increase their borrowing and ramp up production beyond the point where the actual return is just enough to reward society as a whole for the effort expended.34 Sometimes, a change in the measuring stick, especially if unexpected, can disproportionately benefit one group at the expense of the other compared to its effect on production levels. However, if the active group anticipates a change, the tendency will be as described. This just means that the intensity of production is mainly influenced by the expected real profit of the entrepreneur. Yet, this is the right criterion for the community as a whole only when the delicate balance of interests isn’t disrupted by fluctuations in the standard of value.

8 The interests of the salaried and wage-earning classes will, in so far as their salaries and wages tend to be steadier in money-value than in real-value, coincide with those of the inactive capitalist group. The interests of the consumer will, in so far as he can vary the distribution of his floating resources between cash and goods purchased in advance of consumption, coincide with those of the active capitalist group; and his decisions, made in his own interests, may serve to reinforce the effect of those of the latter. But that the interests of the same individual will often be those of one of the groups in one of his capacities and of the other in another of his capacities, does not save the situation or affect the argument. For his losses in one capacity depend only infinitesimally on him personally refraining from action in his other capacity. The facts, that a man is a cannibal at home and eaten abroad, do not cancel out to render him innocuous and safe.

8 The interests of salaried and wage-earning individuals will, as long as their pay remains more consistent in monetary value than in actual value, align with those of the inactive capitalist group. The interests of consumers, to the extent that they can adjust how they distribute their available resources between cash and goods bought ahead of time, will align with those of the active capitalist group; and their choices, made for their own benefit, might reinforce the actions of the latter. However, the fact that an individual’s interests may represent one group in one context and the other group in a different context does not resolve the issue or change the argument. Their losses in one context depend only minimally on their choice not to act in another context. The reality that someone might be a predator at home and prey abroad doesn’t negate those roles to make them harmless and secure.

But there is a further reason, connected with the above but nevertheless distinct, why modern methods of production require a stable standard,—a reason springing to a certain extent out of the character of the social organisation described above, but aggravated by the technical methods of present-day productive processes. With the development of international trade, involving great distances between35 the place of original production and the place of final consumption, and with the increased complication of the technical processes of manufacture, the amount of risk which attaches to the undertaking of production and the length of time through which this risk must be carried are much greater than they would be in a comparatively small self-contained community. Even in agriculture, whilst the risk to the consumer is diminished by drawing supplies from many different sources, which average the fluctuations of the seasons, the risk to the agricultural producer is increased, since, when his crop falls below his expectations in volume, he may fail to be compensated by a higher price. This increased risk is the price which producers have to pay for the other advantages of a high degree of specialisation and for the variety of their markets and their sources of supply.

But there’s another reason, related to the one above but still distinct, why modern production methods need a stable standard. This reason partly comes from the type of social organization described earlier, but it’s made worse by the technical methods used in today’s production processes. With the rise of international trade—which involves significant distances between where things are made and where they are consumed—and with the increasing complexity of manufacturing processes, the amount of risk involved in production and the duration of that risk are much greater than they would be in a smaller, self-sufficient community. Even in agriculture, while the risk to consumers is reduced by sourcing supplies from various places that balance out seasonal fluctuations, the risk for agricultural producers actually increases. When their crop yields fall short of expectations, they might not receive higher prices to make up for it. This heightened risk is the trade-off producers face for enjoying the benefits of specialization, along with a wider range of markets and sources of supply.

The provision of adequate facilities for the carrying of this risk at a moderate cost is one of the greatest of the problems of modern economic life, and one of those which so far have been least satisfactorily solved. The business of keeping the productive machine in continuous operation (and thereby avoiding unemployment) would be greatly simplified if this risk could be diminished or if we could devise a better means of insurance against it for the individual entrepreneur.

The availability of suitable facilities to manage this risk at a reasonable cost is one of the biggest challenges in modern economic life, and so far, it's one of the problems that has been least effectively addressed. Keeping the productive system running smoothly (and thus preventing unemployment) would be much easier if this risk could be reduced or if we could come up with a better way to insure individuals entrepreneurs against it.

A considerable part of the risk arises out of fluctuations in the relative value of a commodity compared with that of commodities in general during the interval36 which must elapse between the commencement of production and the time of consumption. This part of the risk is independent of the vagaries of money, and must be tackled by methods with which we are not concerned here. But there is also a considerable risk directly arising out of instability in the value of money. During the lengthy process of production the business world is incurring outgoings in terms of money—paying out in money for wages and other expenses of production—in the expectation of recouping this outlay by disposing of the product for money at a later date. That is to say, the business world as a whole must always be in a position where it stands to gain by a rise of price and to lose by a fall of price. Whether it likes it or not, the technique of production under a régime of money-contract forces the business world always to carry a big speculative position; and if it is reluctant to carry this position, the productive process must be slackened. The argument is not affected by the fact that there is some degree of specialisation of function within the business world, in so far as the professional speculator comes to the assistance of the producer proper by taking over from him a part of his risk.

A significant portion of the risk comes from changes in the relative value of a commodity compared to the values of other commodities as time passes36 between when production starts and when consumption occurs. This risk is unrelated to the unpredictable nature of money and needs to be addressed with methods that we won't discuss here. However, there is also a significant risk that directly stems from the instability of money's value. Throughout the lengthy production process, businesses are spending money—paying wages and other production expenses—hoping to recover these costs by selling the product for money later on. In other words, the business world must constantly be in a position where it can benefit from price increases and suffer from price decreases. Whether they want to or not, the process of production under a régime of money contracts forces businesses to maintain a substantial speculative position; if they're hesitant to do so, the production process must be slowed down. This argument holds true even if there’s a certain level of specialization within the business world, as professional speculators help producers by taking on some of their risk.

Now it follows from this, not merely that the actual occurrence of price changes profits some classes and injures others (which has been the theme of the first section of this chapter), but that a general fear of falling prices may inhibit the productive process37 altogether. For if prices are expected to fall, not enough risk-takers can be found who are willing to carry a speculative “bull” position, and this means that entrepreneurs will be reluctant to embark on lengthy productive processes involving a money outlay long in advance of money recoupment,—whence unemployment. The fact of falling prices injures entrepreneurs; consequently the fear of falling prices causes them to protect themselves by curtailing their operations; yet it is upon the aggregate of their individual estimations of the risk, and their willingness to run the risk, that the activity of production and of employment mainly depends.

Now, this means not just that the actual occurrence of price changes benefits some groups and hurts others (which has been the focus of the first section of this chapter), but that a general fear of falling prices can completely hold back the production process37. If prices are expected to drop, there won't be enough risk-takers willing to take a speculative “bull” position, meaning entrepreneurs will hesitate to start long production processes that require spending money long before they get it back, leading to unemployment. The fact that prices are falling harms entrepreneurs; as a result, the fear of falling prices makes them protect themselves by cutting back on their operations. However, the level of their individual assessment of risk and their willingness to take risks are what mainly drives the activity of production and employment.

There is a further aggravation of the case, in that an expectation about the course of prices tends, if it is widely held, to be cumulative in its results up to a certain point. If prices are expected to rise and the business world acts on this expectation, that very fact causes them to rise for a time and, by verifying the expectation, reinforces it; and similarly, if it expects them to fall. Thus a comparatively weak initial impetus may be adequate to produce a considerable fluctuation.

There’s an additional complication in this situation: if a lot of people expect prices to change in a certain way, that expectation tends to build on itself up to a certain point. If everyone thinks prices will go up and the business world responds to that belief, this reality actually causes prices to rise temporarily and, by confirming that belief, strengthens it; the same goes for expectations of falling prices. Therefore, even a relatively small initial trigger can lead to significant price fluctuations.

Three generations of economists have recognised that certain influences produce a progressive and continuing change in the value of money, that others produce in it an oscillatory movement, and that the latter act cumulatively in their initial stages but produce the conditions for a reaction after a certain38 point. But their investigations into the oscillatory movements have been chiefly confined, until lately, to the question what kind of cause is responsible for the initial impetus. Some have been fascinated by the idea that the initial cause is always the same and is astronomically regular in the times of its appearance. Others have maintained, more plausibly, that sometimes one thing operates and sometimes another.

Three generations of economists have recognized that certain influences cause a steady and ongoing change in the value of money, while others create fluctuating movements. The latter tend to build up during their early stages but eventually lead to a reaction after a certain38 point. However, their research into these fluctuating movements has mainly focused, until recently, on identifying the type of cause that sparks the initial change. Some have been intrigued by the idea that the initial cause is always the same and happens with astronomical regularity. Others have argued, more convincingly, that sometimes one factor comes into play and sometimes another.

It is one of the objects of this book to urge that the best way to cure this mortal disease of individualism is to provide that there shall never exist any confident expectation either that prices generally are going to fall or that they are going to rise; and also that there shall be no serious risk that a movement, if it does occur, will be a big one. If, unexpectedly and accidentally, a moderate movement were to occur, wealth, though it might be redistributed, would not be diminished thereby.

It’s one of the goals of this book to suggest that the best way to tackle the serious problem of individualism is to ensure that there’s no strong expectation that prices will either drop or rise overall; and also that there’s no significant risk that any movement, if it happens, will be large. If, unexpectedly and by chance, a moderate movement were to take place, wealth, although it might be redistributed, would not be reduced as a result.

To procure this result by removing all possible influences towards an initial movement, whether such influences are to be found in the skies only or everywhere, would seem to be a hopeless enterprise. The remedy would lie, rather, in so controlling the standard of value that, whenever something occurred which, left to itself, would create an expectation of a change in the general level of prices, the controlling authority should take steps to counteract this expectation by setting in motion some factor of a contrary tendency. Even if such a policy were not wholly successful,39 either in counteracting expectations or in avoiding actual movements, it would be an improvement on the policy of sitting quietly by, whilst a standard of value, governed by chance causes and deliberately removed from central control, produces expectations which paralyse or intoxicate the government of production.

To achieve this outcome by eliminating all possible influences on an initial move, whether those influences come from the heavens or anywhere else, seems like a hopeless task. The solution would be to manage the value standard in such a way that, whenever an event happens that would normally lead to an expectation of a change in overall price levels, the governing authority should take action to counter that expectation by introducing something that pushes against it. Even if this approach doesn't completely succeed in countering expectations or preventing real changes, it would still be better than doing nothing while a value standard, influenced by random factors and intentionally kept out of central control, creates expectations that disrupt or overwhelm production management.

* * * * *

We see, therefore, that rising prices and falling prices each have their characteristic disadvantage. The Inflation which causes the former means Injustice to individuals and to classes,—particularly to investors; and is therefore unfavourable to saving. The Deflation which causes falling prices means Impoverishment to labour and to enterprise by leading entrepreneurs to restrict production, in their endeavour to avoid loss to themselves; and is therefore disastrous to employment. The counterparts are, of course, also true,—namely that Deflation means Injustice to borrowers, and that Inflation leads to the over-stimulation of industrial activity. But these results are not so marked as those emphasised above, because borrowers are in a better position to protect themselves from the worst effects of Deflation than lenders are to protect themselves from those of Inflation, and because labour is in a better position to protect itself from over-exertion in good times than from under-employment in bad times.

We can see that rising prices and falling prices each have their own distinct disadvantages. Inflation, which causes rising prices, creates injustice for individuals and certain groups—especially for investors—and is therefore not good for saving. Deflation, which leads to falling prices, results in hardship for workers and businesses by causing entrepreneurs to cut back on production in an attempt to avoid losses; this is ultimately harmful to employment. The opposite is also true—deflation creates injustice for borrowers, while inflation can lead to excessive stimulation of industrial activity. However, these consequences aren't as noticeable as the ones mentioned earlier because borrowers can better protect themselves from the negative effects of deflation than lenders can from inflation. Similarly, workers can better shield themselves from overwork during prosperous times than from underemployment during downturns.

40

40

Thus Inflation is unjust and Deflation is inexpedient. Of the two perhaps Deflation is, if we rule out exaggerated inflations such as that of Germany, the worse; because it is worse, in an impoverished world, to provoke unemployment than to disappoint the rentier. But it is not necessary that we should weigh one evil against the other. It is easier to agree that both are evils to be shunned. The Individualistic Capitalism of to-day, precisely because it entrusts saving to the individual investor and production to the individual employer, presumes a stable measuring-rod of value, and cannot be efficient—perhaps cannot survive—without one.

So, inflation is unfair and deflation is not advisable. Of the two, deflation might be worse, unless we consider extreme cases like Germany’s inflation, because it's more harmful in a struggling world to cause unemployment than to let down the investors. But we don't need to compare the two evils. It's easier to agree that both are problems we should avoid. Today's individualistic capitalism, precisely because it relies on individual investors for saving and individual employers for production, assumes a stable standard of value, and it cannot be effective—maybe it can't even continue to exist—without one.

For these grave causes we must free ourselves from the deep distrust which exists against allowing the regulation of the standard of value to be the subject of deliberate decision. We can no longer afford to leave it in the category of which the distinguishing characteristics are possessed in different degrees by the weather, the birth-rate, and the Constitution,—matters which are settled by natural causes, or are the resultant of the separate action of many individuals acting independently, or require a Revolution to change them.

For these serious reasons, we need to overcome the deep distrust that exists about allowing the regulation of the standard of value to be a matter of deliberate decision. We can’t afford to leave it in the same category as things that are influenced to varying degrees by the weather, the birth rate, and the Constitution—issues that are determined by natural causes, are the result of many individuals acting separately, or need a Revolution to change.


I. Inflation as a Method of Taxation

A Government can live for a long time, even the German Government or the Russian Government, by printing paper money. That is to say, it can by this means secure the command over real resources,—resources just as real as those obtained by taxation. The method is condemned, but its efficacy, up to a point, must be admitted. A Government can live by this means when it can live by no other. It is the form of taxation which the public find hardest to evade and even the weakest Government can enforce, when it can enforce nothing else. Of this character have been the progressive and catastrophic inflations practised in Central and Eastern Europe, as distinguished from the limited and oscillatory inflations, experienced for example in Great Britain and the United States, which have been examined in the preceding chapter.

Government can survive for a long time, even the German Government or the Russian Government, by printing money. In other words, it can use this method to gain control over real resources—resources just as tangible as those acquired through taxation. This approach is criticized, but its effectiveness, to some extent, cannot be denied. A Government can rely on this method when no other options are available. It's the type of taxation that the public finds hardest to avoid, and even the weakest Government can impose it when it can't impose anything else. This has been the case with the severe and drastic inflations seen in Central and Eastern Europe, compared to the more limited and fluctuating inflations experienced, for instance, in Great Britain and the United States, which were discussed in the previous chapter.

The Quantity Theory of Money states that the42 amount of cash which the community requires, assuming certain habits of business and of banking to be established, and assuming also a given level and distribution of wealth, depends on the level of prices. If the consumption and production of actual goods are unaltered but prices and wages are doubled, then twice as much cash as before is required to do the business. The truth of this, properly explained and qualified, it is foolish to deny. The Theory infers from this that the aggregate real value of all the paper money in circulation remains more or less the same, irrespective of the number of units of it in circulation, provided the habits and prosperity of the people are not changed,—i.e. the community retains in the shape of cash the command over a more or less constant amount of real wealth, which is the same thing as to say that the total quantity of money in circulation has a more or less fixed purchasing power.9

The Quantity Theory of Money states that the42 amount of cash the community needs, assuming certain business and banking habits are established, and assuming a certain level and distribution of wealth, depends on the price level. If the consumption and production of actual goods stay the same but prices and wages double, then twice as much cash as before is needed to conduct business. It would be silly to deny this, when explained and qualified properly. The Theory suggests that the aggregate real value of all the paper money in circulation remains roughly the same, regardless of the number of units in circulation, as long as the habits and prosperity of the people do not change — i.e. the community maintains in cash the ability to command a roughly constant amount of real wealth, which means that the total amount of money in circulation has a relatively fixed purchasing power.9

9 See also Chapter III., Section I.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Also see Chapter III., __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

Let us suppose that there are in circulation 9,000,000 currency notes, and that they have altogether a value equivalent to 36,000,000 gold dollars.10 Suppose that the Government prints a further 3,000,000 notes, so that the amount of currency is now 12,000,000; then, in accordance with the above theory, the 12,000,000 notes are still43 only equivalent to $36,000,000. In the first state of affairs, therefore, each note = $4, and in the second state of affairs each note = $3. Consequently the 9,000,000 notes originally held by the public are now worth $27,000,000 instead of $36,000,000, and the 3,000,000 notes newly issued by the Government are worth $9,000,000. Thus by the process of printing the additional notes the Government has transferred from the public to itself an amount of resources equal to $9,000,000, just as successfully as if it had raised this sum in taxation.

Let’s say there are 9,000,000 currency notes in circulation, and they’re worth a total of 36,000,000 gold dollars. Suppose the Government prints an additional 3,000,000 notes, bringing the total number of notes to 12,000,000; according to the theory mentioned, the 12,000,000 notes are still only equivalent to $36,000,000. In the first scenario, each note equals $4, and in the second scenario, each note equals $3. As a result, the 9,000,000 notes originally held by the public are now worth $27,000,000 instead of $36,000,000, and the 3,000,000 new notes issued by the Government are worth $9,000,000. Therefore, by printing the extra notes, the Government has effectively taken $9,000,000 worth of resources from the public, just as if it had collected that amount through taxes.

10 It will simplify the argument to ignore the fact that the value of gold in terms of commodities is itself a fluctuating one, and to treat the value of a currency in terms of gold as a rough measure of its value in terms of “real resources” generally.

10 It will make the argument easier to overlook the fact that the value of gold in relation to commodities is constantly changing, and to consider the value of a currency in terms of gold as a rough indicator of its worth in relation to “real resources” overall.

On whom has the tax fallen? Clearly on the holders of the original 9,000,000 notes, whose notes are now worth 25 per cent less than they were before. The inflation has amounted to a tax of 25 per cent on all holders of notes in proportion to their holdings. The burden of the tax is well spread, cannot be evaded, costs nothing to collect, and falls, in a rough sort of way, in proportion to the wealth of the victim. No wonder its superficial advantages have attracted Ministers of Finance.

On whom has the tax fallen? Clearly on the holders of the original 9,000,000 notes, whose notes are now worth 25 percent less than they were before. The inflation has acted as a tax of 25 percent on all note holders in relation to their holdings. The burden of the tax is well distributed, cannot be avoided, costs nothing to collect, and falls, roughly speaking, in proportion to the wealth of the victim. No wonder its obvious advantages have caught the attention of Finance Ministers.

Temporarily, the yield of the tax is even a little better for the Government than by the above calculation. For the new notes can be passed off at first at the same value as though there were still only 9,000,000 notes altogether. It is only after the new notes get into circulation and people begin to spend them that they realise that the notes are worth less than before.

Temporarily, the tax yield is even slightly better for the government than calculated above. The new notes can initially be circulated at the same value as if there were only 9,000,000 notes in total. It's only after the new notes start circulating and people begin using them that they realize the notes are worth less than before.

44

44

What is there to prevent the Government from repeating this process over and over again? The reader must observe that the aggregate note issue is still worth $36,000,000. If, therefore, the Government now prints a further 4,000,000 notes, there will be 16,000,000 notes altogether, which by the same argument as before are worth $2.25 each instead of $3, and by issuing the 4,000,000 notes the Government has, just as before, transferred an amount of resources equal to $9,000,000 from the public to itself. The holders of notes have again suffered a tax of 25 per cent in proportion to their holdings.

What’s to stop the Government from doing this repeatedly? The reader should note that the total note issue is still worth $36,000,000. So, if the Government prints an additional 4,000,000 notes, there will be 16,000,000 notes in total, which, using the same reasoning as before, are now worth $2.25 each instead of $3. By issuing those 4,000,000 notes, the Government has, just like before, transferred resources totaling $9,000,000 from the public to itself. The note holders have once again faced a 25 percent tax based on their holdings.

Like other forms of taxation, these exactions, if overdone and out of proportion to the wealth of the community, must diminish its prosperity and lower its standards, so that at the lower standard of life the aggregate value of the currency may fall and still be enough to go round. But this effect cannot interfere very much with the efficacy of taxing by inflation. Even if the aggregate real value of the currency falls for these reasons to a half or two-thirds of what it was before, which represents a tremendous lowering of the standards of life, this only means that the quantity of notes which the Government must issue in order to obtain a given result must be raised proportionately. It remains true that by this means the Government can still secure for itself a large share of the available surplus of the community.

Like other types of taxes, these charges, if they are excessive and disproportionate to the wealth of the community, can hurt its prosperity and lower its standards. This can lead to a situation where the overall value of the currency drops, but there’s still enough money to go around at this lower standard of living. However, this effect doesn’t significantly impact the effectiveness of taxation through inflation. Even if the actual value of the currency decreases to half or two-thirds of what it was before, which represents a huge decline in living standards, it simply means that the amount of currency the Government needs to issue to achieve a specific outcome must increase accordingly. It remains true that through this method, the Government can still secure a large portion of the community's available surplus.

45

45

Has the public in the last resort no remedy, no means of protecting itself against these ingenious depredations? It has only one remedy,—to change its habits in the use of money. The initial assumption on which our argument rested was that the community did not change its habits in the use of money.

Has the public ultimately no solution, no way to protect itself against these clever thefts? It has only one solution—to change its habits in how it uses money. The initial assumption our argument was based on was that the community did not change its habits in using money.

Experience shows that the public generally is very slow to grasp the situation and embrace the remedy. Indeed, at first there may be a change of habit in the wrong direction, which actually facilitates the Government’s operations. The public is so much accustomed to thinking of money as the ultimate standard, that, when prices begin to rise, believing that the rise must be temporary, they tend to hoard their money and to postpone purchases, with the result that they hold in monetary form a larger aggregate of real value than before. And, similarly, when the fall in the real value of the money is reflected in the exchanges, foreigners, thinking that the fall is abnormal and temporary, purchase the money for the purpose of hoarding it.

Experience shows that the public is usually very slow to understand the situation and accept the solution. In fact, initially there might be a change in behavior in the wrong direction, which actually helps the Government's efforts. People are so used to seeing money as the ultimate standard that when prices start to rise, they believe the increase must be short-lived, leading them to hoard their money and delay purchases. This results in them holding a larger amount of real value in monetary form than before. Similarly, when the decline in the real value of money is reflected in exchanges, foreigners, thinking the drop is unusual and temporary, buy the money to hoard it.

But sooner or later the second phase sets in. The public discover that it is the holders of notes who suffer taxation and defray the expenses of government, and they begin to change their habits and to economise in their holding of notes. They can do this in various ways:—(1) instead of keeping some part of their ultimate reserves in money they can spend this money on durable objects, jewellery or46 household goods, and keep their reserves in this form instead; (2) they can reduce the amount of till-money and pocket-money that they keep and the average length of time for which they keep it,11 even at the cost of great personal inconvenience; and (3) they can employ foreign money in many transactions where it would have been more natural and convenient to use their own.

But sooner or later, the second phase kicks in. The public realizes that it's the people holding notes who end up paying taxes and covering government expenses, and they start to change their habits and save in their note holdings. They can do this in a few ways: (1) instead of keeping part of their savings in cash, they can spend that money on durable items, jewelry, or household goods, and hold their reserves in that form instead; (2) they can cut down on the amount of cash and pocket money they keep and the average time they hold onto it, even if it means personal inconvenience; and (3) they can use foreign currency for many transactions where it would have made more sense and been easier to use their own.

11 In Moscow the unwillingness to hold money except for the shortest possible time reached at one period a fantastic intensity. If a grocer sold a pound of cheese, he ran off with the roubles as fast as his legs could carry him to the Central Market to replenish his stocks by changing them into cheese again, lest they lost their value before he got there; thus justifying the prevision of economists in naming the phenomenon “velocity of circulation”! In Vienna, during the period of collapse, mushroom exchange banks sprang up at every street corner, where you could change your krone into Zurich francs within a few minutes of receiving them, and so avoid the risk of loss during the time it would take you to reach your usual bank. It became a seasonable witticism to allege that a prudent man at a café ordering a bock of beer should order a second bock at the same time, even at the expense of drinking it tepid, lest the price should rise meanwhile.

11 In Moscow, the reluctance to hold onto money for any length of time reached a remarkable level. When a grocer sold a pound of cheese, he would rush off with the roubles as quickly as he could to the Central Market to restock by exchanging them back for cheese, fearing they might lose value before he arrived; this phenomenon perfectly illustrated what economists call the “velocity of circulation”! In Vienna, during the collapse, makeshift exchange banks popped up on every corner, where you could trade your krone for Zurich francs within minutes of receiving them, avoiding the risk of losing money during the time it took to reach your usual bank. It became a common joke that a wise man at a café ordering a bock of beer should also order a second one right away, even if it meant drinking it warm, to prevent the price from rising in the meantime.

By these means they can get along and do their business with an amount of notes having an aggregate real value substantially less than before. For example, the notes in circulation become worth altogether $20,000,000 instead of $36,000,000, with the result that the next inflationary levy by the Government, falling on a smaller amount, must be at a greater rate in order to yield a given sum.

By doing this, they can manage and conduct their business with a total amount of notes that has a significantly lower real value than before. For example, the notes in circulation are now worth $20,000,000 rather than $36,000,000, which means that the next inflationary tax by the Government, based on this smaller amount, will need to be at a higher rate to generate the same revenue.

When the public take alarm faster than they can change their habits, and, in their efforts to avoid loss, run down the amount of real resources, which they hold in the form of money, below the working47 minimum, seeking to supply their daily needs for cash by borrowing, they get penalised, as in Germany in 1923, by prodigious rates of money-interest. The rates rise, as we have seen in the previous chapter, until the rate of interest on money equals or exceeds the anticipated rate of the depreciation of money. Indeed it is always likely, when money is rapidly depreciating, that there will be recurrent periods of scarcity of currency, because the public, in their anxiety not to hold too much money, will fail to provide themselves even with the minimum which they will require in practice.

When the public becomes alarmed faster than they can change their habits and, in their attempts to avoid losses, reduce their real resources held in cash below the necessary minimum, seeking to meet their daily cash needs through borrowing, they get penalized, as was the case in Germany in 1923, with extremely high interest rates. The rates increase, as we saw in the previous chapter, until the interest rate on money equals or exceeds the expected rate of money depreciation. In fact, when money is quickly losing value, it's likely that there will be repeated periods of currency shortages because the public, anxious not to hold too much cash, will fail to keep even the minimum amount they actually need.

Whilst economists have sometimes described these phenomena in terms of an increase in the velocity of circulation due to loss of confidence in the currency; nevertheless there are not, I think, many passages in economic literature where the matter is clearly analysed. Professor Cannan’s article on “The Application of the Apparatus of Supply and Demand to Units of Currency” (Economic Journal, December 1921) is one of the most noteworthy. He points out that the common assumption that “the elasticity of demand for money is unity” is equivalent to the assertion that a mere variation in the quantity of money does not affect the willingness and habits of the public as holders of purchasing power in that form. But in extreme cases this assumption does not hold; for if it did, there would be no limit to the sums which the Government could extract from48 the public by means of inflation. It is, therefore, unsafe to assume that the elasticity of demand is necessarily unity. Professor Lehfeldt followed this up in a subsequent issue of the Economic Journal (December 1922) by a calculation of the actual elasticity of demand for money in some recent instances. He found that between July 1920 and April 1922, the elasticity of demand for money fell to an average of about ·73 in Austria, ·67 in Poland, and ·5 in Germany. Thus in the last stages of inflation the prodigious increase in the velocity of circulation may have as much, or more, effect in raising prices and depreciating the exchanges than the increase in the volume of notes. The note-issuing authorities often cry out against what they regard as the unfair and anomalous fact of the notes falling in value more than in proportion to their increased volume. Yet it is nothing of the kind; it is merely the result of the one method to evade a crushing burden left open to the public, who discover for themselves, sooner than the financiers, that the law of unit elasticity in their demand for money can be escaped.

While economists have sometimes described these phenomena as a result of a rise in the speed of money circulation due to a decline in confidence in the currency, I don't think there are many instances in economic literature where this is clearly analyzed. Professor Cannan's article on “The Application of the Apparatus of Supply and Demand to Units of Currency” (Economic Journal, December 1921) stands out as one of the most important. He points out that the common assumption that “the elasticity of demand for money is unity” means that a simple change in the amount of money doesn’t influence the public’s willingness and habits as holders of purchasing power in that form. However, in extreme cases, this assumption doesn’t apply; if it did, there would be no limit to how much the Government could take from the public through inflation. Therefore, it’s not safe to assume that the elasticity of demand is always unity. Professor Lehfeldt followed up on this in a later issue of the Economic Journal (December 1922) by calculating the actual elasticity of demand for money in some recent situations. He found that between July 1920 and April 1922, the elasticity of demand for money dropped to an average of around ·73 in Austria, ·67 in Poland, and ·5 in Germany. Thus, in the final stages of inflation, the significant increase in the speed of money circulation could have as much, if not more, impact on raising prices and weakening the exchanges than the increase in the amount of notes. The note-issuing authorities often complain about what they see as the unfair and strange fact that the notes lose value more than in proportion to their increased volume. Yet, it’s nothing like that; it's simply the outcome of the one method left open to the public to escape a heavy burden, as they realize before the financiers that they can evade the law of unit elasticity in their demand for money.

Nevertheless, it is evident that so long as the public use money at all, the Government can continue to raise resources by inflation. Moreover, the conveniences of using money in daily life are so great that the public are prepared, rather than forego them, to pay the inflationary tax, provided it is not raised to a prohibitive level. Like other conveniences of life the49 use of money is taxable, and, although for various reasons this particular form of taxation is highly inexpedient, a Government can get resources by a continuous practice of inflation, even when this is foreseen by the public generally, unless the sums they seek to raise in this way are very grossly excessive. Just as a toll can be levied on the use of roads or a turnover tax on business transactions, so also on the use of money. The higher the toll and the tax, the less traffic on the roads, and the less business transacted, so also the less money carried. But some traffic is so indispensable, some business so profitable, some money-payments so convenient, that only a very high levy will stop completely all traffic, all business, all payments. A Government has to remember, however, that even if a tax is not prohibitive it may be unprofitable, and that a medium, rather than an extreme, imposition will yield the greatest gain.

However, it's clear that as long as the public continues to use money, the government can keep generating revenue through inflation. Additionally, the benefits of using money in everyday life are so significant that people are willing to accept the inflationary tax instead of giving it up, as long as it doesn't become too burdensome. Like other conveniences in life, the use of money can be taxed, and although there are various reasons why this type of taxation isn’t ideal, a government can still gain resources through a continuous process of inflation, even when the public is generally aware of it, unless the amounts they try to raise are extremely excessive. Just as a toll can be applied for using roads or a sales tax on business transactions, the same can be done with the use of money. The higher the toll and tax, the less traffic on the roads and the fewer business transactions occur, leading to less money being circulated. However, some traffic is essential, some business is highly profitable, and some money payments are so convenient that only an extremely high charge will completely halt all traffic, business, and payments. A government must remember that even if a tax isn’t prohibitive, it may still be unprofitable, and a moderate approach rather than an extreme one will likely yield the best results.

Suppose that the rate of inflation is such that the value of the money falls by half every year, and suppose that the cash used by the public for retail purchases in shops is turned over 100 times a year (i.e. stays in one pocket for half a week on the average); then this is only equivalent to a turnover tax of ½ per cent on each transaction. The public will gladly pay such a tax rather than suffer the trouble and inconvenience of barter with trams and tradesmen. Even if the value of the money falls by half50 every month, the public, by keeping their pocket-money so low that they turn it over once a day on the average instead of only twice a week, can still keep the tax down to the equivalent of less than 2 per cent on each transaction, or more precisely 4d. in the £. Even such a terrific rate of depreciation as this is not sufficient, therefore, to counterbalance the advantages of using money rather than barter in the trifling business of daily life. This is the explanation why, even in Germany and in Russia, the Government’s notes remained current for many retail transactions.

Suppose inflation is so high that the value of money decreases by half every year, and let’s say that people use cash for retail purchases in stores 100 times a year (i.e., it stays in one person's wallet for about half a week on average); then this is only like a turnover tax of 0.5% on each transaction. People would happily pay this tax instead of dealing with the hassle of bartering with vendors and tradespeople. Even if the value of money drops by half every month, the public can keep their pocket money so low that they turn it over once a day on average instead of just twice a week, which keeps the tax down to equivalent to less than 2% on each transaction, or more specifically, 4d. in the £. Even such a drastic rate of depreciation isn't enough to outweigh the benefits of using money over barter in the small everyday dealings. This explains why, even in Germany and Russia, the government’s currency was still accepted for many retail transactions.

For certain other purposes, however, to which money is put in a modern community, the inflationary tax becomes prohibitive at a much earlier stage. As a store of value, for example, money is rapidly discarded, as soon as further depreciation is confidently anticipated. As a unit of account, for contracts and for balance sheets, it quickly becomes worse than useless, although for such purposes the privilege of the current money as legal-tender for the discharge of debts stands in the way of its being discarded as soon as it ought to be.

For certain other purposes, though, where money is used in a modern community, the inflation tax becomes a huge issue much sooner. For example, as a store of value, money is quickly rejected as soon as people expect further depreciation. As a unit of account, for contracts and balance sheets, it quickly becomes more of a liability than anything helpful, even though the fact that current money is legally required to pay debts prevents it from being discarded as quickly as it should be.

In the last phase, when the use of the legal-tender money has been discarded for all purposes except trifling out-of-pocket expenditure, inflationary taxation has at last defeated itself. For in that case the total value of the note issue, which is sufficient to meet the public’s minimum requirements, amounts to51 a figure relatively so trifling that the amount of resources which the government can hope to raise by yet further inflation—without pushing it to a point at which the money will be discarded even for out-of-pocket trifles—is correspondingly small. Thus at last, unless it is employed with some measure of moderation, this potent instrument of governmental exaction breaks in the hands of those that use it, and leaves them at the same time with the rest of their fiscal system in total ruins;—out of which, in the ebb and flow of the economic life of nations, may emerge once more a reformed and admirable system. The chervonetz of Moscow and the krone of Vienna are already stabler units than the franc or the lira.

In the final stage, when the use of legal tender has been abandoned for everything except small out-of-pocket expenses, inflationary taxation ultimately defeats itself. This is because the total value of the currency issued, which is enough to meet the public's minimum needs, becomes so small that the resources the government can hope to generate through further inflation—without driving it to a point where money is rejected even for minor expenses—are correspondingly limited. Therefore, unless it's used with some level of moderation, this powerful tool of government revenue can backfire on those who use it, leaving them with a completely ruined fiscal system; from which, in the ebb and flow of the economic cycles of nations, a reformed and improved system may emerge once again. The chervonetz from Moscow and the krone from Vienna are already more stable units than the franc or the lira.

All these matters can be illustrated from the recent experiences of Germany, Austria, and Russia. The following tables show the gold value of the note issues of these countries at various dates:

All of these issues can be demonstrated through the recent experiences of Germany, Austria, and Russia. The following tables display the gold value of the note issues from these countries on various dates:

Germany. Volume of Note Issue in Milliard Paper Marks. Number of Paper Marks = 1 Gold Mark. Value of Note Issue in Milliard Gold Marks.
December 1920          81              17 4·8    
December 1921        122              46 2·7    
March 1922        140              65 2·2    
June 1922        180              90 2·0    
September 1922        331            349 0·9    
December 1922     1,293         1,778 0·7    
February 1923     2,266       11,200 0·2    
March 1923     4,956         4,950 1·0    
June 1923   17,000       45,000 0·4    
August 1923 116,000  1,000,000 0·116

52

52

Austria. Volume of Note Issue in Milliard Paper Krone. Number of Paper Krone = 1 Gold Krone. Value of Note Issue in Million Gold Krone.
June 1920      17        27 620
December 1920      30        70 430
December 1921    174      533 326
March 1922    304   1,328 229
June 1922    550   2,911 189
September 1922 2,278 14,473 157
December 1922 4,080 14,473 282
March 1923 4,238 14,363 295
August 1923 5,557 14,369 387
Russia. Volume of Note Issue in Milliard Paper Roubles. Number of Paper RoublesB = 1 Gold Rouble. Value of Note Issue in Million Gold Roubles.
January 1919             61             103 592  
January 1920           225          1,670 134  
January 1921        1,169        26,000   45  
January 1922      17,539      172,000 102C
March 1922      48,535   1,060,000   46  
May 1922    145,635   3,800,000   38D
July 1922    320,497   4,102,000   78  
October 1922    815,486   6,964,000 117  
January 1923 2,138,711 15,790,000 135  
June 1923 8,050,000 97,690,000   82E

B “Gosplan” figures for 1923, Moscow Economic Institute figures previously.

B "Gosplan" data for 1923, previously from the Moscow Economic Institute.

C The increase is due to the reintroduction of the use of money in State transactions as a result of the New Economic Policy.

C The increase is due to the reintroduction of money in state transactions because of the New Economic Policy.

D Lowest point reached.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Lowest point hit.

E The decrease may be attributed to the introduction of the chervonetz (see p. 57 below).

E The decline might be due to the introduction of the chervonetz (see p. 57 below).

The characteristics of each phase emerge clearly. The tables show, first of all, how quickly, during the period of collapse, the rate of the depreciation of the53 value of the money outstrips the rate of the inflation of its volume. During the collapse of the German mark beginning with December 1920, the rate of depreciation proceeded for some time roughly twice as fast as that of the inflation, and eventually by June 1923, when the volume of the note-issue had increased 200-fold compared with December 1920, the value of a paper mark had fallen 2500-fold. The figures given above for Austria begin at a rather later stage of the débâcle. But if we equate Austria in June 1920 to Germany in December 1920, the progress of events between that date and September 1922 is roughly comparable to that in Germany between December 1920 and May 1923. The figures for Russia between January 1919 and the early part of 1923 also exhibit the same general features.

The characteristics of each phase become clear. The tables show, first of all, how quickly, during the period of collapse, the rate at which the value of money depreciates surpasses the rate of inflation in its volume. During the collapse of the German mark, which began in December 1920, the depreciation rate was roughly twice as fast as the inflation rate for a while. By June 1923, when the note issuance had increased 200-fold compared to December 1920, the value of a paper mark had decreased 2500-fold. The figures for Austria start at a somewhat later stage of the débâcle. However, if we compare Austria in June 1920 to Germany in December 1920, the development of events between that date and September 1922 is roughly similar to that in Germany between December 1920 and May 1923. The figures for Russia from January 1919 to early 1923 also show the same general trends.

These tables all commence after a considerable depreciation had already occurred and the gold-value of the aggregate note-issue had fallen considerably below the normal.12 Nevertheless their earliest entries still belong to the period when an eventual recovery was still widely anticipated and the general public had not at all appreciated what they were in for. They indicate that as the situation develops from this point onwards and the use of money is discarded except for retail transactions, the aggregate value of the note-issue falls by about four-fifths. As the result54 of extreme panic or depression a further fall may occur for a time; but, unless the money is discarded altogether, a minimum is reached eventually from which the least favourable circumstance will cause a sharp recovery.

These tables all start after a significant decrease had already happened, and the gold value of the total note issuance had dropped well below normal. Nevertheless, their earliest entries still reflect a time when a recovery was still widely expected, and the general public had no idea what was really coming. They show that as the situation unfolds from this point onward and cash is mostly abandoned except for everyday purchases, the total value of the note issuance falls by about four-fifths. Due to intense panic or depression, there might be an additional decline for a while; however, unless money is completely abandoned, a minimum will eventually be reached from which even a slight improvement can trigger a rapid recovery.

12 The pre-war currency of Germany was estimated at about 6 milliard gold marks (£300,000,000), or nearly £5 per head.

12 The currency of Germany before the war was estimated to be around 6 billion gold marks (£300,000,000), which is almost £5 for each person.

The temporary recovery in Germany after the collapse of February 1923 exhibited how a point may come when, if the money is to continue in use at all, a bottom is reached and a technical position is created in which some recovery is possible. When the gold value of the currency has fallen to a very low figure, it is easy for the Government, if it has any external resources at all, to give sufficient support to prevent the exchange from falling further for the time being. And since by that time the public will have carried their attempts to economise the use of money to a pitch of inconvenience which it is impracticable to continue, even a moderate weakening in the degree of their distrust of the future value of the money will lead to some increase in their use of it; with the result that the aggregate value of the note issue will tend to recover. By February 1923 these conditions existed in Germany in a high degree. The German Government was able within two months, in the face of most adverse political conditions, to double the exchange-value of the mark whilst simultaneously more than doubling the note circulation. Even so the gold value of the note issue was only brought back to what it had been six months earlier; and if55 even a moderate degree of confidence had been restored, it might have been possible to bring the value of the note circulation of Germany up to (say) 2 milliard gold marks (£100,000,000) at least, which is probably about the lowest figure at which it can stand permanently, unless every one is to put himself to intolerable inconvenience in his efforts to hold as little money as possible. Incidentally the Government is able during the period of recovery to obtain, once more, through the issue of notes the command over a considerable amount of real resources.

The temporary recovery in Germany after the collapse in February 1923 showed that there comes a point when, if the currency is to stay in use, a bottom is reached and a situation arises where some recovery is possible. When the gold value of the currency has dropped to a very low level, it's easy for the government, if it has any external resources, to provide enough support to prevent the exchange rate from falling further for a while. By that time, the public will have tried to save money to such an inconvenient extent that it’s impractical to maintain, so even a slight reduction in their distrust of the future value of the currency will lead to an increase in its use; as a result, the total value of the note issue will tend to recover. By February 1923, these conditions were highly present in Germany. The German government was able to double the exchange value of the mark within two months, despite facing very challenging political circumstances, while also more than doubling the circulation of notes. Even so, the gold value of the note issue only returned to what it had been six months earlier; and if55 even a moderate level of confidence had been restored, it might have been possible to raise the value of the note circulation in Germany to around 2 billion gold marks (£100,000,000) at least, which is probably about the lowest level it could maintain permanently, unless everyone is willing to go to great lengths to hold onto as little money as possible. Additionally, during the recovery period, the government can regain control over a significant amount of real resources through the issuance of notes.

In Austria, where, at the date of writing, the exchange has been stabilised for a year, the same phenomenon has been apparent with the growth of confidence, the gold value of the note issue having been raised to nearly two and a half times the low point reached in September 1922. The fact of stabilisation, with foreign aid, has, by increasing confidence, permitted this increase of the note issue without imperilling the stabilisation, and will probably permit in course of time a substantial further increase.

In Austria, where, at the time of writing, the exchange rate has been stable for a year, the same trend has been seen with increased confidence. The gold value of the currency has risen to nearly two and a half times the lowest point reached in September 1922. The stabilization, supported by foreign assistance, has boosted confidence, allowing for an increase in the currency supply without jeopardizing the stabilization. This trend will likely enable a significant further increase over time.

Even in Russia a sort of equilibrium seems to have been reached. There the last phase had appeared by the middle of 1922, when a tenfold inflation in six months13 had brought the aggregate value of the note issue below £4,000,000, which clearly could not56 be adequate for the transaction of the business of Russia even in its present condition. A point had been reached when the use of paper roubles was being dispensed with altogether. At about that date I had the opportunity of discussion at Genoa with some of the Soviet financiers. They have always been more self-conscious and deliberate than others in their monetary policy. They maintained at that time that, with the help of legal compulsion to employ paper roubles for certain types of transaction, these roubles could always be maintained in circulation up to a certain minimum real value, however certain the public might be as to their ultimate worthlessness. According to this calculation, it would always be possible to raise (say) £3,000,000 to £4,000,000 per annum by this method, even though the paper rouble regularly fell in value at the rate of a tenfold or a hundredfold a year (one or more noughts being struck off the monetary unit annually for convenience of calculation). During the year following they did, in fact, decidedly better than this, and, by reducing the rate of inflation to a figure not much in excess of 100 per cent per three months, were able to raise the aggregate value of the note issue to more than double the lowest point reached. The equivalent of something like £15,000,000 seems to have been raised during the year (April 1922–April 1923) by this means towards the expenses of government, at the cost of having to strike only one nought off the monetary57 unit for the whole year!14 At the same time, in order to furnish a reliable store of value and a basis for foreign trade, the Soviet Government introduced in December 1922 a new currency unit (the chervonetz, or gold ducat), freely convertible on sterling-exchange standard principles, alongside the paper rouble, which was still indispensable as an instrument of taxation. So far this new bank note has kept respectable. By August 1923 its circulation had risen to nearly 16,000,000 having a value of about £16,000,000, and its exchange value had kept steady, the State Bank undertaking to convert the chervonetz on a parity with the £ sterling.15 Thus by the middle of 1923 the aggregate value of the Russian note issues, good and bad money together, had risen to the substantial figure of £25,000,000, as compared with barely £4,000,000 at the date of the Genoa Conference in May 1922, thus indicating the return of confidence and the58 re-inauguration of a monetary régime. Russia provides an instructive example (at least for the moment) of a sound money for substantial transactions alongside small change for daily life, the progressive depreciation on which merely represents a quite supportable rate of turn-over tax.

Even in Russia, a kind of balance seems to have been achieved. By mid-1922, a massive tenfold inflation in just six months had driven the total value of the currency notes below £4,000,000, clearly inadequate for Russia's business needs even in its current state. At that point, the use of paper roubles was being completely phased out. Around that time, I had the chance to discuss matters in Genoa with some Soviet financiers. They have always been more aware and intentional about their monetary policy than others. They argued at that time that, with legal requirements to use paper roubles for specific transactions, these roubles could always be kept in circulation up to a certain minimum real value, no matter how certain the public was of their ultimate worthlessness. According to their calculations, it would always be possible to generate (for example) £3,000,000 to £4,000,000 per year through this method, even though the value of the paper rouble was regularly declining at a rate of tenfold or a hundredfold per year (with one or more zeros removed from the monetary unit each year for ease of calculation). In the year that followed, they did indeed perform significantly better than this, and by reducing the inflation rate to just over 100 percent every three months, they managed to raise the total value of the currency notes to more than double the lowest point. It appears that about £15,000,000 was raised during that year (April 1922–April 1923) for government expenses, with only one zero needed to be removed from the monetary unit for the entire year! At the same time, to provide a reliable store of value and a basis for foreign trade, the Soviet Government introduced a new currency unit in December 1922 (the chervonetz, or gold ducat), which was freely convertible based on sterling-exchange principles, alongside the paper rouble, which was still essential for taxation. So far, this new banknote has been performing well. By August 1923, its circulation had grown to nearly 16,000,000 with a value of around £16,000,000, and its exchange rate remained stable, with the State Bank agreeing to convert the chervonetz at a parity with the pound sterling. Thus, by mid-1923, the combined value of Russian currency notes, both good and bad, had reached a significant total of £25,000,000, compared to just £4,000,000 at the time of the Genoa Conference in May 1922. This indicates a return of confidence and the re-establishment of a monetary regime. Russia serves as an instructive example (at least for now) of having reliable money for substantial transactions alongside small change for daily use, with the gradual depreciation simply reflecting a manageable rate of turnover tax.

13 Recent experience everywhere seems to show that it is possible to inflate 100 per cent every three months without entirely killing the use of money in retail transactions, but that a greater rate of inflation than this can only be indulged in at the peril of total collapse.

13 Recent experience everywhere suggests that it's possible to double prices every three months without completely eliminating the use of money in retail transactions, but any higher rate of inflation than this risks total collapse.

14 The Soviet Government have always regarded monetary inflation quite frankly as an instrument of taxation, and have themselves calculated that the purchasing power secured to the State by this means has amounted in the past to the following sums:

14 The Soviet Government has always viewed monetary inflation straightforwardly as a form of taxation, and they have estimated that the purchasing power gained by the State through this method has totaled the following amounts:

1918 525 million gold roubles
1919 380
1920 186
1921 143
1922 (Jan. to March)   58 "

or (say) £130,000,000 altogether.

or £130 million altogether.

15 So far the chervonetz has generally sold at a small premium, the rates being:

15 So far, the chervonetz has usually sold for a small premium, with the rates being:

March 15, 1923 ch. 1 = £1·07
April 17, 1923 ch. 1 = £1·05
June 15, 1923 ch. 1 = £0·94
July 27, 1923 ch. 1 = £1·05

The collapse of the currency in Germany which was the chief contributory cause to the fall of Dr. Cuno’s Government in August 1923, was due, not so much to taxing by inflation—for that had been going on for years—as to an increase in the rate of inflation to a level almost prohibitive for daily transactions and quite destructive of the legal-tender money as a unit of account. We have seen that what concerns the use of money in the retail transactions of daily life is the rate of depreciation, rather than the absolute amount of depreciation as compared with some earlier date.

The collapse of the currency in Germany, which was the main reason for Dr. Cuno’s government falling in August 1923, was not just because of years of inflation-related taxes. Instead, it was mainly due to a surge in the rate of inflation that made everyday transactions almost impossible and severely damaged the legal-tender money as a reliable unit of account. We've seen that what matters in using money for daily retail transactions is the rate of depreciation, rather than the total amount of depreciation compared to some earlier time.

In the middle of 1922 I estimated, very roughly, that the German Government had then been obtaining for some time past the equivalent of something between £75,000,000 and £100,000,000 per annum by means of printing money. Up to that time, however, a substantial proportion of these receipts had been contributed through the purchase of mark-notes by speculative foreigners. Nevertheless the German public itself had probably paid upwards of £50,000,000 per annum in this form of taxation. Since the German note issue was still worth £240,000,000 so59 lately as December 1920 (see the table on p. 51) and had not fallen below £100,000,000 even in the middle of 1922, the rate of depreciation represented by the above, whilst sufficiently disastrous to the mark as a store of value or as a unit of account, had been by no means prohibitive to its continued use in daily life. In the latter half of 1922, however, the public learnt to make enough further economies in the use of the mark as money to reduce the value of the total note issue to about £60,000,000. The first effect of the Ruhr occupation was, as we have seen above (p. 54), to bring down the note issue below the minimum to which the public could adjust their habits, which resulted in the temporary recovery of March 1923. Nevertheless by the middle of 1923 the public was able to get along with a note issue worth about £20,000,000. All this time the German Government had continued to raise resources equivalent to round about £1,000,000 a week by note-printing—which meant a depreciation of 5 per cent a week even if the public had been unable to reduce any further the value of the aggregate note issue, and came in practice to about 10 per cent a week allowing for their yet further economies in the use of mark-currency.

In the middle of 1922, I roughly estimated that the German Government had been making around £75,000,000 to £100,000,000 a year by printing money. Until that point, a significant portion of this income had come from speculative foreign buyers purchasing mark-notes. However, the German public had likely paid more than £50,000,000 a year in this form of taxation. Since the German note issue was valued at £240,000,000 back in December 1920 (see the table on p. 51) and hadn’t dropped below £100,000,000 even by mid-1922, the rate of depreciation mentioned above, while severely damaging to the mark as a store of value or unit of account, hadn’t completely stopped its everyday use. In the latter half of 1922, though, the public learned to further economize using the mark as currency, which lowered the total note issue to around £60,000,000. The first effect of the Ruhr occupation, as we previously discussed (p. 54), was to push the note issue below the minimum that the public could adapt to, leading to a temporary recovery in March 1923. By mid-1923, however, the public managed to operate with a note issue valued at about £20,000,000. Throughout this time, the German Government continued to generate resources equivalent to about £1,000,000 a week by printing notes, resulting in a depreciation of 5 percent per week, even if the public hadn’t been able to further reduce the value of the total note issue, which actually came to about 10 percent a week when accounting for their further savings in mark-currency use.

But the expenses of the Ruhr resistance, coupled with the complete breakdown of other sources of taxation, had led, by May and June 1923, to the Government’s raising the equivalent of, first, £2,000,00060 and then £3,000,000 a week by note-printing. On a note issue, of which the total value had sunk by that time to about £20,000,000, this was pushing inflationary taxation to a preposterous and suicidal point. The social disorganisation, resulting from a rapid movement to do without the mark altogether, quickly resulted in Dr. Cuno’s fall.16 The climax was reached when, in Dr. Cuno’s last days, the Government doubled the note issue in a week and raised the equivalent of £3,000,000 in that period out of a note issue worth about £4,000,000 altogether,—a performance far transcending the wildest extravagances of the Soviet.

But the costs of the Ruhr resistance, along with the complete collapse of other tax sources, had led, by May and June 1923, to the Government raising the equivalent of £2,000,00060 and then £3,000,000 a week through note-printing. At that point, the total value of the note issue had fallen to around £20,000,000, pushing inflationary taxation to an outrageous and disastrous level. The social disruption, stemming from a rapid move to essentially abandon the mark altogether, quickly caused Dr. Cuno’s downfall. The peak was reached when, in Dr. Cuno’s final days, the Government doubled the note issue in a week and raised the equivalent of £3,000,000 during that time from a note issue worth about £4,000,000 in total—an action far exceeding the most extravagant acts of the Soviet.

16 It is necessary to admit that Dr. Cuno’s failure to control incompetence at the Treasury and at the Reichsbank was bound to bring this about. During this catastrophic period those responsible for the financial policy of Germany did not do a single wise thing, or show the least appreciation of what was happening. The profits of note-printing were not even monopolised by the Government, and Herr Havenstein continued to allow the German banks to share in them, by discounting their bills at the Reichsbank at a rate of discount far below the rate of depreciation. Only at the end of August 1923 did the Reichsbank begin to require that borrowers should make good on repayment a percentage of the loss due to the depreciation of the borrowed marks (as reckoned by the dollar exchange) during the currency of the loan.

16 It must be acknowledged that Dr. Cuno’s inability to manage incompetence at the Treasury and the Reichsbank inevitably led to this situation. During this disastrous time, those in charge of Germany's financial policy didn’t do anything wise or demonstrate any understanding of what was occurring. The profits from printing money weren’t even exclusively owned by the Government, and Herr Havenstein kept allowing German banks to benefit from them by discounting their bills at the Reichsbank at a discount rate much lower than the depreciation rate. Only at the end of August 1923 did the Reichsbank start requiring borrowers to compensate for a percentage of the loss resulting from the depreciation of the borrowed marks (as determined by the dollar exchange rate) during the term of the loan.

By the time this book is published, Dr. Cuno’s successors may have solved, or failed to solve, the problem facing them. However this may be, the restoration of a serviceable unit of account seems to be the first step. This is a necessary preliminary to the escape of the German financial system from the vicious circle in which it now moves. The Government cannot introduce a sound money, because, in61 the absence of other revenue, the printing of an unsound money is the only way by which it can live. Yet a serviceable unit of account is a pre-requisite of the collection of the normal sources of revenue. The best course, therefore, is to remain content for a little longer with an unsound money as a source of revenue, but to introduce immediately a steady unit of account (the relation of which to the unsound money could be officially fixed daily or weekly) as a preliminary to the restoration of the normal sources of revenue.

By the time this book is published, Dr. Cuno’s successors may have either solved or failed to solve the challenges they face. Regardless, restoring an effective unit of account seems like the first step. This is essential for breaking the German financial system free from the damaging cycle it’s currently stuck in. The government can’t implement sound money because, without other sources of income, printing unreliable money is its only means of survival. However, a functional unit of account is necessary for collecting standard revenue sources. Therefore, the best approach is to continue using unreliable money for a little while longer as a revenue source but to promptly introduce a stable unit of account (the relationship between this and the unreliable money could be set officially on a daily or weekly basis) as a precursor to restoring the usual sources of revenue.

The recent history of German finance can be summarised thus. Reliance on inflationary taxation, whilst extremely productive to the exchequer in its earliest stages especially whilst the foreign speculator was still buying paper marks, gradually broke down the mark as a serviceable unit of account, one of the effects of which was to render unproductive the greater part of the rest of the revenue-collecting machinery—most taxes being necessarily assessed at some interval of time before they are collected. The failure of the rest of the revenue rendered the Treasury more and more dependent on inflation, until finally the use of legal-tender money had been so far abandoned by the public that even the inflationary tax ceased to be productive and the Government was threatened by literal bankruptcy. At this stage, the fiscal organisation of the country had been so thoroughly destroyed and its social and62 economic organisation so grievously disordered, as in Russia eighteen months earlier, that it was a perplexing problem to devise ways and means by which the Government could live during the transitional period whilst the normal machinery for collecting revenue was being re-created, especially in face of the struggle with France proceeding at the same time. Nevertheless the problem is not insoluble; many suggestions could be made; and a way out will doubtless be found at length.

The recent history of German finance can be summarized like this: Relying on inflationary taxation, which was very beneficial for the treasury in its early days, especially while foreign investors were still buying paper marks, eventually weakened the mark as a usable unit of account. One result of this was that it made most of the revenue-collecting system ineffective—since most taxes need to be assessed some time before they are collected. The decline of other revenue sources made the Treasury increasingly dependent on inflation, until finally, the public had largely stopped using legal-tender money, and even the inflationary tax became unproductive, putting the Government at risk of actual bankruptcy. At this point, the country's fiscal structure had been so badly damaged and its social and economic organization so severely disrupted, similar to Russia eighteen months earlier, that it became a challenging issue to find ways for the Government to sustain itself during the transition while new revenue collection systems were being established, especially with the ongoing conflict with France. However, the problem is not impossible to solve; many suggestions could be put forward, and a solution will likely be found eventually.

* * * * *

It is common to speak as though, when a Government pays its way by inflation, the people of the country avoid taxation. We have seen that this is not so. What is raised by printing notes is just as much taken from the public as is a beer-duty or an income-tax. What a Government spends the public pay for. There is no such thing as an uncovered deficit. But in some countries it seems possible to please and content the public, for a time at least, by giving them, in return for the taxes they pay, finely engraved acknowledgements on water-marked paper. The income-tax receipts, which we in England receive from the Surveyor, we throw into the wastepaper basket; in Germany they call them bank-notes and put them into their pocket-books; in France they are termed Rentes and are locked up in the family safe.

It’s common to say that when a government finances itself through inflation, the citizens of the country avoid paying taxes. However, we’ve seen that this isn’t true. Money created by printing notes is just as much taken from the public as a beer tax or an income tax. The government’s spending is ultimately paid for by the public. There’s no such thing as an uncovered deficit. Yet, in some countries, it seems possible to temporarily satisfy and appease the public by providing them, in exchange for the taxes they pay, beautifully printed acknowledgments on watermarked paper. The income tax receipts that we receive in England from the Surveyor often end up in the recycling bin; in Germany, they’re called banknotes and kept in wallets; in France, they’re referred to as Rentes and stored in the family safe.

63

63

II. Currency Depreciation versus Capital Levy

We have seen in the preceding section the extent to which a Government can make use of currency inflation for the purpose of securing income to meet its outgoings. But there is a second way in which inflation helps a Government to make both ends meet, namely by reducing the burden of its pre-existing liabilities in so far as they have been fixed in terms of money. These liabilities consist, in the main, of the internal debt. Every step of depreciation obviously means a reduction in the real claims of the rentes-holders against their Government.

We saw in the previous section how a government can use currency inflation to generate income to cover its expenses. But there’s another way inflation helps a government balance its budget: by decreasing the burden of its existing debts as they are fixed in monetary terms. These debts mainly consist of internal debt. Every step of depreciation clearly means a reduction in the actual claims of the rentes holders against their government.

It would be too cynical to suppose that, in order to secure the advantages discussed in this section, Governments (except, possibly, the Russian Government) depreciate their currencies on purpose. As a rule, they are, or consider themselves to be, driven to it by their necessities. The requirements of the Treasury to meet sudden exceptional outgoings—for a war or to pay the consequences of defeat—are likely to be the original occasion of, at least temporary, inflation. But the most cogent reason for permanent depreciation, that is to say Devaluation, or the policy of fixing the value of the currency permanently at the low level to which a temporary emergency has driven it, is generally to be found in the fact that a restoration of the currency to its former value would raise the recurrent annual64 burden of the fixed charges of the National Debt to an insupportable level.

It would be too cynical to think that, in order to gain the benefits discussed in this section, governments (except maybe the Russian Government) intentionally devalue their currencies on purpose. Usually, they are, or believe they are, forced into it by their circumstances. The Treasury's need to cover sudden, extraordinary expenses—like a war or to deal with the aftermath of defeat—often triggers, at least temporary, inflation. However, the most convincing reason for permanent devaluation, which means Devaluation, or the strategy of setting the currency's value permanently at the lower level resulting from a temporary crisis, is typically found in the fact that restoring the currency to its previous value would raise the ongoing annual64 burden of the fixed costs of the National Debt to an unmanageable level.

There is, nevertheless, an alternative to Devaluation in such cases, provided the opponents of Devaluation are prepared to face it in time, which they generally are not,—namely a Capital Levy. The purpose of this section is to bring out clearly the alternative character of these two methods of moderating the claims of the rentier, when the State’s contractual liabilities, fixed in terms of money, have reached an excessive proportion of the national income.

There is, however, an alternative to devaluation in these situations, as long as those against devaluation are ready to confront it in time, which they usually are not—namely, a capital levy. The goal of this section is to clearly highlight the alternative nature of these two methods for reducing the claims of the rentier, when the state's monetary obligations have become excessively large relative to the national income.

The active and working elements in no community, ancient or modern, will consent to hand over to the rentier or bond-holding class more than a certain proportion of the fruits of their work. When the piled-up debt demands more than a tolerable proportion, relief has usually been sought in one or other of two out of the three possible methods. The first is Repudiation. But, except as the accompaniment of Revolution, this method is too crude, too deliberate, and too obvious in its incidence. The victims are immediately aware and cry out too loud; so that, in the absence of Revolution, this solution may be ruled out at present, as regards internal debt, in Western Europe.

The active and working people in any community, whether ancient or modern, will not agree to give the rentier or bond-holding class more than a certain percentage of the rewards of their labor. When the accumulated debt demands more than a reasonable share, relief has typically been sought through one of two out of three possible methods. The first is Repudiation. However, unless it’s part of a Revolution, this method is too harsh, too intentional, and too obvious in its impact. The victims are quick to notice and react loudly, so in the absence of Revolution, we can rule out this solution concerning internal debt in Western Europe for now.

The second method is Currency Depreciation, which becomes Devaluation when it is fixed and confirmed by law. In the countries of Europe lately belligerent, this expedient has been adopted65 already on a scale which reduces the real burden of the debt by from 50 to 100 per cent. In Germany the National Debt has been by these means practically obliterated, and the bond-holders have lost everything. In France the real burden of the debt is less than a third of what it would be if the franc stood at par; and in Italy only a quarter. The owners of small savings suffer quietly, as experience shows, these enormous depredations, when they would have thrown down a Government which had taken from them a fraction of the amount by more deliberate but juster instruments.

The second method is Currency Depreciation, which becomes Devaluation when it is fixed and confirmed by law. Recently, countries in Europe that were at war have adopted this tactic on a scale that reduces the real burden of debt by 50 to 100 percent. In Germany, the National Debt has been practically wiped out through these means, and bondholders have lost everything. In France, the actual burden of the debt is less than a third of what it would be if the franc were at par; in Italy, it's only a quarter. Owners of small savings suffer quietly, as experience shows, these massive losses, while they would have overthrown a government that took away a fraction of the amount through more deliberate but fairer methods.

This fact, however, can scarcely justify such an expedient on its merits. Its indirect evils are many. Instead of dividing the burden between all classes of wealth-owners according to a graduated scale, it throws the whole burden on to the owners of fixed interest bearing stocks, lets off the entrepreneur capitalist and even enriches him, and hits small savings equally with great fortunes. It follows the line of least resistance, and responsibility cannot be brought home to individuals. It is, so to speak, nature’s remedy, which comes into silent operation when the body politic has shrunk from curing itself.

This fact, however, can hardly justify such a method based on its own merits. Its indirect negative effects are numerous. Instead of spreading the burden across all classes of wealth owners in a fair way, it places the entire burden on those who own fixed interest-bearing stocks, lets the entrepreneur capitalist off the hook and even makes him richer, and impacts small savings just as much as large fortunes. It takes the path of least resistance, and it's hard to hold individuals accountable. It's, in a way, nature's remedy, which kicks in quietly when the political body has avoided healing itself.

The remaining, the scientific, expedient, the Capital Levy, has never yet been tried on a large scale; and perhaps it never will be. It is the rational, the deliberate method. But it is difficult to explain, and it provokes violent prejudice by coming66 into conflict with the deep instincts by which the love of money protects itself. Unless the patient understands and approves its purpose, he will not submit to so severe a surgical operation.

The remaining option, the scientific and practical Capital Levy, has never really been implemented on a large scale; and maybe it never will be. It's the logical, intentional approach. However, it's hard to explain, and it triggers strong bias because it clashes with the fundamental instincts that drive people to protect their wealth. Unless the person understands and supports its purpose, they won’t agree to such an extreme measure.

Once Currency Depreciation has done its work, I should not advocate the unwise, and probably impracticable, policy of retracing the path with the aid of a Capital Levy. But if it has become clear that the claims of the bond-holder are more than the taxpayer can support, and if there is still time to choose between the policies of a Levy and of further Depreciation, the Levy must surely be preferred on grounds both of expediency and of justice. It is an overwhelming objection to the method of Currency Depreciation, as compared with that of the Levy, that it falls entirely upon persons whose wealth is in the form of claims to legal-tender money, and that these are generally, amongst the capitalists, the poorer capitalists. It is entirely ungraduated; it falls on small savings just as hardly as on big ones; and incidentally it benefits the capitalist entrepreneur class for the reasons explained in Chapter I. Unfortunately the small savers who have most to lose by Currency Depreciation are precisely the sort of conservative people who are most alarmed by a Capital Levy; whilst, on the other hand, the entrepreneur class must obviously prefer Depreciation which does not hit them very much and may actually enrich them. It is the combination of these two forces which will67 generally bring it about that a country will prefer the inequitable and disastrous courses of Currency Depreciation to the scientific deliberation of a Levy.

Once currency depreciation has taken effect, I wouldn’t recommend the unwise and likely impractical approach of reversing it with a capital levy. However, if it’s clear that the bondholders’ claims exceed what taxpayers can handle and there’s still time to choose between a levy and further depreciation, the levy should definitely be the preferred option for both practical and fairness reasons. A major flaw of currency depreciation compared to a levy is that it impacts people whose wealth is tied up in claims to legal-tender money, and typically, these are the less wealthy capitalists. It’s a blunt tool; it affects small savings just as harshly as it does large ones, and it inadvertently benefits the capitalist entrepreneur class, for the reasons outlined in Chapter I. Unfortunately, the small savers who stand to lose the most from currency depreciation are often the very conservative individuals who are most fearful of a capital levy. Meanwhile, the entrepreneur class will clearly prefer depreciation, which doesn’t hit them hard and may even increase their wealth. It’s this combination of factors that generally leads a country to choose the unfair and harmful path of currency depreciation over the careful consideration involved in a levy.

There is a respectable and influential body of opinion which, repudiating with vehemence the adoption of either expedient, fulminates alike against Devaluations and Levies, on the ground that they infringe the untouchable sacredness of contract; or rather of vested interest, for an alteration of the legal tender and the imposition of a tax on property are neither of them in the least illegal or even contrary to precedent. Yet such persons, by overlooking one of the greatest of all social principles, namely the fundamental distinction between the right of the individual to repudiate contract and the right of the State to control vested interest, are the worst enemies of what they seek to preserve. For nothing can preserve the integrity of contract between individuals, except a discretionary authority in the State to revise what has become intolerable. The powers of uninterrupted usury are too great. If the accretions of vested interest were to grow without mitigation for many generations, half the population would be no better than slaves to the other half. Nor can the fact that in time of war it is easier for the State to borrow than to tax, be allowed permanently to enslave the taxpayer to the bond-holder. Those who insist that in these matters the State is in exactly the same position as the individual, will, if they have their way, render68 impossible the continuance of an individualist society, which depends for its existence on moderation.

There is a respected and influential group of people who strongly oppose the use of either option, criticizing both Devaluations and Levies for violating the sacredness of contracts—essentially, the interests that have been established. They argue that changing the legal currency and imposing a property tax are neither illegal nor against precedent. However, by ignoring one of the most important social principles—the crucial distinction between an individual’s right to reject a contract and the State’s right to regulate established interests—these individuals become the biggest threats to what they claim to defend. The only way to maintain the integrity of contracts between individuals is for the State to have the authority to revise situations that have become intolerable. The unchecked power of usury is too significant. If established interests continue to grow without restriction for many generations, half the population could end up enslaved to the other half. Additionally, the fact that it’s easier for the State to borrow than to tax during wartime cannot be allowed to permanently trap taxpayers under the burden of bondholders. Those who argue that the State is in exactly the same position as individuals in these matters will, if given the chance, make it impossible for an individualistic society—dependent on moderation—to continue to exist.68

These conclusions might be deemed obvious if experience did not show that many conservative bankers regard it as more consonant with their cloth, and also as economising thought, to shift public discussion of financial topics off the logical on to an alleged “moral” plane, which means a realm of thought where vested interest can be triumphant over the common good without further debate. But it makes them untrustworthy guides in a perilous age of transition. The State must never neglect the importance of so acting in ordinary matters as to promote certainty and security in business. But when great decisions are to be made, the State is a sovereign body of which the purpose is to promote the greatest good of the whole. When, therefore, we enter the realm of State action, everything is to be considered and weighed on its merits. Changes in Death Duties, Income Tax, Land Tenure, Licensing, Game Laws, Church Establishment, Feudal Rights, Slavery, and so on through all ages, have received the same denunciations from the absolutists of contract,—who are the real parents of Revolution.

These conclusions might seem obvious if experience didn't show that many conservative bankers think it's more in line with their interests, and also a simpler way of thinking, to shift public discussion of financial issues from a logical perspective to a supposed “moral” one, which allows vested interests to prevail over the common good without further debate. But this makes them unreliable guides in a risky time of change. The State must always recognize the importance of acting in everyday affairs to foster certainty and security in business. However, when major decisions need to be made, the State is a sovereign entity whose goal is to promote the greatest good for everyone. Therefore, when we enter the sphere of State action, everything should be considered and evaluated on its own merits. Changes in Death Duties, Income Tax, Land Tenure, Licensing, Game Laws, Church Establishment, Feudal Rights, Slavery, and so on, throughout history, have faced the same criticisms from the absolutists of contract—who are the true instigators of Revolution.

In our own country the question of the Capital Levy depends for its answer on whether the great increase in the claims of the bond-holder, arising out of the fact that it was easier, and perhaps more expedient, to raise a large part of the current costs of69 the war by loans rather than by taxes, is more than the taxpayer can be required, in the long run, to support. The high levels of the Death Duties and of the income- and super-taxes on unearned income, by which the net return to the bond-holder is substantially diminished,17 modify the case. Nevertheless, immediately after the war, when it seemed that the normal budget could scarcely be balanced without a level of taxation of which a tax on earned income at a standard rate between 6s. and 10s. in the £ would be typical, a levy seemed to be necessary. At the present time the case is rather more doubtful. It is not yet possible to know how the normal budget will work out, and much depends on the level at which sterling prices are stabilised. If the level of sterling prices is materially lowered, whether in pursuance of a policy of restoring the old gold parity or for any other reason, a levy may be required. If, however, sterling prices are stabilised somewhere between 80 and 100 per cent above the pre-war level—a settlement probably desirable on other grounds—and if the progressive prosperity of the country is restored, then perhaps we may balance our future budgets without oppressive taxation on earned income and without a levy either. A levy is from the practical view perfectly feasible, and is not open to more objection than any other new tax of like magnitude.70 Nevertheless, like all new taxes, it cannot be brought in without friction, and is, therefore, scarcely worth advocating for its own sake merely in substitution for an existing tax of similar incidence. It is to be regarded as the fairest and most expedient method of adjusting the burden of taxation between past accumulations and the fruits of present efforts, whenever, in the general judgment of the country, the discouragement to the latter is excessive. A levy is to be judged, not by itself, but as against the practicable alternatives. Experience shows with great certainty that the active part of the community will not submit in the long run to pay too much to vested interest, and, if the necessary adjustment is not made in one way, it will be made in another,—probably by the depreciation of the currency.

In our country, the Capital Levy question hinges on whether the significant rise in bondholder claims, which happened because it was easier—and maybe more convenient—to cover many of the current war costs through loans instead of taxes, is more than what taxpayers can sustainably handle in the long run. The high levels of Death Duties and taxes on unearned income, which significantly reduce the bondholder's net returns, change the situation. However, right after the war, when it looked like balancing the normal budget would be incredibly difficult without setting a tax on earned income somewhere between 30% and 50%, a levy seemed necessary. Right now, though, the situation is less clear. We still can’t fully predict how the normal budget will turn out, and a lot depends on where sterling prices will be stabilized. If sterling prices drop significantly—whether to return to the old gold standard or for some other reason—then a levy might be needed. However, if sterling prices stabilize between 80% and 100% above pre-war levels—which might be a desirable outcome for other reasons—and if the country's ongoing prosperity is restored, we might be able to maintain balanced future budgets without heavy taxes on earned income or a levy at all. A levy is practically feasible and has no more objections than any other new tax of a similar size. Still, like all new taxes, it can't be implemented without some pushback, so it's hardly worth pushing for just as a replacement for an existing tax with a similar impact. It should be seen as the fairest and most effective way to balance the tax burden between past savings and the results of current efforts when, in the general view of the country, the discouragement to the latter is too great. A levy should not be evaluated on its own but compared to feasible alternatives. Experience shows that, ultimately, the active part of society won't tolerate paying too much to established interests, and if the necessary adjustments aren't made in one way, they’ll likely occur in another—probably through currency depreciation.

17 The net return to the French rentier is more than 6 per cent; to the British not much above 3 per cent.

17 The net return for the French investor is over 6 percent; for the British, it's just above 3 percent.

In several countries the existing burden of the internal debt renders Devaluation inevitable and certain sooner or later. It will be sufficient to illustrate the case by reference to the situation of France,—the home of absolutism of all kinds, and hence, sooner or later, of bouleversement. The finances of Humpty Dumpty are as follows:

In several countries, the current burden of internal debt makes devaluation unavoidable and certain, sooner or later. To illustrate this, let's look at France—the land of all kinds of absolutism, and thus, sooner or later, faces a bouleversement. The finances of Humpty Dumpty are as follows:

At the end of 1922 the internal debt of France, excluding altogether her external debt, exceeded 250 milliard francs. Further borrowing budgeted for in the ensuing period, together with loans on reconstruction account guaranteed by the Government, may bring this total to the neighbourhood71 of 300 milliards by the end of 1923. The service of this debt will absorb nearly 18 milliards per annum. The total normal receipts under the provisional18 Budget for 1923 are estimated at round 23 milliards. That is to say, the service of the debt will shortly absorb, at the value of the franc current early in 1923, almost the entire yield of taxation. Since other Government expenditure in the ordinary budget (i.e., excluding war pensions and future expenditure on reconstruction) cannot be put below 12 milliards a year, it follows that, even on the improbable hypothesis that further expenditure in the extraordinary budget after 1923 will be paid for by Germany, the yield of taxation must be increased permanently by 30 per cent to make both ends meet. If, however, the franc were to depreciate to (say) 100 to the pound sterling, the ordinary budget could be balanced by taking little more of the real income of the country than in 1922.

By the end of 1922, France's internal debt, not counting her external debt, exceeded 250 billion francs. Additional borrowing planned for the upcoming period, along with loans for reconstruction backed by the Government, could push this total to around 300 billion by the end of 1923. The cost of servicing this debt will consume nearly 18 billion per year. The estimated total normal revenue from the provisional Budget for 1923 is about 23 billion. In other words, the debt service will soon take up almost all of the tax revenue based on the value of the franc at the start of 1923. Since other normal Government spending in the ordinary budget (excluding war pensions and future reconstruction costs) cannot be less than 12 billion a year, it follows that, even if it’s unlikely that additional spending in the extraordinary budget after 1923 will be covered by Germany, tax revenue would need to be permanently increased by 30 percent to balance the budget. However, if the franc were to devalue to, say, 100 to the pound sterling, the ordinary budget could be balanced by taking just slightly more from the real income of the country than in 1922.

18 The forecasts of the final outcome of the year are frequently changed and may be somewhat different from the above,—though not sufficiently to affect the argument. M. de Lasteyrie has lately pointed out with pride how the further depreciation of the franc, since he first introduced his budget, is already improving the receipts measured in terms of francs.

18 The predictions of the year-end results are often revised and might differ slightly from the ones mentioned above—but not enough to impact the overall argument. M. de Lasteyrie recently noted with pride that the continued decline in the value of the franc, since he first presented his budget, is already boosting the revenue when measured in francs.

In these circumstances it will be difficult, if not impossible, to avoid the subtle assistance of a further depreciation. What, then, is to be said of those who still discuss seriously the project of restoring the franc to its former parity? In such an event the already intolerable burden of the rentier’s claims72 would be about trebled. It is unthinkable that the French taxpayer would submit. Even if the franc were put back to par by a miracle, it could not stay there. Fresh inflation due to the inadequacy of tax receipts must drive it anew on its downward course. Yet I have assumed the cancellation of the whole of France’s external debt, and the assumption by Germany of the burdens of the extraordinary budget after 1923, an assumption which is not justified by present expectations. These facts alone render it certain that the franc cannot be restored to its former value.

In this situation, it will be tough, if not impossible, to avoid some further depreciation. So, what can we say about those who still seriously talk about bringing the franc back to its previous value? If that were to happen, the already unbearable burden of the rentier’s claims72 would nearly triple. It's hard to believe that the French taxpayer would accept that. Even if the franc were miraculously restored, it wouldn't stay there. New inflation from inadequate tax revenues would send it right back down. Yet, I have assumed that all of France’s external debt would be canceled, and that Germany would take on the extra budget burdens after 1923, an assumption that doesn't reflect current expectations. These factors alone make it clear that the franc cannot be returned to its former value.

France must come in due course to some compromise between increasing taxation, and diminishing expenditure, and reducing what they owe their rentiers. I have not much doubt that the French public, as they have hitherto, will consider a further dose of depreciation—attributing it to the “bad will” of Germany or to financial Machiavellism in London and New York—as far more conservative, orthodox, and in the interest of small savers, than a justly constructed Capital Levy, the odium of which could be less easily escaped by the French Ministry of Finance.

France will eventually need to find a compromise between raising taxes, cutting spending, and reducing what they owe their rentiers. I have little doubt that the French public, as they have in the past, will view another round of depreciation—blaming it on Germany's "bad will" or financial cunning in London and New York—as much more conservative, traditional, and beneficial for small savers than a well-structured Capital Levy, which the French Ministry of Finance could find harder to justify.

If we look ahead, averting our eyes from the ups and downs which can make and unmake fortunes in the meantime, the level of the franc is going to be settled in the long run not by speculation or the balance of trade, or even the outcome of the Ruhr73 adventure, but by the proportion of his earned income which the French taxpayer will permit to be taken from him to pay the claims of the French rentier. The level of the franc exchange will continue to fall until the commodity-value of the francs due to the rentier has fallen to a proportion of the national income, which accords with the habits and mentality of the country.

If we look ahead, ignoring the ups and downs that can make or break fortunes in the meantime, the value of the franc will ultimately be determined not by speculation or the trade balance, or even the results of the Ruhr adventure, but by the share of his earned income that the French taxpayer will allow to be taken from him to settle the claims of the French rentier. The value of the franc will keep declining until the commodity value of the francs owed to the rentier is in line with a portion of the national income that reflects the country's habits and mindset.


The evil consequences of instability in the standard of value have now been sufficiently described. In this chapter19 we must lay the theoretical foundations for the practical suggestions of the concluding chapters. Most academic treatises on monetary theory have been based, until lately, on so firm a presumption of a gold standard régime that they need to be adapted to the existing régime of mutually inconvertible paper standards.

The negative effects of instability in the standard of value have now been adequately explained. In this chapter19 we need to establish the theoretical groundwork for the practical recommendations in the final chapters. Most scholarly works on monetary theory have, until recently, relied on a strong assumption of a gold standard system, so they require adjustments for the current system of non-convertible paper currencies.

19 Parts of this chapter raise, unavoidably, matters of much greater difficulty to the layman than the rest of the book. The reader whose interest in the theoretical foundations is secondary can pass on.

19 Some parts of this chapter inevitably present issues that are much more challenging for the average reader than the rest of the book. If you’re mainly interested in the practical aspects, you can skip ahead.

I. The Quantity Theory of Money

This Theory is fundamental. Its correspondence with fact is not open to question.20 Nevertheless it is often misstated and misrepresented. Goschen’s75 saying of sixty years ago, that “there are many persons who cannot hear the relation of the level of prices to the volume of currency affirmed without a feeling akin to irritation,” still holds good.

This theory is essential. Its connection to reality is beyond dispute.20 However, it is frequently misquoted and misrepresented. Goschen’s75 statement from sixty years ago, that “there are many people who can't hear about the relationship between price levels and the amount of currency without feeling somewhat annoyed,” is still true today.

20 “The Quantity Theory is often defended and opposed as though it were a definite set of propositions that must be either true or false. But in fact the formulæ employed in the exposition of that theory are merely devices for enabling us to bring together in an orderly way the principal causes by which the value of money is determined” (Pigou).

20 “The Quantity Theory is frequently defended and challenged as if it were a specific set of statements that must be either true or false. However, the formulas used to explain that theory are simply tools that help us systematically organize the main factors that determine the value of money” (Pigou).

The Theory flows from the fact that money as such has no utility except what is derived from its exchange-value, that is to say from the utility of the things which it can buy. Valuable articles other than money have a utility in themselves. Provided that they are divisible and transferable, the total amount of this utility increases with their quantity;—it will not increase in full proportion to the quantity, but, up to the point of satiety, it does increase.

The theory is based on the idea that money itself has no usefulness beyond its exchange value, meaning its value comes from what it can purchase. Valuable items other than money have inherent usefulness on their own. As long as they can be divided and transferred, the overall usefulness of these items increases as there are more of them; while it won’t increase exactly in proportion to the quantity, it does grow until a point of saturation is reached.

If an article is used for money, such as gold, which has a utility in itself for other purposes, aside from its use as money, the strict statement of the theory, though fundamentally unchanged, is a little complicated. In present circumstances we can excuse ourselves this complication. A Currency Note has no utility in itself and is completely worthless except for the purchasing power which it has as money.

If an item is used as money, like gold, which also has its own uses beyond being money, the clear explanation of the theory, while essentially the same, becomes a bit more complex. Given the current situation, we can overlook this complexity. A currency note has no value on its own and is entirely worthless apart from the buying power it represents as money.

Consequently what the public want is not so many ounces or so many square yards or even so many £ sterling of currency notes, but a quantity sufficient to cover a week’s wages, or to pay their bills, or to meet their probable outgoings on a journey or a day’s shopping. When people find themselves with more cash than they require for such purposes, they get rid of the surplus by buying goods or investments, or76 by leaving it for a bank to employ, or, possibly, by increasing their hoarded reserves. Thus the number of notes which the public ordinarily have on hand is determined by the amount of purchasing power which it suits them to hold or to carry about, and by nothing else. The amount of this purchasing power depends partly on their wealth, partly on their habits. The wealth of the public in the aggregate will only change gradually. Their habits in the use of money—whether their income is paid them weekly or monthly or quarterly, whether they pay cash at shops or run accounts, whether they deposit with banks, whether they cash small cheques at short intervals or larger cheques at longer intervals, whether they keep a reserve or hoard of money about the house—are more easily altered. But if their wealth and their habits in the above respects are unchanged, then the amount of purchasing power which they hold in the form of money is definitely fixed. We can measure this definite amount of purchasing power in terms of a unit made up of a collection of specified quantities of their standard articles of consumption or other objects of expenditure; for example, the kinds and quantities of articles which are combined for the purpose of a cost-of-living index number. Let us call such a unit a “consumption unit” and assume that the public require to hold an amount of money having a purchasing power over k consumption units. Let there be n currency notes or77 other forms of cash in circulation with the public, and let p be the price of each consumption unit (i.e. p is the index number of the cost of living), then it follows from the above that n = pk. This is the famous Quantity Theory of Money. So long as k remains unchanged, n and p rise and fall together; that is to say, the greater or the fewer the number of currency notes, the higher or the lower is the price level in the same proportion.

As a result, what the public wants isn’t just a specific number of ounces, square yards, or even a certain amount of currency notes, but enough to cover a week’s wages, pay their bills, or manage their probable expenses on a trip or a day of shopping. When people find themselves with more cash than they need for these purposes, they typically spend the extra by buying goods or investments, leaving it for a bank to use, or possibly by increasing their savings. Thus, the amount of cash that the public usually holds is determined by how much purchasing power they want to keep on hand and nothing else. This purchasing power depends partly on their wealth and partly on their spending habits. The overall wealth of the public changes only gradually, while their money habits—like whether they get paid weekly, monthly, or quarterly, whether they pay cash or have accounts at shops, whether they bank their money, whether they cash small checks often or larger ones less frequently, or whether they keep extra cash at home—can change more easily. However, if their wealth and habits remain constant, then the amount of purchasing power they hold as cash is fixed. We can measure this fixed amount in terms of a unit made up of a collection of specific quantities of their common items of consumption or other spending categories; for example, the types and amounts of items used to make a cost-of-living index. Let’s call this unit a “consumption unit” and assume that the public needs to hold a certain amount of money equating to the purchasing power over k consumption units. Let’s denote n as the currency notes or other forms of cash in circulation, and let p be the price of each consumption unit (i.e., p is the cost of living index). From this, we can derive that n = pk. This is the well-known Quantity Theory of Money. As long as k stays the same, n and p will rise and fall together; meaning, as the number of currency notes increases or decreases, so does the price level in the same proportion.

So far we have assumed that the whole of the public requirement for purchasing power is satisfied by cash, and on the other hand that this requirement is the only source of demand for cash; neglecting the fact that the public, including the business world, employ for the same purpose bank deposits and overdraft facilities, whilst the banks must for the same reason maintain a reserve of cash. The theory is easily extended, however, to cover this case. Let us assume that the public, including the business world, find it convenient to keep the equivalent of k consumption units in cash and of a further available at their banks against cheques, and that the banks keep in cash a proportion r of their potential liabilities () to the public. Our equation then becomes

So far, we've assumed that the entire public need for purchasing power is met by cash, and on the other hand, that this need is the only source of demand for cash; ignoring the fact that the public, including the business sector, also uses bank deposits and overdraft options for the same purpose, while banks must maintain a cash reserve for this reason. However, the theory can be easily adapted to include this scenario. Let’s assume that the public, including businesses, finds it convenient to keep the equivalent of k consumption units in cash and an additional available at their banks for checks, and that the banks hold in cash a proportion r of their potential liabilities () to the public. Our equation then becomes

n = p(k + rk´).

n = p(k + rk').

So long as k, , and r remain unchanged, we have the same result as before, namely, that n and p rise and fall together. The proportion between k and 78 depends on the banking arrangements of the public; the absolute value of these on their habits generally; and the value of r on the reserve practices of the banks. Thus, so long as these are unaltered, we still have a direct relation between the quantity of cash (n) and the level of prices (p).21

As long as k, , and r stay the same, we get the same outcome as before, which is that n and p increase and decrease together. The relationship between k and 78 depends on the public's banking arrangements; the absolute value of these depends on their overall habits; and the value of r depends on the banks' reserve practices. Therefore, as long as these factors remain unchanged, there’s still a direct relationship between the amount of cash (n) and the price level (p).21

21 My exposition follows the general lines of Prof. Pigou (Quarterly Journal of Economics, Nov. 1917) and of Dr. Marshall (Money, Credit, and Commerce, I. iv.), rather than the perhaps more familiar analysis of Prof. Irving Fisher. Instead of starting with the amount of cash held by the public, Prof. Fisher begins with the volume of business transacted by means of money and the frequency with which each unit of money changes hands. It comes to the same thing in the end and it is easy to pass from the above formula to Prof. Fisher’s; but the above method of approach seems less artificial than Prof. Fisher’s and nearer to the observed facts.

21 My discussion aligns more with the ideas of Prof. Pigou (Quarterly Journal of Economics, Nov. 1917) and Dr. Marshall (Money, Credit, and Commerce, I. iv.), rather than the possibly more well-known analysis by Prof. Irving Fisher. Instead of starting with the total cash held by the public, Prof. Fisher begins with the volume of transactions conducted using money and how often each unit of money changes hands. Ultimately, they arrive at the same conclusion, and it’s easy to move from the approach I outlined to Prof. Fisher’s; however, I find my method more straightforward and closer to the realities we observe.

We have seen that the amount of k and depends partly on the wealth of the community, partly on its habits. Its habits are fixed by its estimation of the extra convenience of having more cash in hand as compared with the advantages to be got from spending the cash or investing it. The point of equilibrium is reached where the estimated advantages of keeping more cash in hand compared with those of spending or investing it about balance. The matter cannot be summed up better than in the words of Dr. Marshall:

We have seen that the amount of k and depends partly on the community's wealth and partly on its habits. These habits are shaped by how much extra convenience they think having more cash on hand provides compared to the benefits of spending or investing that cash. The equilibrium point is reached when the perceived benefits of holding more cash balance out with the advantages of spending or investing it. This can be summed up perfectly in the words of Dr. Marshall:

“In every state of society there is some fraction of their income which people find it worth while to keep in the form of currency; it may be a fifth, or a tenth, or a twentieth. A large command of resources in the form of currency renders their business easy and smooth, and puts them at an advantage in bargaining; but on the other hand it locks up in a barren form resources that might yield an income of gratification if invested, say, in extra furniture; or a money income, if invested in extra machinery or cattle.” A man79 fixes the appropriate fraction “after balancing one against another the advantages of a further ready command, and the disadvantages of putting more of his resources into a form in which they yield him no direct income or other benefit.” “Let us suppose that the inhabitants of a country, taken one with another (and including therefore all varieties of character and of occupation), find it just worth their while to keep by them on the average ready purchasing power to the extent of a tenth part of their annual income, together with a fiftieth part of their property; then the aggregate value of the currency of the country will tend to be equal to the sum of these amounts.”22

“In every society, there’s a portion of people’s income that they choose to keep as cash; it might be a fifth, a tenth, or a twentieth. Having a lot of cash makes business easier and gives them an edge in negotiations. However, it also ties up money in a non-productive form that could bring satisfaction if spent on extra furniture or generate income if invested in machinery or livestock.” A person fixes the right amount “by weighing the benefits of having cash on hand against the drawbacks of putting more of their resources into a form that doesn’t provide them with direct income or other benefits.” “Let’s say that the people of a country, on average (and including all kinds of characters and occupations), find it worthwhile to keep about a tenth of their annual income available for spending, along with a fiftieth of their total assets; then the total value of the country’s currency will likely equal the sum of these amounts.”

22 Money, Credit, and Commerce, I. iv. 3. Dr. Marshall shows in a footnote as follows that the above is in fact a development of the traditional way of considering the matter: “Petty thought that the money ‘sufficient for’ the nation is ‘so much as will pay half a year’s rent for all the lands of England and a quarter’s rent of the Houseing, for a week’s expense of all the people, and about a quarter of the value of all the exported commodities.’ Locke estimated that ‘one-fiftieth of wages and one-fourth of the landowner’s income and one-twentieth part of the broker’s yearly returns in ready money will be enough to drive the trade of any country.’ Cantillon (A.D. 1755), after a long and subtle study, concludes that the value needed is a ninth of the total produce of the country; or, what he takes to be the same thing, a third of the rent of the land. Adam Smith has more of the scepticism of the modern age and says: ‘it is impossible to determine the proportion,’ though ‘it has been computed by different authors at a fifth, at a tenth, at a twentieth, and at a thirtieth part of the whole value of the annual produce.’” In modern conditions the normal proportion of the circulation to this national income seems to be somewhere between a tenth and a fifteenth.

22 Money, Credit, and Commerce, I. iv. 3. Dr. Marshall notes in a footnote that the above is actually an evolution of the traditional way of thinking about the issue: “Petty believed that the money ‘sufficient for’ the nation is ‘enough to cover half a year’s rent for all the lands of England, a quarter’s rent for housing, a week’s expenses for all the people, and about a quarter of the value of all the exported goods.’ Locke suggested that ‘one-fiftieth of wages, one-fourth of the landowner’s income, and one-twentieth of the broker’s yearly returns in cash are enough to sustain the trade of any country.’ Cantillon (A.D. 1755), after a detailed analysis, concluded that the required value is a ninth of the country's total produce, or what he considers the same thing, a third of the rent of the land. Adam Smith reflects more of the skepticism typical of modern times, stating: ‘it is impossible to determine the proportion,’ even though ‘different authors have estimated it at a fifth, a tenth, a twentieth, and a thirtieth of the total value of the annual produce.’” In today’s context, the typical ratio of circulation to national income seems to fall between a tenth and a fifteenth.

So far there should be no room for difference of opinion. The error often made by careless adherents of the Quantity Theory, which may partly explain why it is not universally accepted, is as follows.

So far, there shouldn't be any disagreement. A common mistake made by careless followers of the Quantity Theory, which might partly explain why it's not universally accepted, is as follows.

Every one admits that the habits of the public in the use of money and of banking facilities and the practices of the banks in respect of their reserves change from time to time as the result of obvious developments. These habits and practices are a80 reflection of changes in economic and social organisation. But the Theory has often been expounded on the further assumption that a mere change in the quantity of the currency cannot affect k, r, and ,—that is to say, in mathematical parlance, that n is an independent variable in relation to these quantities. It would follow from this that an arbitrary doubling of n, since this in itself is assumed not to affect k, r, and , must have the effect of raising p to double what it would have been otherwise. The Quantity Theory is often stated in this, or a similar, form.

Everyone acknowledges that people's habits regarding money and banking services, as well as banks' practices concerning their reserves, change over time due to clear developments. These habits and practices are a80 reflection of shifts in economic and social structure. However, the Theory is frequently presented with the additional assumption that a mere change in the amount of currency cannot influence k, r, and —in mathematical terms, that n is an independent variable in relation to these quantities. This implies that an arbitrary doubling of n, since it is assumed not to affect k, r, and , must result in raising p to twice what it would have been otherwise. The Quantity Theory is often articulated in this or a similar way.

Now “in the long run” this is probably true. If, after the American Civil War, the American dollar had been stabilised and defined by law at 10 per cent below its present value, it would be safe to assume that n and p would now be just 10 per cent greater than they actually are and that the present values of k, r, and would be entirely unaffected. But this long run is a misleading guide to current affairs. In the long run we are all dead. Economists set themselves too easy, too useless a task if in tempestuous seasons they can only tell us that when the storm is long past the ocean is flat again.

Now “in the long run,” this is probably true. If, after the American Civil War, the American dollar had been stabilized and defined by law at 10 percent below its current value, it would be safe to assume that n and p would now be just 10 percent higher than they actually are and that the current values of k, r, and would be completely unaffected. But this long run is a misleading guide to current affairs. In the long run we are all dead. Economists take on too easy, too pointless a task if in turbulent times they can only tell us that when the storm has passed, the ocean is flat again.

In actual experience, a change of n is liable to have a reaction both on k and and on r. It will be enough to give a few typical instances. Before the war (and indeed since) there was a considerable element of what was conventional and arbitrary in the reserve policy of the banks, but especially in the81 policy of the State Banks towards their gold reserves. These reserves were kept for show rather than for use, and their amount was not the result of close reasoning. There was a decided tendency on the part of these banks between 1900 and 1914 to bottle up gold when it flowed towards them and to part with it reluctantly when the tide was flowing the other way. Consequently, when gold became relatively abundant they tended to hoard what came their way and to raise the proportion of the reserves, with the result that the increased output of South African gold was absorbed with less effect on the price level than would have been the case if an increase of n had been totally without reaction on the value of r.

In real life, a change in n is likely to affect both k and as well as r. It’s enough to give a few typical examples. Before the war (and even since then), there was a significant element of convention and randomness in the banks' reserve policies, particularly in the81 State Banks' approach to their gold reserves. These reserves were held more for appearance than for practical use, and their amount wasn't based on careful analysis. Between 1900 and 1914, these banks had a clear tendency to stash away gold when it flowed into them and to let it go only reluctantly when it flowed out. As a result, when gold became relatively plentiful, they tended to hoard the incoming gold and increase their reserve ratios, meaning that the rise in South African gold output had less effect on the price level than it would have if an increase in n hadn't influenced the value of r at all.

In agricultural countries where peasants readily hoard money, an inflation, especially in its early stages, does not raise prices proportionately, because when, as a result of a certain rise in the price of agricultural products, more money flows into the pockets of the peasants, it tends to stick there;—deeming themselves that much richer, the peasants increase the proportion of their receipts that they hoard.

In farming countries where farmers tend to save money, inflation, especially at the beginning, doesn’t increase prices evenly. This is because when the price of agricultural products goes up, and more money ends up in the farmers' hands, they tend to hold onto it. Feeling wealthier, the farmers save a larger portion of what they earn.

Thus in these and in other ways the terms of our equation tend in their movements to favour the stability of p, and there is a certain friction which prevents a moderate change in n from exercising its full proportionate effect on p.

Thus, in these and other ways, the terms of our equation tend to support the stability of p, and there is a certain friction that prevents a moderate change in n from having its full proportional effect on p.

On the other hand a large change in n, which rubs away the initial friction, and especially a change82 in n due to causes which set up a general expectation of a further change in the same direction, may produce a more than proportionate effect on p. After the general analysis of Chapter I. and the narratives of catastrophic inflations given in Chapter II., it is scarcely necessary to illustrate this further,—it is a matter more readily understood than it was ten years ago. A large change in p greatly affects individual fortunes. Hence a change after it has occurred, or sooner in so far as it is anticipated, may greatly affect the monetary habits of the public in their attempt to protect themselves from a similar loss in future, or to make gains and avoid loss during the passage from the equilibrium corresponding to the old value of n to the equilibrium corresponding to its new value. Thus after, during, and (so far as the change is anticipated) before a change in the value of n, there will be some reaction on the values of k, , and r, with the result that the change in the value of p, at least temporarily and perhaps permanently (since habits and practices, once changed, will not revert to exactly their old shape), will not be precisely in proportion to the change in n.

On the other hand, a significant change in n that reduces initial friction, particularly a change in n that creates a widespread expectation of further changes in the same direction, can lead to a greater than proportional effect on p. After the general analysis in Chapter I and the accounts of drastic inflations presented in Chapter II, it’s hardly necessary to explain this further — it’s now easier to understand than it was ten years ago. A large change in p greatly impacts individual fortunes. Therefore, a change after it has happened, or even sooner if anticipated, can greatly influence the public's monetary habits as they try to protect themselves from similar losses in the future or to make gains and avoid losses during the transition from the equilibrium associated with the old value of n to the equilibrium related to its new value. Thus, after, during, and (as long as the change is anticipated) before a change in the value of n, there will be some reaction on the values of k, , and r. As a result, the change in the value of p, at least temporarily and possibly permanently (since habits and practices, once changed, won't return exactly to their previous state), will not be perfectly proportional to the change in n.

The terms inflation and deflation are used by different writers in varying senses. It would be convenient to speak of an increase or decrease in n as an inflation or deflation of cash; and of a decrease or increase in r as an inflation or deflation of credit. The characteristic of the “credit-cycle” (as the83 alternation of boom and depression is now described) consists in a tendency of k and to diminish during the boom and increase during the depression, irrespective of changes in n and r, these movements representing respectively a diminution and an increase of “real” balances (i.e. balances, in hand or at the bank, measured in terms of purchasing power); so that we might call this phenomenon deflation and inflation of real balances.

The terms inflation and deflation are used by different authors in different ways. It would make sense to refer to an increase or decrease in n as an inflation or deflation of cash; and a decrease or increase in r as an inflation or deflation of credit. The main feature of the "credit cycle" (which is how the cycle of boom and recession is referred to now) involves a tendency for k and to decrease during the boom and increase during the recession, regardless of changes in n and r. These shifts represent a decrease and an increase in “real” balances (i.e. balances held in cash or at the bank, valued in terms of purchasing power); thus, we might refer to this phenomenon as deflation and inflation of real balances.

It will illustrate the “Quantity Theory” equation in general and the phenomena of deflation and inflation of real balances in particular, if we endeavour to fill in actual values for our symbolic quantities. The following example does not claim to be exact and its object is to illustrate the idea rather than to convey statistically precise facts. October 1920 was about the end of the recent boom, and October 1922 was near the bottom of the depression. At these two dates the figures of price level (taking October 1922 as 100), cash circulation (note circulation plus private deposits at the Bank of England23), and bank deposits in Great Britain were roughly as follows:

It will show the “Quantity Theory” equation in general and the effects of deflation and inflation of real balances specifically, if we try to fill in actual values for our symbolic quantities. The following example doesn't claim to be exact, and its purpose is to illustrate the concept rather than provide statistically precise facts. October 1920 was around the end of the recent boom, and October 1922 was close to the bottom of the depression. At these two dates, the figures for the price level (with October 1922 as 100), cash circulation (note circulation plus private deposits at the Bank of England23), and bank deposits in Great Britain were roughly as follows:

23 It would take me too far from the immediate matter in hand to discuss why I take this definition of “cash” in the case of Great Britain. It is discussed further in Chapter V. below.

23 It would take me off topic to explain why I use this definition of “cash” in the case of Great Britain. It will be discussed further in Chapter V. below.

  Price Level. Cash Circulation. Bank Deposits.
October 1920 150 £585,000,000 £2,000,000,000
October 1922 100 £504,000,000 £1,700,000,000

The value of r was not very different at the two84 dates—say about 12 per cent. Consequently our equation for the two dates works out as follows24:

The value of r was pretty similar at the two84 dates—around 12 percent. So, our equation for the two dates comes out like this24:

October 1920 n = 585 p = 1·5 k = 230 = 1333
October 1922 n = 504 p = 1    k = 300 = 1700

24 For 585 = 1·5(230 + 1333 × ·12), and 504 = 1(300 + 1700 × ·12).

24 For 585 = 1·5(230 + 1333 × ·12), and 504 = 1(300 + 1700 × ·12).

Thus during the depression k rose from 230 to 300 and from 1333 to 1700, which means that the cash holdings of the public at the former date were worth 23/30, and their bank balances 1333/1700, what they were worth at the latter date. It thus appears that the tendency of k and to increase had more to do, than the deflation of “cash” had, with the fall of prices between the two periods. If k and were to fall back to their 1920 values, prices would rise 30 per cent without any change whatever in the volume of cash or the reserve policy of the banks. Thus even in Great Britain the fluctuations of k and can have a decisive influence on the price level; whilst we have already seen (pp. 51, 52) how enormously they can change in the recent conditions of Russia and Central Europe.

Thus during the depression, k increased from 230 to 300 and rose from 1333 to 1700, meaning that the cash holdings of the public at the earlier date were worth 23/30, and their bank balances were worth 1333/1700 at the later date. It appears that the rise in k and was more related to this than the deflation of “cash” was to the drop in prices between the two periods. If k and were to revert to their 1920 values, prices would increase by 30 percent without any change in the amount of cash or the reserve policy of the banks. Thus, even in Great Britain, the fluctuations of k and can significantly impact the price level; while we've already seen (pp. 51, 52) how dramatically they can change under the recent conditions in Russia and Central Europe.

The moral of this discussion, to be carried forward in the reader’s mind until we reach Chapters IV. and V., is that the price level is not mysterious, but is governed by a few, definite, analysable influences. Two of these, n and r, are under the direct control (or ought to be) of the central banking authorities. The third, namely k and , is not directly controllable, and depends on the mood of the public and the business world. The business of stabilising the price level,85 not merely over long periods but so as also to avoid cyclical fluctuations, consists partly in exercising a stabilising influence over k and , in so far as this fails or is impracticable, in deliberately varying n and r so as to counterbalance the movement of k and .

The main point of this discussion, which you should keep in mind until we get to Chapters IV and V, is that the price level isn’t a mystery; it’s determined by a few clear, analyzable factors. Two of these, n and r, are directly controlled (or should be) by the central banking authorities. The third, which includes k and , isn’t directly controllable and depends on the public's mood and the business environment. The task of stabilizing the price level—not just over the long term but also to avoid cyclical fluctuations—involves partly exerting a stabilizing influence over k and . When that isn’t possible or fails, it requires deliberately adjusting n and r to counterbalance the changes in k and .

The usual method of exercising a stabilising influence over k and especially over , is that of bank-rate. A tendency of to increase may be somewhat counteracted by lowering the bank-rate, because easy lending diminishes the advantage of keeping a margin for contingencies in cash. Cheap money also operates to counterbalance an increase of , because, by encouraging borrowing from the banks, it prevents r from increasing or causes r to diminish. But it is doubtful whether bank-rate by itself is always a powerful enough instrument, and, if we are to achieve stability, we must be prepared to vary n and r on occasion.

The usual way to stabilize k and , especially , is through the bank rate. If starts to rise, lowering the bank rate can help counterbalance this because easier lending makes it less necessary to keep a cash reserve for emergencies. Cheap money also helps to offset an increase in by encouraging more borrowing from the banks, which keeps r from rising or even causes r to fall. However, it's uncertain whether the bank rate alone is always a strong enough tool, and to maintain stability, we need to be ready to adjust n and r when necessary.

Our analysis suggests that the first duty of the central banking and currency authorities is to make sure that they have n and r thoroughly under control. For example, so long as inflationary taxation is in question n will be influenced by other than currency objects and cannot, therefore, be fully under control; moreover, at the other extreme, under a gold standard n is not always under control, because it depends on the unregulated forces which determine the demand and supply of gold throughout the world. Again, without a central banking system r will not be under86 proper control because it will be determined by the unco-ordinated decisions of numerous different banks.

Our analysis suggests that the primary responsibility of central banking and currency authorities is to ensure they have n and r completely under control. For instance, when it comes to inflationary taxation, n will be influenced by factors outside of currency and thus cannot be fully controlled; additionally, on the other hand, under a gold standard, n is not always under control because it relies on unregulated forces that dictate the demand and supply of gold globally. Furthermore, without a central banking system, r will not be properly controlled as it will be determined by the uncoordinated decisions of numerous different banks.

At the present time in Great Britain r is very completely controlled, and n also, so long as we refrain from inflationary finance on the one hand and from a return to an unregulated gold standard on the other.25 The second duty of the authorities is therefore worth discussing, namely, the use of their control over n and r to counterbalance changes in k and . Even if k and were entirely outside the influence of deliberate policy, which is not in fact the case, nevertheless p could be kept reasonably steady by suitable modifications of the values of n and r.

Right now in Great Britain, r is tightly controlled, and so is n, as long as we avoid inflationary financing on one side and a return to an unregulated gold standard on the other.25 The second responsibility of the authorities is worth discussing, which is the use of their control over n and r to balance out changes in k and . Even if k and were completely beyond the influence of intentional policy, which they aren’t, p could still be kept relatively stable through appropriate adjustments to the values of n and r.

25 In the case of the United States the same thing is more or less true, so long as the Federal Reserve Board is prepared to incur the expense of bottling up redundant gold.

25 In the case of the United States, the same is mostly true, as long as the Federal Reserve Board is willing to bear the cost of storing excess gold.

Old-fashioned advocates of sound money have laid too much emphasis on the need of keeping n and r steady, and have argued as if this policy by itself would produce the right results. So far from this being so, steadiness of n and r, when k and are not steady, is bound to lead to unsteadiness of the price level. Cyclical fluctuations are characterised, not primarily by changes in n or r, but by changes in k and . It follows that they can only be cured if we are ready deliberately to increase and decrease n and r, when symptoms of movement are showing in the values of k and . I am being led, however, into a large subject beyond my immediate purpose, and am anticipating also the topic of Chapter V.87 These hints will serve, nevertheless, to indicate to the reader what a long way we may be led by an understanding of the implications of the simple Quantity equation with which we started.

Old-school supporters of sound money have focused too much on the need to keep n and r stable, arguing as if this approach alone would deliver the right outcomes. In reality, keeping n and r steady, while k and are fluctuating, is sure to lead to instability in the price level. Cyclical changes are driven not mainly by shifts in n or r, but by variations in k and . Therefore, they can only be addressed if we're willing to intentionally adjust n and r when we notice movements in the values of k and . However, I'm getting into a broader topic than my current focus, and I’m also hinting at what will be discussed in Chapter V.87 These points will nonetheless help indicate to the reader how much we can understand from the simple Quantity equation we started with.

II. The Theory of Purchasing Power Parity.

The Quantity Theory deals with the purchasing power or commodity-value of a given national currency. We come now to the relative value of two distinct national currencies,—that is to say, to the theory of the Foreign Exchanges.

The Quantity Theory addresses the buying power or value of a specific national currency. We now turn to the relative value of two different national currencies—that is, to the theory of Foreign Exchanges.

When the currencies of the world were nearly all on a gold basis, their relative value (i.e. the exchanges) depended on the actual amount of gold metal in a unit of each, with minor adjustments for the cost of transferring the metal from place to place.

When most currencies around the world were based on gold, their relative value (i.e. the exchanges) depended on the actual amount of gold in each unit, with small adjustments for the cost of moving the metal from one place to another.

When this common measure has ceased to be effective and we have instead a number of independent systems of inconvertible paper, what basic fact determines the rates at which units of the different currencies exchange for one another?

When this common measure is no longer effective and we have several independent systems of non-convertible paper, what fundamental fact dictates the exchange rates between different currencies?

The explanation is to be found in the doctrine, as old in itself as Ricardo, with which Professor Cassel has lately familiarised the public under the name of “Purchasing Power Parity.”26

The explanation comes from a concept as old as Ricardo, which Professor Cassel has recently introduced to the public under the term “Purchasing Power Parity.”26

88

88

26 This term was first introduced into economic literature in an article contributed by Prof. Cassel to the Economic Journal, December 1918. For Prof. Cassel’s considered opinions on the whole question, see his Money and Foreign Exchange after 1914 (1922). The theory, as distinct from the name, is essentially Ricardo’s.

26 This term was first introduced into economic literature in an article by Prof. Cassel in the Economic Journal, December 1918. For Prof. Cassel’s detailed views on the entire issue, see his Money and Foreign Exchange after 1914 (1922). The theory, apart from its name, is basically Ricardo’s.

This doctrine in its baldest form runs as follows: (1) The purchasing power of an inconvertible currency within its own country, i.e. the currency’s internal purchasing power, depends on the currency policy of the Government and the currency habits of the people, in accordance with the Quantity Theory of Money just discussed. (2) The purchasing power of an inconvertible currency in a foreign country, i.e. the currency’s external purchasing power, must be the rate of exchange between the home-currency and the foreign-currency, multiplied by the foreign-currency’s purchasing power in its own country. (3) In conditions of equilibrium the internal and external purchasing powers of a currency must be the same, allowance being made for transport charges and import and export taxes; for otherwise a movement of trade would occur in order to take advantage of the inequality. (4) It follows, therefore, from (1), (2), and (3) that the rate of exchange between the home-currency and the foreign-currency must tend in equilibrium to be the ratio between the purchasing powers of the home-currency at home and of the foreign-currency in the foreign country. This ratio between the respective home purchasing powers of the two currencies is designated their “purchasing power parity.”

This doctrine in its simplest form is as follows: (1) The purchasing power of a non-convertible currency within its own country, i.e. the currency's internal purchasing power, depends on the government's currency policy and the currency habits of the people, in line with the Quantity Theory of Money just explained. (2) The purchasing power of a non-convertible currency in a foreign country, i.e. the currency's external purchasing power, must be the exchange rate between the home currency and the foreign currency, multiplied by the foreign currency's purchasing power in its own country. (3) Under equilibrium conditions, the internal and external purchasing powers of a currency must be the same, considering transport charges and import and export taxes; otherwise, trade would adjust to exploit the differences. (4) Therefore, from (1), (2), and (3), it follows that the exchange rate between the home currency and the foreign currency must aim in equilibrium to reflect the ratio of the purchasing powers of the home currency domestically and the foreign currency in its own country. This ratio between the respective home purchasing powers of the two currencies is referred to as their "purchasing power parity."

If, therefore, we find that the internal and external purchasing powers of the home-currency are widely different, and, which is the same thing, that the actual exchange rates differ widely from the purchasing89 power parities, then we are justified in inferring that equilibrium is not established, and that, as time goes on, forces will come into play to bring the actual exchange rates and the purchasing power parities nearer together. The actual exchanges are often more sensitive and more volatile than the purchasing power parities, being subject to speculation, to sudden movements of funds, to seasonal influences, and to anticipations of impending changes in purchasing power parity (due to relative inflation or deflation); though also on other occasions they may lag behind. Nevertheless it is the purchasing power parity, according to this doctrine, which corresponds to the old gold par. This is the point about which the exchanges fluctuate, and at which they must ultimately come to rest; with one material difference, namely, that it is not itself a fixed point,—since, if internal prices move differently in the two countries under comparison, the purchasing power parity also moves, so that equilibrium may be restored, not only by a movement in the market rate of exchange, but also by a movement of the purchasing power parity itself.

If we find that the internal and external purchasing powers of the home currency are significantly different, and, essentially, that the actual exchange rates differ greatly from the purchasing power parities, then we can conclude that equilibrium has not been reached. Over time, forces will arise that will push the actual exchange rates and the purchasing power parities closer together. Actual exchanges are often more sensitive and more volatile than purchasing power parities, affected by speculation, sudden capital movements, seasonal factors, and expectations of upcoming changes in purchasing power parity (due to relative inflation or deflation); however, there are times when they may also lag behind. Nonetheless, it is the purchasing power parity, according to this theory, that aligns with the old gold standard. This is the point around which the exchanges fluctuate and at which they ultimately settle; with one key difference, which is that it is not a fixed point—since, if internal prices change differently in the two countries being compared, the purchasing power parity also shifts, meaning equilibrium can be restored not just through a change in the market exchange rate, but also through a change in the purchasing power parity itself.

At first sight this theory appears to be one of great practical utility; and many persons have endeavoured to draw important practical conclusions about the future course of the exchanges from charts exhibiting the divergences between the market rate of exchange and the purchasing power parities,—undeterred by the perplexity whether an existing divergence from90 equilibrium will be remedied by a movement of the exchanges or of the purchasing power parity or of both.

At first glance, this theory seems to be very useful in practice; many people have tried to make significant practical predictions about the future of exchange rates based on charts showing the differences between the market exchange rate and purchasing power parities—unfazed by the confusion over whether an existing difference from90 equilibrium will be fixed by a change in exchange rates, purchasing power parity, or both.

In practical applications of the doctrine there are, however, two further difficulties, which we have allowed so far to escape our attention,—both of them arising out of the words allowance being made for transport charges and import and export taxes. The first difficulty is how to make allowance for such charges and taxes. The second difficulty is how to treat purchasing power over goods and services which do not enter into international trade at all.

In practical applications of the doctrine, there are, however, two additional difficulties that we have so far overlooked—both stemming from the phrase allowance being made for transport charges and import and export taxes. The first difficulty is figuring out how to account for these charges and taxes. The second difficulty is how to handle purchasing power for goods and services that do not enter into international trade at all.

The doctrine, in the form in which it is generally applied, endeavours to deal with the first difficulty by assuming that the percentage difference between internal and external purchasing power at some standard date, when approximate equilibrium may be presumed to have existed, generally the year 1913, may be taken as an approximately satisfactory correction for the same disturbing factors at the present time. For example, instead of calculating directly the cost of a standard set of goods at home and abroad respectively, the calculations are made that $2 are required to buy in the United States a standard set which $1 would have bought in 1913, and that £2·43 are required to buy in England what £1 would have bought in 1913. On this basis (the pre-war purchasing power parity being assumed to be in equilibrium with the pre-war exchange of $4·86 = £1) the present purchasing power parity91 between dollars and sterling is given by $4 = £1, since 4·86 × 2 ÷ 2·43 = 4.

The doctrine, as it's usually applied, tries to address the first challenge by assuming that the percentage difference between internal and external purchasing power at a standard date, where we can reasonably assume equilibrium existed—typically the year 1913—can be used as a rough correction for the same factors that are currently at play. For instance, rather than calculating the cost of a standard set of goods at home and abroad directly, we figure that $2 is needed to purchase a standard set in the United States, while $1 would have sufficed in 1913. Similarly, in England, £2.43 is necessary to buy what £1 would have bought back in 1913. Based on this (with the assumption that pre-war purchasing power parity was in equilibrium with the pre-war exchange rate of $4.86 = £1), the current purchasing power parity between dollars and pounds is calculated as $4 = £1, because 4.86 × 2 ÷ 2.43 = 4. 91

The obvious objection to this method of correction is that transport and tariff costs, especially if this term is taken to cover all export and import regulations, including prohibitions and official or semi-official combines for differentiating between export and home prices, are notoriously widely different in many cases from those which existed in 1913. We should not get the same result if we were to take some year other than 1913 as the basis of the calculation.

The obvious issue with this correction method is that transport and tariff costs, especially if we consider this term to include all export and import regulations, like bans and official or semi-official agreements to distinguish between export and domestic prices, vary greatly in many instances compared to what they were in 1913. We wouldn't arrive at the same outcome if we used a year other than 1913 as the basis for our calculations.

The second difficulty—the treatment of purchasing power over articles which do not enter into international trade—is still more serious. For, if we restrict ourselves to articles entering into international trade and make exact allowance for transport and tariff costs, we should find that the theory is always in accordance with the facts, with perhaps a short time-lag, the purchasing power parity being never very far from the market rate of exchange. Indeed, it is the whole business of the international merchant to see that this is so; for whenever the rates are temporarily out of parity he is in a position to make a profit by moving goods. The prices of cotton in New York, Liverpool, Havre, Hamburg, Genoa, and Prague, expressed in dollars, sterling, francs, marks, lire, and krone respectively, are never for any length of time much divergent from one another on the92 basis of the exchange rates actually obtaining in the market, due allowance being made for tariffs and the cost of moving cotton from one centre to another; and the same is true of other articles of international trade, though with an increasing time-lag as we pass to articles which are not standardised or are not handled in organised markets. In fact, the theory, stated thus, is a truism, and as nearly as possible jejune.

The second challenge—the analysis of purchasing power for goods that aren't part of international trade—is even more significant. If we focus only on goods that are involved in international trade and account for transportation and tariff costs accurately, we would see that the theory generally aligns with reality, maybe with a slight delay, as purchasing power parity rarely strays far from the market exchange rate. In fact, it's the responsibility of international merchants to ensure this alignment; whenever the rates are temporarily unbalanced, they can profit by transferring goods. The prices of cotton in New York, Liverpool, Havre, Hamburg, Genoa, and Prague, expressed in dollars, pounds, euros, marks, lira, and crowns, respectively, don't deviate much from one another for any extended period when considering the actual exchange rates in the market, making appropriate adjustments for tariffs and the costs of shipping cotton from one location to another; the same applies to other internationally traded goods, although the time lag increases as we move to items that aren't standardized or traded in organized markets. In fact, this theory, stated this way, is quite obvious and almost trivial.

For this reason practical applications of the theory are not thus restricted. The standard set of commodities selected is not confined to goods which are exported from and imported into the countries under comparison, but is the same set, generally speaking, as is used for compiling index numbers of general purchasing power or of the working-class cost of living. Yet applied in this way—namely, in a comparison of movements of the general index numbers of home prices in two countries with movements in the rates of exchange between their currencies—the theory requires a further assumption for its validity, namely, that in the long run the home prices of the goods and services which do not enter into international trade, move in more or less the same proportions as those which do.27

For this reason, practical applications of the theory are not limited. The standard set of commodities chosen isn't just restricted to goods that are exported from and imported into the countries being compared; it's generally the same set used for compiling index numbers of overall purchasing power or the cost of living for the working class. However, when applied this way—specifically, comparing changes in the general index numbers of domestic prices in two countries with changes in the exchange rates between their currencies—the theory requires an additional assumption for it to be valid, which is that in the long run, the domestic prices of goods and services that aren’t traded internationally move in roughly the same proportions as those that are. 27

93

93

27 “Our calculation of the purchasing power parity rests strictly on the proviso that the rise in prices in the countries concerned has affected all commodities in a like degree. If that proviso is not fulfilled, then the actual exchange rate may deviate from the calculated purchasing power parity.” Cassel, Money and Foreign Exchange after 1914, p. 154.

27 “Our calculation of purchasing power parity is based on the assumption that price increases in the relevant countries have impacted all goods equally. If that assumption isn’t met, then the actual exchange rate might differ from the calculated purchasing power parity.” Cassel, Money and Foreign Exchange after 1914, p. 154.

So far from this being a truism, it is not literally or exactly true at all; and one can only say that it is more or less true according to circumstances. If capital and labour can freely move on a large scale between home and export industries without loss of relative efficiency, if there is no movement in the “equation of exchange” (see below) with the other country, and if the fluctuations in price are solely due to monetary influences and not to changes in other economic relationships between the two countries, then this further assumption may be approximately justified. But this is not always the case; and such a cataclysm as the war, with its various consequences to victor and vanquished, may set up a new equilibrium position. There may, for example, be a change more or less permanent, or at least as prolonged as the reparation payments, in the relative exchange values of Germany’s imports and exports respectively, or of those German products and services which can enter into international trade and those which cannot. Or, again, the strengthening of the financial position of the United States as against Europe, which has resulted from the war, may have shifted the old equilibrium in a direction favourable to the United States. In such cases it is not correct to assume that the coefficients of purchasing power parity, calculated, as they generally are calculated, by means of the relative variations of index numbers of general purchasing power from their pre-war levels, must94 ultimately approximate to the actual rates of exchange, or that internal and external purchasing power must ultimately bear to one another the same relation as in 1913.

So far from this being a fact, it's not literally or exactly true at all; we can only say that it's somewhat true depending on the situation. If capital and labor can move freely on a large scale between domestic and export industries without losing their relative efficiency, if there's no change in the “equation of exchange” (see below) with the other country, and if price fluctuations are solely due to monetary factors and not other economic changes between the two countries, then this assumption might be somewhat justified. But that's not always the case; major events like the war, with its various consequences for winners and losers, can create a new balance. For instance, there could be a more or less permanent shift, lasting at least as long as the reparation payments, in the relative exchange values of Germany’s imports and exports, or between German products and services that can participate in international trade and those that can’t. Additionally, the strengthening of the financial position of the United States compared to Europe due to the war may have changed the old balance in a way that benefits the United States. In such scenarios, it isn't accurate to assume that the coefficients of purchasing power parity, generally calculated using the relative changes in index numbers of overall purchasing power from their pre-war levels, must ultimately align with the actual exchange rates, or that internal and external purchasing power must ultimately relate to each other in the same way as in 1913.

The Index Number calculated for the United States by the Federal Reserve Board illustrates how disturbing may be the influence of the change since 1913 in the relative prices of imported goods, exported goods, and commodities generally:

The Index Number calculated for the United States by the Federal Reserve Board shows how concerning the changes since 1913 in the relative prices of imported goods, exported goods, and commodities in general can be:

  Goods
Imported.
Goods
Exported.
All
Commodities.
1913 100 100 100
July 1922 128 165 165
April 1923 156 186 169
July 1923 141 170 159

Thus the theory does not provide a simple or ready-made measure of the “true” value of the exchanges. When it is restricted to foreign-trade goods, it is little better than a truism. When it is not so restricted, the conception of purchasing power parity becomes much more interesting, but is no longer an accurate forecaster of the course of the foreign exchanges. If, therefore, we follow the ordinary practice of fixing purchasing power parity by comparisons of the general purchasing power of a country’s currency at home and abroad, then we must not infer from this that the actual rate of exchange ought to stand at the purchasing power parity, or that it is only a matter of time and adjustment before the two will return to equality. Purchasing power parity,95 thus defined, tells us an important fact about the relative changes in the purchasing power of money in (e.g.) England and the United States or Germany between 1913 and, say, 1923, but it does not necessarily settle what the equilibrium exchange rate in 1923 between sterling and dollars or marks ought to be.

So, the theory doesn’t give us a straightforward or ready-made way to measure the “true” value of exchanges. When it’s limited to goods traded internationally, it doesn’t say much that’s new. However, when it isn’t limited, the idea of purchasing power parity becomes way more fascinating, but it stops being a reliable predictor for the direction of foreign exchanges. If we stick with the usual method of setting purchasing power parity by comparing the general purchasing power of a country’s currency at home and abroad, we shouldn’t assume that the actual exchange rate should match the purchasing power parity, or that it’s just a matter of time and adjustment before the two align. Purchasing power parity, 95 defined this way, reveals an important fact about the changes in the purchasing power of money in countries like (e.g.) England and the United States or Germany between 1913 and, say, 1923, but it doesn’t necessarily determine what the balanced exchange rate in 1923 between pounds, dollars, or marks should be.

Thus defined “purchasing power parity” deserves attention, even though it is not always an accurate forecaster of the foreign exchanges. The practical importance of our qualifications must not be exaggerated. If the fluctuations of purchasing power parity are markedly different from the fluctuations in the exchanges, this indicates an actual or impending change in the relative prices of the two classes of goods which respectively do and do not enter into international trade. Now there is certainly a tendency for movements in the prices of these two classes of goods to influence one another in the long run. The relative valuation placed on them is derived from deep economic and psychological causes which are not easily disturbed. If, therefore, the divergence from the pre-existing equilibrium is mainly due to monetary causes (as, for example, different degrees of inflation or deflation in the two countries), as it often is, then we may reasonably expect that purchasing power parity and exchange value will come together again before long.

Thus defined, “purchasing power parity” deserves attention, even though it’s not always an accurate predictor of foreign exchange rates. We shouldn't overstate the practical significance of our qualifications. If the changes in purchasing power parity are significantly different from the changes in exchange rates, it suggests an actual or upcoming shift in the relative prices of the two groups of goods that do and do not enter international trade. There is indeed a tendency for the prices of these two groups of goods to influence each other in the long run. The relative value assigned to them comes from deep economic and psychological factors that aren't easily shaken. Therefore, if the deviation from the existing equilibrium is mainly caused by monetary factors (as, for example, different levels of inflation or deflation in the two countries), as it often is, then we can reasonably expect that purchasing power parity and exchange value will align again soon.

When this is the case, it is not possible to say96 in general whether exchange value will move towards purchasing power parity or the other way round. Sometimes, as recently in Europe, it is the exchanges which are the more sensitive to impending relative price-changes and move first; whilst in other cases the exchanges may not move until after the change in the relation between the internal and external price-levels is an accomplished fact. But the essence of the purchasing power parity theory, considered as an explanation of the exchanges, is to be found, I think, in its regarding internal purchasing power as being in the long run a more trustworthy indicator of a currency’s value than the market rates of exchange, because internal purchasing power quickly reflects the monetary policy of the country, which is the final determinant. If the market rates of exchange fall further than the country’s existing or impending currency policy justifies by its effect on the internal purchasing power of the country’s money, then sooner or later the exchange value is bound to recover. Thus, provided no persisting change is taking place in the basic economic relations between two countries, and provided the internal purchasing power of the currency has in each country settled down to equilibrium in relation to the currency policy of the authorities, then the rate of exchange between the currencies of the two countries must also settle down in the long run to correspond with their comparative internal purchasing powers. Subject to97 these assumptions comparative internal purchasing power does take the place of the old gold parity as furnishing the point about which the short-period movements of the exchanges fluctuate.

When this is the case, it's hard to say96 in general whether exchange value will shift towards purchasing power parity or the other way around. Sometimes, as seen recently in Europe, it is the exchange rates that are more sensitive to upcoming relative price changes and move first; while in other cases, the exchanges may not adjust until after the change in the relationship between internal and external price levels has already happened. But the core of the purchasing power parity theory, as an explanation for exchange rates, is found, I think, in its view of internal purchasing power as a more reliable indicator of a currency’s value over the long term than market exchange rates, because internal purchasing power quickly reflects the monetary policy of the country, which is the ultimate determinant. If the market exchange rates drop more than what the country’s current or upcoming currency policy would justify based on its impact on the internal purchasing power of the country’s currency, then sooner or later, the exchange value will recover. Thus, as long as there’s no lasting change in the fundamental economic relations between two countries, and as long as the internal purchasing power of the currency in each country has reached equilibrium with the currency policy of the authorities, the exchange rate between the currencies of the two countries must also eventually align with their comparative internal purchasing powers. Under97 these assumptions, comparative internal purchasing power replaces the old gold parity as the basis around which the short-term fluctuations of the exchange rates revolve.

If, on the other hand, these assumptions are not fulfilled and changes are taking place in the “equation of exchange,” as economists call it, between the services and products of one country and those of another, either on account of movements of capital, or reparation payments, or changes in the relative efficiency of labour, or changes in the urgency of the world’s demand for that country’s special products, or the like, then the equilibrium point between purchasing power parity and the rate of exchange may be modified permanently.

If, on the other hand, these assumptions aren't met and changes happen in the “equation of exchange,” as economists call it, between the services and products of one country and those of another, whether due to capital flows, reparations, shifts in labor efficiency, or changes in the global demand for that country’s unique products, then the balance point between purchasing power parity and the exchange rate may change permanently.

This point may be made clearer by an example. Let us consider two countries, Westropa and the United States of the Hesperides, and let us assume for the sake of simplicity, and also because it may often correspond to the facts, that in both countries the price of exported goods moves in the same way as the price of other home-produced goods, but that the “equation of exchange” has moved in favour of the Hesperides so that a smaller number than before of units of Hesperidean products exchange for a given quantity of Westropean products. It follows from this that imported products in Westropa will rise in price more than commodities generally, whilst in the Hesperides they will rise less. Let us suppose98 that between 1913 and 1923 the Westropean index number of prices has risen from 100 to 155 and the Hesperidean index number from 100 to 160; that these index numbers are so constructed in each case that imported commodities constitute 20 per cent and home-produced commodities 80 per cent of the whole; and that the “equation of exchange” has moved 10 per cent in favour of the Hesperides, that is to say a given quantity of the goods exported by the Hesperides will buy 10 per cent more than before of the goods exported by Europe. The state of affairs is then as follows:28

This point can be made clearer with an example. Let's consider two countries, Westropa and the United States of the Hesperides. For simplicity, and because it often aligns with reality, let's assume that in both countries the price of exported goods moves similarly to the price of other domestically produced goods. However, the “equation of exchange” has shifted in favor of the Hesperides, meaning that fewer units of Hesperidean products are needed to exchange for a given quantity of Westropean products. As a result, the prices of imported goods in Westropa will increase more than the prices of products in general, while in the Hesperides, they will rise less. Let’s assume that between 1913 and 1923, the Westropean price index has risen from 100 to 155, and the Hesperidean index from 100 to 160. These indexes are structured so that imported goods account for 20 percent and domestically produced goods for 80 percent of the total. Additionally, the “equation of exchange” has moved 10 percent in favor of the Hesperides, meaning that a set quantity of goods exported by the Hesperides will buy 10 percent more than before of the goods exported by Europe. The situation is then as follows:28

Westropa: Price index of  imported commodities (x) 167.
  home-produced (y) 152.
  all 155.
Hesperides: imported () 148.
  home-produced () 163.
  all 160.

For 10x = 11y
8y + 2x = 1550

For 10x = 11y
8y + 2x = 1550

        11 = 10
8 + 2 = 1600.

11 = 10
8 + 2 = 1600.

Thus it appears that the purchasing power parity of the Westropean currency in 1923 compared with 1913 is (160/155 = )103; whereas the rate of exchange, compared with the 1913 parity, is (163/167 = 148/152 = )97. If the worsening of Westropa’s equation of exchange with the Hesperides is permanent, then its purchasing power parity (on the 1913 basis) will also remain permanently above the equilibrium value of the market rate of exchange.

Thus, it seems that the purchasing power of the Westropean currency in 1923 compared to 1913 is (160/155 = )103; while the exchange rate, compared to the 1913 parity, is (163/167 = 148/152 = )97. If the decline of Westropa's exchange equation with the Hesperides is permanent, then its purchasing power (based on the 1913 figures) will also stay permanently above the market exchange rate's equilibrium value.

99

99

A tendency of these two measures of the value of a country’s currency to move differently is, therefore, a highly interesting symptom. If the market rate of exchange shows a continuing tendency to stand below the purchasing power parity, we have, failing any other explanation, some reason to suspect a worsening of the “equation of exchange” as compared with the base year.

A tendency for these two measures of a country's currency value to behave differently is, therefore, a very interesting sign. If the market exchange rate consistently stays below the purchasing power parity, we have some reason to suspect that the "equation of exchange" is deteriorating compared to the base year, unless there’s another explanation.

In the charts and tables below, the actual results are worked out of applying the theory to the exchange value of sterling, francs, and lire in terms of dollars since 1919. The figures show that, quantitatively speaking, the influences, which detract from the precision of the purchasing power parity theory, have been in these cases small, on the whole, as compared with those which function in accord with it. There seems to have been some disturbance in the “equations of exchange” since 1913,—which would probably show up more distinctly if it were not that the index numbers employed in the following enquiry are of the type which is largely built up from articles entering into international trade. Nevertheless general price changes, affecting all commodities more or less equally, due to currency inflation or deflation, have been so dominant in their influence that the theory has been actually applicable with remarkable accuracy. In the case, however, of such countries as Germany, where the shocks to equilibrium have been much more violent in many respects, the concordance100 between the purchasing power parity based on 1913 and the actual rate of exchange has suffered, whether temporarily or permanently, very great disturbance.

In the charts and tables below, the actual results show how applying the theory to the exchange value of sterling, francs, and lire in terms of dollars since 1919 has played out. The figures indicate that, overall, the factors that reduce the precision of the purchasing power parity theory have been relatively small compared to those that align with it. There appears to have been some disruption in the “equations of exchange” since 1913, which might be more noticeable if the index numbers used in this inquiry weren't primarily based on items involved in international trade. However, general price changes affecting all commodities to some extent, due to currency inflation or deflation, have been so significant that the theory has proven to be remarkably accurate. In contrast, in countries like Germany, where the shocks to equilibrium have been much more intense in various ways, the alignment between the purchasing power parity based on 1913 and the actual exchange rate has experienced considerable disruption, whether temporary or permanent.

The first of these charts, which deals with the value of sterling in terms of dollars, shows that whilst the purchasing power parity, calculated with 1913 as base, is often somewhat above the actual exchange, there is a persevering tendency for the two to come together. The two curves are within one point of each other in September-November 1919, March-April 1920, April 1921, September 1921, January-June 1922, and February-June 1923, which is certainly a remarkable illustration of the tendency to concordance between the purchasing power parity and the rate of exchange. On inductive grounds it would be tempting to conclude from this chart that the financial consequences of the war have depressed the equilibrium of the purchasing power parity of sterling as against the dollar from 1 to 2½ per cent since 1913, if it were not that this figure barely exceeds the margin of error resulting from the choice of one pair of index numbers rather than another from amongst those available.29 It will be interesting to see what effect is produced by the payment, just commenced, of the interest on the American debt.

The first of these charts, which shows the value of the pound in terms of dollars, indicates that while the purchasing power parity, based on 1913, is often slightly above the actual exchange rate, there is a consistent trend for the two to converge. The curves are within one point of each other during September-November 1919, March-April 1920, April 1921, September 1921, January-June 1922, and February-June 1923, which is certainly a remarkable example of the tendency toward alignment between purchasing power parity and the exchange rate. Based on inductive reasoning, it would be tempting to conclude from this chart that the financial impact of the war has reduced the balance of purchasing power parity of the pound against the dollar by 1 to 2.5 percent since 1913, if it weren’t for the fact that this figure barely exceeds the margin of error resulting from the choice of one pair of index numbers over another among those available.29 It will be interesting to see what effect is produced by the payment, which has just started, of the interest on the American debt.

29 Nevertheless, if I had used the Board of Trade or the Statist index number in place of the Economist index number in the table below, the presumption of a slight worsening of the “equation of index” against Great Britain would be somewhat strengthened.

29 Still, if I had used the Board of Trade or the Statist index number instead of the Economist index number in the table below, the assumption of a slight deterioration of the “equation of index” relative to Great Britain would be somewhat reinforced.

This chart brings out clearly, as also do those for101 France and Italy, the susceptibility of the foreign exchange rates to seasonal influences, whereas the purchasing power parity is naturally less affected by them.

This chart clearly shows, just like those for 101 France and Italy, that foreign exchange rates are influenced by seasonal factors, while purchasing power parity is generally less impacted by them.

In the case of France the curves are together at the end of 1919, diverge in 1920, come together again in the middle of 1921, and keep together until a divergence occurred again in the latter part of 1922.

In France, the curves are together at the end of 1919, diverge in 1920, come together again in the middle of 1921, and stay together until they diverge again in the latter part of 1922.

For Italy, rather unexpectedly perhaps, the relationship is extraordinarily steady, although here, as in the case of France and Great Britain, there are indications that the war may have resulted in a slight lowering of the equilibrium point, by (say) 10 per cent;30—the parity, calculated with 1913 as the base year, has been almost invariably somewhat above the actual rate of exchange. The Italian curve illustrates in a remarkable way the manner in which the external and internal purchasing powers of the currency fall together, when the main influence at work is a progressive depreciation due to currency inflation.

For Italy, somewhat unexpectedly, the relationship is surprisingly stable. However, similar to France and Great Britain, there are signs that the war may have led to a slight decrease in the equilibrium point, by about 10 percent; 30—the parity, calculated with 1913 as the base year, has consistently been slightly above the actual exchange rate. The Italian trend clearly shows how the external and internal buying power of the currency aligns when the primary factor is a gradual depreciation caused by currency inflation.

30 The use of any of the other Italian index numbers would have accentuated this indication. The table of American prices given on p. 94 above confirms the suggestion that the “equation of exchange” between the U.S. and the rest of the world as a whole has moved, say, 10 per cent in favour of the former.

30 Using any of the other Italian index numbers would have highlighted this point. The table of American prices mentioned on p. 94 above supports the idea that the "equation of exchange" between the U.S. and the rest of the world has shifted, let's say, 10 percent in favor of the U.S.

The broad effect of these curves and tables is to give substantial inductive support to the general theory outlined above, even under such abnormal conditions as have existed since the Armistice. During this period the movements of the relative price level in France and Italy due to monetary inflation have been102 so much larger than any shifting in the “equation of exchange” (a movement of more than 10 or 20 per cent in which would be startling) that their foreign exchanges have been much more influenced by their internal price policy in relation to the internal price policies of other countries than by any other factor; with the result that the Purchasing Power Parity Theory, even in its crude form, has worked passably well.

The overall impact of these curves and tables is to provide strong inductive support for the general theory mentioned above, even under the unusual conditions that have existed since the Armistice. During this time, the changes in the relative price levels in France and Italy due to monetary inflation have been102 significantly larger than any shifts in the “equation of exchange” (a movement of more than 10 or 20 percent in that would be surprising), meaning their foreign exchanges have been much more affected by their domestic price policies in relation to the domestic price policies of other countries than by any other factor; as a result, the Purchasing Power Parity Theory, even in its basic form, has performed fairly well.

Great Britain and the United States

The United Kingdom and the United States

Per cent of
1913 Parity.
Price Index Number. Purchasing
Power Parity.33
Actual Exchange
(Monthly Average).
Great
Britain31
United
States32
1919 Aug. 242 216 89.3 87.6
Sept. 245 210 85.7 85.8
Oct. 252 211 83.7 85.9
Nov. 259 217 83.8 84.3
Dec. 273 223 81.7 78.4
1920 Jan. 289 233 81.0 75.6
Feb. 303 232 76.6 69.5
March 310 234 75.6 76.2
April 306 245 80.1 80.6
May 305 247 81.0 79.0
June 291 243 83.5 81.1
July 293 241 82.3 74.2
Sept. 284 226 79.6 72.2
Oct. 266 211 79.3 71.4
Nov. 246 196 79.7 70.7
Dec. 220 179 81.4 71.4
1921 Jan. 209 170 81.4 76.7
Feb. 192 160 83.3 79.6
March 189 155 82.0 80.3
April 183 148 80.9 80.7
May 182 145 79.7 81.5
June 179 142 79.3 78.0
July 178 141 79.2 74.8
Aug. 179 142 79.3 75.1
Sept. 183 141 77.0 76.5
Oct. 170 142 83.5 79.5
Nov. 166 141 84.9 81.5
Dec. 162 140 86.4 85.3
1922 Jan. 159 138 86.8 86.8
Feb. 158 141 89.1 89.6
March 160 142 88.7 89.9
April 159 143 89.9 90.7
May 162 148 91.4 91.4
June 163 150 92.0 91.5
July 163 155 95.1 91.4
Aug. 158 155 98.1 91.7
Sept. 158 154 97.4 91.2
Nov. 159 156 98.1 92.0
Dec. 158 156 98.7 94.6
1923 Jan. 160 156 97.5 95.7
Feb. 163 157 96.3 96.2
March 163 159 97.5 96.5
April 165 159 96.4 95.7
May 164 156 95.1 95.0
June 160 153 95.6 94.8

31 Economist Index Number.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Economist Index.

32 U.S. Bureau of Labour Index Number, as revised.

32 U.S. Bureau of Labor Index Number, as revised.

33 The U.S. Bureau of Labour Index Number divided by the Economist Index Number.

33 The U.S. Bureau of Labor Index Number divided by the Economist Index Number.

103

103

ENGLAND

104

104

France and the United States

France and the U.S.

Per cent of
1913 Parity.
Purchasing
Power
Parity.34
Actual
Exchange.
1919 Aug. 62 66
Sept. 58 61
Oct. 55 60
Nov. 53 55
Dec. 52 48
1920 Jan. 48 44
Feb. 44 36
March 42 37
April 41 32
May 45 35
June 49 41
July 48 42
Aug. 46 37
Sept. 43 35
Oct. 42 34
Nov. 43 31
Dec. 41 30
1921 Jan. 42 33
Feb. 42 37
March 43 36
April 43 37
May 44 43
June 44 42
July 43 40
Aug. 43 40
Sept. 41 38
Oct. 43 38
Nov. 42 37
Dec. 43 40
1922 Jan. 44 42
Feb. 46 45
March 46 47
April 46 48
May 44 47
June 46 45
July 48 43
Aug. 47 41
Sept. 46 40
Oct. 46 38
Nov. 44 35
Dec. 43 37
1923 Jan. 40 34
Feb. 37 32
March 37 33
April 38 35
May 38 34
June 37 33

34 U.S. Bureau of Labour Index divided by French official wholesale Index.

34 U.S. Bureau of Labor Index divided by French official wholesale Index.

Italy and the United States

Italy and the U.S.

Per cent of
1913 Parity.
Purchasing
Power
Parity.35
Actual
Exchange.
1919 Aug. 59 56
Sept. 56 53
Oct. 54 51
Nov. 50 44
Dec. 49 40
1920 Jan. 46 37
Feb. 42 29
March. 38 28
April 36 23
May 38 27
June 40 31
July 39 30
Aug. 37 25
Sept. 34 23
Oct. 32 20
Nov. 30 19
Dec. 28 18
1921 Jan. 26 18
Feb. 26 19
March 26 20
April 25 24
May 27 27
June 28 26
July 27 24
Aug. 26 22
Sept. 24 22
Oct. 24 20
Nov. 24 21
Dec. 23 23
1922 Jan. 24 23
Feb. 25 25
March. 27 26
April 27 28
May 28 27
June 28 26
July 28 24
Aug. 27 23
Sept. 26 22
Oct. 26 22
Nov. 26 23
Dec. 27 26
1923 Jan. 27 26
Feb. 27 25
March. 27 25
April 27 26
May 27 25
June 26 24

35 U.S. Bureau of Labour Index Number divided by the “Bachi” Index Number.

35 U.S. Bureau of Labor Index Number divided by the “Bachi” Index Number.

105

105

FRANCE
ITALY

106

106

III. The Seasonal Fluctuation.

Thus the Theory of Purchasing Power Parity tells us that movements in the rate of exchange between the currencies of two countries tend, subject to adjustment in respect of movements in the “equation of exchange,” to correspond pretty closely to movements in the internal price levels of the two countries each expressed in their own currency. It follows that the rate of exchange can be improved in favour of one of the countries by a financial policy directed towards a lowering of its internal price level relatively to the internal price level of the other country. On the other hand a financial policy which has the effect of raising the internal price level must result, sooner or later, in depressing the rate of exchange.

Thus, the Theory of Purchasing Power Parity tells us that changes in the exchange rate between the currencies of two countries tend, with some adjustments for changes in the “equation of exchange,” to closely match changes in the domestic price levels of both countries when expressed in their own currency. This means that the exchange rate can be improved for one of the countries by implementing a financial policy aimed at lowering its domestic price level relative to the domestic price level of the other country. Conversely, a financial policy that raises the domestic price level will eventually lead to a decrease in the exchange rate.

The conclusion is generally drawn, and quite correctly, that budgetary deficits covered by a progressive inflation of the currency render the stabilisation of a country’s exchanges impossible; and that107 the cessation of any increase in the volume of currency, due to this cause, is a necessary pre-requisite to a successful attempt at stabilising.

The conclusion is usually reached, and fairly accurately, that budget deficits financed by ongoing inflation of the currency make it impossible to stabilize a country’s exchange rates; and that107 stopping any increase in the currency supply, for this reason, is an essential requirement for a successful stabilization effort.

The argument, however, is often carried further than this, and it is supposed that, if a country’s budget, currency, foreign trade, and its internal and external price levels are properly adjusted, then, automatically, its foreign exchange will be steady.36 So long, therefore, as the exchanges fluctuate—thus the argument runs—this in itself is a symptom that an attempt to stabilise would be premature. When, on the other hand, the basic conditions necessary for stabilisation are present, the exchange will steady itself. In short, any deliberate or artificial scheme of stabilisation is attacking the problem at the wrong end. It is the regulation of the currency, by means of sound budgetary and bank-rate policies, that needs attention. The proclamation of convertibility will be the last and crowning stage of the proceedings, and will amount to little more than the announcement of a fait accompli.

The argument often goes further than this, suggesting that if a country's budget, currency, foreign trade, and both internal and external price levels are properly adjusted, then its foreign exchange will naturally be stable. So as long as exchanges fluctuate—according to this argument—this alone indicates that any attempt to stabilize would be too soon. On the other hand, when the fundamental conditions for stabilization are in place, the exchange will stabilize itself. In short, any intentional or artificial stabilization scheme is addressing the problem from the wrong angle. The focus should be on managing the currency through sound budgeting and interest rate policies. The declaration of convertibility will be the final and most important step in the process, essentially just announcing a fait accompli.

36 Dr. R. Estcourt, criticising one of my articles in The Annalist for June 12, 1922, writes: “The arrangement would not last for any appreciable period unless, as a preliminary, the Governments took the necessary steps to balance their budgets. If that were done, the so-called stabilisation speedily would become unnecessary; exchange would stabilise itself at pre-war rates.” This passage puts boldly an opinion which is widely held.

36 Dr. R. Estcourt, critiquing one of my articles in The Annalist from June 12, 1922, writes: “The arrangement wouldn't last for any significant amount of time unless the governments took the necessary steps to balance their budgets first. If they did that, the so-called stabilization would quickly become unnecessary; exchange rates would stabilize on their own at pre-war levels.” This statement clearly expresses an opinion that many people share.

There is a certain force in this mode of reasoning. But in one important respect it is fallacious.

There is a certain strength in this way of thinking. But in one key way, it's misleading.

Even though foreign trade is properly adjusted, and the country’s claims and liabilities on foreign108 account are in equilibrium over the year as a whole, it does not follow that they are in equilibrium every day. Indeed, it is well known that countries which import large quantities of agricultural produce do not find it convenient, if they are to secure just the quality and the amount which they require, to buy at an equal rate throughout the year, but prefer to concentrate their purchases on the autumn period.37 Thus, quite consistently with equilibrium over the year as a whole, industrial countries tend to owe money to agricultural countries in the second half of the year, and to repay in the first half. The satisfaction of these seasonal requirements for credit with the least possible disturbance to trade was recognised109 before the war as an important function of international banking, and the seasonal transference of short-term credits from one centre to another was carried out for a moderate commission.

Even though foreign trade is properly balanced, and the country’s claims and debts related to foreign trade are in balance over the year overall, it doesn’t mean they are balanced every day. In fact, it’s well known that countries that import a large amount of agricultural goods don’t find it practical, if they want to ensure they get the right quality and quantity they need, to buy at a consistent rate throughout the year. Instead, they prefer to concentrate their purchases in the autumn. This creates a situation where, consistent with overall annual balance, industrial countries tend to owe money to agricultural countries in the second half of the year and pay it back in the first half. Meeting these seasonal credit needs with minimal disruption to trade was recognized before the war as a key role of international banking, and the seasonal transfer of short-term credits from one financial center to another was done for a reasonable fee.

37 Whilst the fact of seasonal pressure is well ascertained, the exact analysis of it is a little complicated. Food arrivals into Great Britain, for example, are nearly 10 per cent heavier in the third and fourth quarters of the year than in the first and second, and reach their maximum in the fourth quarter. (These and the following figures are based on averages for the pre-war period 1901–1913 worked out by the Cambridge and London Economic Service). Raw material imports are more than 20 per cent heavier in the fourth and first quarters than in the second and third, and reach their maximum in the three months November to January. Thus the fourth quarter of the year is the period at which there are heavy imports of both food and raw materials. Manufactured exports, on the other hand, are distributed through the year much more evenly, and are about normal during the last quarter. Allowing for the fact that imports are paid for, generally speaking, before they arrive, these dates correspond pretty closely with the date at which seasonal pressure is actually experienced by the dollar-sterling exchange. In France, since the war, imports in the last quarter of the year seem to have been quite 50 per cent heavier than, for example, in the first quarter. In Italy the third quarter seems to be the slackest, and the last quarter, again, a relatively heavy period. When we turn to the statistics for the United States we find the other side of the picture. August and September are the months of heavy wheat export; October to January those of heavy cotton export. The strength of the dollar exchanges in the early autumn is further increased by the financial pressure in the United States during the crop-moving period, which leads to a withdrawal of funds from foreign centres to New York.

37 While it's clear that seasonal pressure exists, analyzing it can be a bit tricky. For instance, food imports into Great Britain are nearly 10 percent higher in the third and fourth quarters of the year compared to the first and second, peaking in the fourth quarter. (These and the following statistics are based on averages from the pre-war period 1901–1913, calculated by the Cambridge and London Economic Service). Raw material imports see more than a 20 percent increase in the fourth and first quarters than in the second and third, reaching their highest levels from November to January. Thus, the fourth quarter is when there's a significant influx of both food and raw materials. In contrast, manufactured exports are spread more evenly throughout the year, with levels remaining stable during the last quarter. Considering that imports are usually paid for before they arrive, these timings closely align with when seasonal pressure is actually felt in the dollar-sterling exchange. In France, since the war, imports in the last quarter appear to be about 50 percent higher than in the first quarter. In Italy, the third quarter seems to be the slowest, while the last quarter is again relatively busy. When we look at statistics from the United States, we see a different trend. August and September are peak months for wheat exports, while October to January are heavy for cotton exports. The strength of the dollar in early autumn is further boosted by financial pressures in the U.S. during the crop-moving period, which leads to funds being pulled from foreign markets to New York.

It was possible for this service to be rendered cheaply because, with the certainty provided by convertibility, the price paid for it did not need to include any appreciable provision against risk. A somewhat higher rate of discount in the temporarily debtor country, together with a small exchange profit provided by the slight shift of the exchanges within the gold points, was quite sufficient.

It was possible for this service to be provided cheaply because, with the assurance of convertibility, the price for it didn't need to account for any significant risk. A slightly higher discount rate in the temporarily borrowing country, along with a small exchange profit from a minor shift in the exchanges within the gold points, was more than enough.

But what is the position now? As always, the balance of payments must balance every day. As before, the balance of trade is spread unevenly through the year. Formerly the daily balance was adjusted by the movement of bankers’ funds, as described above. But now it is no longer a purely bankers’ business, suitably and sufficiently rewarded by an arbitrage profit. If a banker moves credits temporarily from one country to another, he cannot be certain at what rate of exchange he will be able to bring them back again later on. Even though he may have a strong opinion as to the probable course of exchange, his profit is no longer definitely calculable beforehand, as it used to be; he has learnt by experience that unforeseen movements of the exchange may involve him in heavy loss; and his prospective profit must be commensurate with the110 risk he runs. Even if he thinks that the risk is covered actuarially by the prospective profit, a banker cannot afford to run such risks on a large scale. In fact, the seasonal adjustment of credit requirements has ceased to be arbitrage banking business, and demands the services of speculative finance.

But what's the situation now? As always, the balance of payments has to balance every day. Like before, the balance of trade is uneven throughout the year. Previously, daily balances were adjusted by the movement of bankers' funds, as mentioned earlier. But now it’s not just a bankers' issue, rewarded adequately and sufficiently by an arbitrage profit. If a banker temporarily transfers credits from one country to another, he can't be sure at what exchange rate he’ll be able to bring them back later. Even if he has a strong opinion about the likely direction of exchange rates, his profit isn’t something he can calculate with certainty as it once was; he has learned from experience that unexpected movements in exchange rates can lead to significant losses, and his potential profit must match the risk he takes. Even if he thinks the risk is actuarially covered by the expected profit, a banker can’t afford to take these kinds of risks on a large scale. In fact, the seasonal adjustment of credit needs has stopped being a matter of arbitrage banking and now requires speculative finance.

Under present conditions, therefore, a large fluctuation of the exchange may be necessary before the daily account can be balanced, even though the annual account is level. Where in the old days a banker would have readily remitted millions to and from New York, hundreds of thousands are now as much as the biggest institutions will risk. The exchange must fall (or rise, as the case may be) until either the speculative financier feels sufficiently confident of a large profit to step in, or the merchant, appalled by the rate of exchange quoted to him for the transaction, decides to forgo the convenience of purchasing at that particular season of the year, and postpones a part of his purchases.

Under current circumstances, a significant fluctuation in the exchange rate may be needed before the daily accounts can be balanced, even if the annual accounts are stable. In the past, a banker would easily transfer millions to and from New York, but now, hundreds of thousands are what even the largest institutions are willing to risk. The exchange rate must drop (or rise, depending on the situation) until either the speculative investor feels confident enough about making a big profit to get involved, or the merchant, shocked by the rate of exchange offered for the transaction, decides to skip the convenience of buying at that specific time of year and delays part of his purchases.

The services of the professional exchange speculator, being discouraged by official and banking influences, are generally in short supply, so that a heavy price has to be paid for them, and trade is handicapped by a corresponding expense, in so far as it continues to purchase its materials at the most convenient season of the year.

The services of professional exchange speculators are often limited due to pressure from official and banking influences, which makes them quite expensive. This drives up costs for trade, especially as it tends to buy its materials at the most convenient times of the year.

The extent to which the exchange fluctuations which have troubled trade during the past three111 years have been seasonal, and therefore due, not to a continuing or increasing disequilibrium, but merely to the absence of a fixed exchange, is not, I think, fully appreciated.

The degree to which the exchange rate fluctuations that have affected trade over the past three111 years have been seasonal—and therefore not a result of a persistent or growing imbalance, but simply due to the lack of a stable exchange rate—is, I believe, not fully understood.

During 1919 there was a heavy fall of the chief European exchanges due to the termination of the inter-Allied arrangements which had existed during the war. During 1922 there was a rise of the sterling exchange, which was independent of seasonal influences. During 1923 there has been a further non-seasonal collapse of the franc exchange due to certain persisting features of France’s internal finances and external policy. But the following table shows how largely recurrent the fluctuations have been during the four years since the autumn of 1919:—

During 1919, there was a significant drop in the main European stock markets because the inter-Allied agreements that were in place during the war ended. In 1922, the value of the sterling exchange rose, unaffected by seasonal changes. In 1923, there was another seasonal decline in the franc exchange due to ongoing issues with France’s internal finances and foreign policy. However, the following table illustrates how often these fluctuations have occurred over the four years since the fall of 1919:—

Percentage of Dollar Parity

Dollar Parity Percentage

August–July. Sterling. Francs. Lire.
Lowest. Highest. Lowest. Highest. Lowest. Highest.
1919–1920 69 88 31 66 22 56
1920–1921 69 82 30 45 18 29
1921–1922 73 92 37 48 20 28
1922–1923 90 97 29 41 20 27

On the experience of the past three years, francs and lire are at their best in April and May and at their worst between October and December. Sterling is not quite so punctual in its movements, the best point of the year falling somewhere between March and June and the worst between August and November.

On what I’ve seen over the last three years, francs and lire perform best in April and May, while they struggle the most from October to December. Sterling isn’t as consistent, with its peak typically occurring between March and June, and its lowest point from August to November.

112

112

The comparative stability of the highest and lowest quotations respectively in each year, especially in the case of Italy, is very striking, and indicates that a policy of stabilisation at some mean figure might have been practicable; whilst, on the other hand, the wide divergences between the highest and lowest are a measure of the expense and interference that trade has suffered.

The noticeable stability of the highest and lowest prices in each year, particularly in Italy, is quite remarkable and suggests that a policy aimed at stabilizing around a certain average might have been possible. However, the significant differences between the highest and lowest prices reflect the costs and disruptions that trade has endured.

These results correspond so closely to the facts of seasonal trade (see above, p. 108) that we may safely attribute most of the major fluctuations of the exchanges from month to month to the actual pressure of trade remittances, and not to speculation. Speculators, indeed, by anticipating the movements tend to make them occur a little earlier than they would occur otherwise, but by thus spreading the pressure more evenly through the year their influence is to diminish the absolute amount of the fluctuation. General opinion greatly overestimates the influence of exchange-speculators acting under the stimulus of merely political and sentimental considerations. Except for brief periods the influence of the speculator is washed out; and political events can only exert a lasting influence on the exchanges, in so far as they modify the internal price level, the volume of trade, or the ability of a country to borrow on foreign markets. A political event, which does not materially affect any of these facts, cannot exert a lasting effect on the exchanges merely by113 its influence on sentiment. The only important exception to this statement is where there exists on a large scale a long-period speculative investment in a country’s currency on the part of foreigners, as in the case of German marks. But such investments are comparable to borrowing abroad and exercise a different kind of influence altogether from a speculative transaction proper, which is opened with the intention of its being closed again within a short period. And even speculative investment in a currency, since it is bound to diminish sooner or later, cannot permanently prevent the exchanges from reaching the equilibrium justified by conditions of trading and relative price levels.

These results align so closely with the realities of seasonal trade (see above, p. 108) that we can confidently attribute most of the significant fluctuations in exchanges from month to month to the actual pressure of trade remittances, rather than to speculation. Speculators, by anticipating these movements, tend to cause them to happen a bit earlier than they would otherwise, but by spreading the pressure more evenly throughout the year, their influence actually reduces the total amount of fluctuation. Public perception significantly overestimates the impact of exchange speculators acting based on purely political and sentimental factors. Except for short periods, the speculator's influence tends to fade away; political events can only have a lasting impact on exchanges as long as they alter the internal price level, the volume of trade, or a country's ability to borrow on foreign markets. A political event that does not significantly change any of these factors cannot have a lasting effect on the exchanges simply due to its influence on sentiment. The only notable exception to this is when there is a substantial long-term speculative investment in a country's currency by foreign investors, as seen with German marks. However, such investments resemble borrowing from abroad and have a different kind of effect compared to a proper speculative transaction, which is intended to be closed within a short timeframe. Even speculative investment in a currency, since it is bound to decrease eventually, cannot permanently stop exchanges from reaching the equilibrium warranted by trading conditions and relative price levels.

It follows that, whilst purely seasonal fluctuations do not interfere with the forces which determine the ultimate equilibrium of the exchanges, nevertheless stability of the exchange from day to day cannot be maintained merely by the fact of stability in these underlying conditions. It is necessary also that bankers should have a sufficiently certain expectation of such stability to induce them to look after the daily and seasonal fluctuations of the market in return for a moderate commission.

It follows that, while seasonal fluctuations don’t impact the forces that determine the final balance of exchanges, the stability of daily exchange rates can’t be upheld just by the stability of these underlying conditions. Bankers also need to have a reasonably certain expectation of that stability to motivate them to manage the daily and seasonal market fluctuations in exchange for a reasonable fee.

After recent experience it is unlikely that they will actually entertain any such expectation, even if the underlying facts were of a kind to justify it, with sufficient conviction to act, unless it is backed up by a guarantee on the part of the Central Authority114 (Bank or Government) to employ all their resources for the maintenance of the level of exchange at a stated figure. At present the declared official policy is to bring the franc and the lira (for example) back to par, so that operations favouring a fall of these currencies are not free from danger. On the other hand no steps are taken to make this policy effective, and the conditions of internal finance in France and Italy indicate that their exchanges may go much worse. Thus, since no one can have complete confidence whether they are to be a great deal better or very much worse, there must be a wide fluctuation before financiers will come in, purely from motives of self-interest, to balance the day-to-day fluctuations and the month-to-month fluctuations round about the unpredictable point of equilibrium.

After recent experience, it’s unlikely they will actually have any such expectation, even if the underlying facts could justify it with enough conviction to act, unless it is supported by a guarantee from the Central Authority114 (Bank or Government) to use all their resources to maintain the exchange rate at a specific figure. Currently, the official policy states that the franc and the lira (for example) should be brought back to par, so actions that encourage a drop in these currencies carry some risk. On the flip side, no measures are being taken to make this policy effective, and the internal financial conditions in France and Italy suggest their exchanges could get much worse. Therefore, since no one can be completely confident whether things will improve significantly or deteriorate, there will be wide fluctuations before financiers step in, purely out of self-interest, to stabilize the daily and monthly changes around an unpredictable point of equilibrium.

If, therefore, the exchanges are not stabilised by policy, they will never come to an equilibrium of themselves. As time goes on and experience accumulates, the oscillations may be smaller than at present. Speculators may come in a little sooner, and importers may make greater efforts to spread their requirements more evenly over the year. But even so, there must be a substantial difference of rates between the busy season and the slack season, until the business world knows for certain at what level the exchanges in question are going to settle down. Thus a seasonal fluctuation of the exchanges (including the sterling-dollar exchange) is inevitable,115 even in the absence of any decided long-period tendency of an exchange to rise or to fall, unless the Central Authority, by a guarantee of convertibility or otherwise, takes special steps to provide against it.

If the exchanges aren't stabilized by policy, they won't reach an equilibrium on their own. As time passes and more experience is gained, the fluctuations might be smaller than they are now. Speculators may act a bit sooner, and importers might try harder to spread their needs more evenly throughout the year. Still, there will always be a significant difference in rates between busy and slow seasons until the business world is certain about where the exchanges will settle. Thus, a seasonal fluctuation of the exchanges (including the sterling-dollar exchange) is unavoidable, even without a clear long-term trend of an exchange rising or falling, unless the Central Authority takes specific measures, like guaranteeing convertibility, to address it.115

IV. The Forward Market in Exchanges.

When a merchant buys or sells goods in a foreign currency the transaction is not always for immediate settlement by cash or negotiable bill. During the interval before he can cover himself by buying or selling (as the case may be) the foreign currency involved, he runs an exchange risk, losses or gains on which may often, in these days, swamp his trading profit. He is thus involuntarily engaged in a heavy risk of a kind which it is hardly in his province to undertake. The subject of what follows is a piece of financial machinery—namely, the market in “forward” exchanges as distinguished from “spot” exchanges—for enabling the merchant to avoid this risk, not, indeed, during the interval when he is negotiating the contract, but as soon as the negotiation is completed.

When a merchant buys or sells goods in a foreign currency, the transaction isn’t always settled immediately with cash or a negotiable bill. During the time he waits to protect himself by buying or selling the foreign currency involved, he takes on exchange risk, which can often wipe out his trading profit. He is thus unintentionally dealing with a significant risk that he shouldn’t really have to face. The following discussion will cover a financial tool—specifically, the market for “forward” exchanges as opposed to “spot” exchanges—that helps the merchant avoid this risk, not during the negotiation of the contract, but as soon as the negotiation is finished.

Transactions in “spot” exchange are for cash—that is to say, cash in one currency is exchanged for cash in another currency. But merchants who have bought goods in terms of foreign currency for future delivery may not have the cash available pending delivery of the goods; whilst merchants116 who have sold goods in terms of foreign currency, but are not yet in a position to sell a draft on the buyer, cannot, even if they have plenty of cash in their own currency, protect themselves by a “spot” sale of the exchange involved, save in the exceptional case when they have cash available in the foreign currency also.

Transactions in “spot” exchange involve cash—that is, cash in one currency is exchanged for cash in another currency. However, merchants who have purchased goods in foreign currency for future delivery might not have the cash available until the goods are delivered. Meanwhile, merchants who have sold goods in foreign currency but aren’t yet able to sell a draft to the buyer cannot protect themselves with a “spot” sale of the exchange, even if they have plenty of cash in their own currency, unless they also have cash available in the foreign currency.

A “forward” contract is for the conclusion of a “spot” transaction in exchanges at a later date, fixed on the basis of the spot rate prevailing at the original date. Pending the date of the maturity of the forward contract no cash need pass (although, of course, the contracting party may be required to give some security or other evidence for his ability to complete the contract in due course), so that the merchant entering into a forward contract is not required to find cash any sooner than if he ran the risk on the exchange until the goods were delivered; yet he is protected from the consequences of any fluctuation in the exchanges in the meantime.

A “forward” contract is an agreement to finalize a “spot” transaction on an exchange at a later date, based on the spot rate that is in effect at the original date. Until the maturity date of the forward contract, no cash is needed (although the contracting party may need to provide some form of security or assurance that they can fulfill the contract when the time comes). This means that the merchant entering into a forward contract doesn’t have to come up with cash any sooner than if they were taking the risk on the exchange until the goods are delivered; however, they are shielded from any fluctuations in exchange rates during that time.

The tables given below show that in London, in the case of the exchanges which have a big market (the dollar, the franc, and the lira), competition between dealers has brought down the charges for these facilities to a fairly moderate rate. During 1920 and 1921 the cost to an English buyer of foreign currency for forward delivery was a little more expensive than for spot delivery in the case of francs, lire, and marks, and a little cheaper in the case of117 dollars. Correspondingly, French, Italian, and German merchants were generally in a position to buy both sterling and dollars for forward delivery at a slightly cheaper rate than for spot delivery—that is to say, if they dealt in London. As regards the rates charged in foreign centres my information is not extensive, but it indicates that in Milan, for example, very much less favourable terms for these transactions are frequently charged to the seller of forward sterling than those ruling in London. During 1922, however, the effect of the progressive cheapening of money in London was, for reasons to be explained in a moment, to cheapen the cost to English buyers of foreign currency for forward delivery, forward francs falling to an appreciable discount on spot francs, and forward dollars becoming at the end of the year decidedly cheaper than spot dollars. Later on, the raising of the bank-rate in June 1923 acted again, as could have been predicted, in the opposite direction.

The tables below show that in London, for major currencies like the dollar, franc, and lira, competition among dealers has reduced the fees for these services to a reasonable level. In 1920 and 1921, the cost for an English buyer to obtain foreign currency for forward delivery was slightly higher than for spot delivery in the case of francs, lire, and marks, but a bit cheaper for dollars. Similarly, French, Italian, and German merchants could generally buy both sterling and dollars for forward delivery at a slightly lower rate compared to spot delivery, provided they were trading in London. As for the rates in foreign centers, my information is limited, but it suggests that in Milan, for instance, sellers of forward sterling often face much less favorable terms than those in London. However, in 1922, the gradual decrease in the cost of money in London led to a reduction in the expense for English buyers of foreign currency for forward delivery. By the end of the year, forward francs were significantly cheaper than spot francs, and forward dollars also became noticeably cheaper than spot dollars. Later, the increase in the bank rate in June 1923 had the predictable effect of reversing this trend.

Proceeding to details, we see below (pp. 118, 119) the quotations for forward exchange ruling in the London market since the beginning of 1920. During 1920–21 forward dollars were generally cheaper than spot dollars to a London buyer to the extent of from 1 to 1½ per cent per annum. Occasionally, however, when big movements of the exchange were taking place, the discount on forward dollars was temporarily much higher, having risen, for example, in November 1920, when sterling was at its lowest point, to nearly 6 per cent—for reasons which I will endeavour to elucidate later. During the first half of 1922 the discount on forward dollars dwindled, but rose again during the latter half of the year, reacting again in the middle of 1923 after money rates in London had been slightly raised. Thus a London merchant, who has had dollar commitments for the purchase of goods, has not only been able to cover his exchange risk by means of a forward transaction, but on the average he has got his exchange a little cheaper by providing for it in advance.

Proceeding to details, we see below (pp. 118, 119) the quotes for forward exchange rates in the London market since the beginning of 1920. During 1920–21, forward dollars were generally cheaper than spot dollars for a London buyer, by about 1 to 1.5 percent per year. However, during significant fluctuations in the exchange rate, the discount on forward dollars temporarily increased, peaking in November 1920, when sterling was at its lowest, to almost 6 percent—reasons I will explain later. In the first half of 1922, the discount on forward dollars decreased, but it rose again in the latter half of the year and reacted once more in mid-1923 after money rates in London had been slightly increased. Thus, a London merchant with dollar commitments for purchasing goods has not only been able to hedge against his exchange risk through a forward transaction but has generally secured his exchange at a lower rate by planning ahead.

118

118

Table of Exchange Quotations in
London One Month Forward
38

Table of Exchange Rates in
London One Month Ahead
38

NEW YORK.
Date. Spot. One Month
Forward.
Difference
per cent
per annum.
1920
January 3·79 +  ⅜ cent +1·2  
February 3·48⅞ +  ¼    „ +  ·9  
March 3·41⅜ +  ¼    „ +  ·9  
April 3·90¾ +  ⅜    „ +1·2  
May 3·82⅞ +  ½    „ +1·6  
June 3·89-15/16 +  ⅜    „ +1·2  
July 3·96⅛ +  ⅝    „ +1·9  
August 3·67 +  ½    „ +1·6  
September 3·56⅞ +  ½    „ +1·7  
October 3·48-5/16 +  ½    „ +1·7  
November 3·44⅜ +1⅝    „ +5·7  
December 3·49 +  ½    „ +1·7  
1921
January 3·58⅜ +  ⅜    „ +1·3  
February 3·84¾ +1       „ +3·1  
March 3·88⅜ +  ⅞    „ +2·7  
April 3·92 +  ⅜    „ +1·1  
May 3·98 +  ½    „ +1·5  
June 3·90⅝ +  ¾    „ +2·3  
July 3·71-15/16 +  ⅝    „ +2·0  
August 3·56⅜ +  ½    „ +1·7  
September 3·71⅝ +  ⅜    „ +1·2  
October 3·76⅛ +  ½    „ +1·6  
November 3·92-1/16 +  ⅞    „ +2·7  
December 4·08-5/16 +  ⅜    „ +1·1  
1922
January 4·20½ +  ⅛    „ +  ·4  
February 4·30½ par ...
March 4·42   „ ...
April 4·39   „ ...
May 4·44½   „ ...
June 4·46¾ +  3/16 cent +  ·5  
July 4·44¾ +  1/16    „ +  .17
August 4·45¼ +  3/16    „ +  .5  
September 4·46 +  ⅜     „ +1    
October 4·42 +  ¼     „ +  .68
November 4·46½ +  ⅝     „ +1·68
December 4·51¾ +1        „ +2·65
1923
January 4·64¾ +1¼     „ +3·23
February 4·67 +  ⅞     „ +2·25
March 4·70⅝ +1        „ +2·55
April 4·66⅞ +  ¾     „ +1·93
May 4·62½ +  15/16   „ +2·43
June 4·62¾ +  ⅞     „ +2·27
July 4·56½ +  ½     „ +1·31
August 4·57 +  ¼     „ +0·66
PARIS.
Date. Spot. One Month
Forward.
Difference
per cent
per annum.
1920
January 40·90   +  6 centime +1·7  
February 46·90   +  4      „ +1·0  
March 48·55   +  3      „ +  ·7  
April 57·80   +  3      „ +  ·6  
May 64·04   +  1      „ +  ·18
June 50·45   -   5      „ - 1·2  
July 47·05   - 10      „ - 2·8  
August 49·00   - 10      „ - 2·4  
September 51·22½ -   5      „ - 1·2  
October 52·10   - 10      „ - 2·3  
November 54·45   - 15      „ - 3·3  
December 57·45   - 15      „ - 3·2  
1921
January 61·07½ - 30      „ - 5·9  
February 54·50   - 20      „ - 4·4  
March 54·40   - 27      „ - 5·9  
April 55-37½ - 15      „ - 3·3  
May 50·22½ - 12      „ - 2·9  
June 46·35   - 10      „ - 2·6  
July 46·72½ - 10      „ - 2·6  
August 46·77½ +  2      „ +  ·5  
September 48·68½ +  3      „ +  ·7  
October 52·27½ +  1      „ +  ·2  
November 53·44   +  4      „ +  ·9  
December 54·24   +  2      „ +  ·4  
1922
January 52·32½ par ...
February 51·62½ ...
March 48·45   ...
April 48·15   -   1 centime -   .25
May 48·47   +  1      „ +  .25
June 49·00   +  2      „ +  ·49
July 56·20   +  8      „ +1·8  
August 54·10   +10      „ +2·21
September 57·40   +  3      „ +  ·63
October 58·25   +  3      „ +  ·62
November 64·65   +14      „ +2·59
December 64·30   +  8      „ +1·49
1923
January 66·40   +  5      „ +  ·9  
February 75·50   +16      „ +2·54
March 77·50   +11      „ +1·70
April 70·40   +  5      „ +  .85
May 69·35   +  5      „ +  ·86
June 71·60   +  5      „ +  ·84
July 78·35   +  4      „ +  ·61
August 79·20   +  9      „ +  ·60

First day of month in 1920, first Wednesday
in 1921, and first Friday thereafter.

First day of the month in 1920, first Wednesday in 1921, and first Friday after that.

119

119

Table of Exchange Quotations in
London One Month Forward

Exchange Rates Table in
London for Next Month

ITALY.
Date. Spot. One Month
Forward.
Difference
per cent
per annum.
192038
January   50 -  ⅛ lire - 3·0  
February   55 -  ⅛   „ - 2·7  
March   62¾ -  ¼   „ - 4·7  
April   80½ -  ¼   „ - 3·7  
May   83 -  ½   „ - 7·1  
June   66⅜ -  ½   „ - 9·1  
July   65⅜ -  ½   „ - 9·2  
August   70 -  ½   „ - 8·5  
September   76¼ -  ½   „ - 7·9  
October   83-9/16 -  ½   „ - 7·2  
November   93-11/16 -  ½   „ - 6·4  
December   94-11/16 -  ½   „ - 6·3  
1921
January 104⅜   par ...
February 105½ -  ¾ lire - 8·5  
March 106½ -  ⅝   „ - 7·0  
April   92¼ -  ½   „ - 6·5  
May   81⅜ -  ⅝   „ - 9·1  
June   73-11/16 -  ½   „ - 8·1  
July   77 -  ½   „ - 7·8  
August   85-1/16 -  ¼   „ - 3·5  
September   85-9/16 -  ⅜   „ - 5·2  
October   94⅛ -  ⅜   „ - 4·8  
November   96⅝ -  ¼   „ - 3·1  
December   93-15/16 -  ½   „ - 6·4  
1922
January   97⅛ -  ¼   „ - 3·0  
February   92½ -  7/16  „ - 5·7  
March   83-3/16 -  ¼   „ - 3·6  
April   83-5/16 -15 pts. - 2·16
May   83 -10   „ - 1·45
June   85⅞ -  3   „ -   ·41
July 100   par ...
August   96   par ...
September 101 -11   „ - 1·31
October 103 -10   „ - 1·16
November 106 -  8   „ -   ·91
December   93¾ -20   „ - 2·56
1923
January   92   -11   „ - 1·43
February   97½ -23   „ - 2·83
March   97⅜ -23   „ - 2·82
April   93¾ -18   „ - 2·30
June   99   -15   „ - 1·82
July 106⅞ -22   „ - 2·47
August 105½ -28   „ - 3·18
GERMANY.
Date. Spot. One Month
Forward.
Difference
per cent
per annum.
192038
January 187    marks
February 305   
March 337   
April 275   
May 218½ -  1      „ -     5·5  
June 150½ -  1      „ -     8·0  
July 150    -    ½   „ -     4·0  
August 160½ -  1      „ -     7·5  
September 176    -    ½   „ -     3·4  
October 215    -  1      „ -     5·6  
November 266½ -    ½   „ -     2·2  
December 241½ -  1      „ -     4·9  
1921
January 269½ -  2      „ -     8·9  
February 243½ -  1      „ -     4·9  
March   24½ -  1      „ -     4·9  
April 239½ -  2      „ -   10·0  
May 262½ -  1¾   „ -     8·0  
June 245¼ -  1½   „ -     7·3  
July 279½ -  1½   „ -     6·45
August 286    -  1      „ -     4·2  
September 347½ -  1½   „ -     5·1  
October 471    -  5      „ -   12·7  
November 764½ -  2¼   „ -     3·5  
December 855    -  1½   „ -     2·1  
1922
January 777½ -  3½   „ -     5·4  
February 872    -  2½   „ -     3·4  
March 1117    -  1½   „ -     1·6  
April 1440    -  8      „ -     6·6  
May 1270    -    ½   „ -       ·47
June 1222    par ...
July 2320    +  5   marks +    2·59
August 3175    +20     „ +    7·56
September 5700    nominal ...
October 9900    +          450 mks +  54·54
November 26,250    +       6,000    „ +274·3  
December 35,000    +       5,500    „ +188·58
1923
January 39,500    +       1,750    „ +  53·16
February 190,000    +     27,000    „ +170·53
March 105,000    +     10,000    „ +114·28
April 97,500    +     20,000    „ +141·18
June 350,000    +     40,000    „ +137·14
July 900,000    +     30,00038 +  40·00
August 5,500,000    +1,500,00038 +327·27

38 Nominal.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Okay.

120

120

Forward purchases of francs, after being dearer than spot transactions by 2½ per cent per annum or more from the middle of 1920 to the middle of 1921, were nearly level in price from the middle of 1921 to the middle of 1922, whilst since that time they have been ½ to 2½ per cent per annum cheaper. In the case of lire there have been much wider gaps, forward purchases being frequently 3 per cent or more dearer than spot. In the case of German marks, the forward rate, after ranging round about 5 per cent per annum dearer than spot, has reached, since the autumn of 1922 and the complete collapse of the mark, a figure fantastically cheaper, thus reflecting the sensational rate of interest for short loans current inside Germany.

Forward purchases of francs, after being more expensive than spot transactions by 2.5% per year or more from the middle of 1920 to the middle of 1921, were almost equal in price from the middle of 1921 to the middle of 1922. Since then, they have been 0.5% to 2.5% per year cheaper. For lire, there have been much larger differences, with forward purchases often being 3% or more higher than spot. As for German marks, the forward rate, after averaging about 5% per year higher than spot, has reached, since the fall of 1922 and the complete collapse of the mark, an incredibly lower figure, reflecting the extreme interest rate for short loans currently in Germany.

But in all these cases (except in Germany since the complete collapse of the mark), whether forward121 exchange is at a discount or at a premium on spot, the expense, if any, of dealing forward has been small in relation to the risks that are avoided.

But in all these cases (except in Germany since the complete collapse of the mark), whether forward121 exchange is at a discount or at a premium compared to the spot rate, the cost, if any, of dealing forward has been minimal in relation to the risks that are avoided.

Nevertheless, in practice merchants do not avail themselves of these facilities to the extent that might have been expected. The nature of forward dealings in exchange is not generally understood. The rates are seldom quoted in the newspapers. There are few financial topics of equal importance which have received so little discussion or publicity. The present situation did not exist before the war (although even at that time forward rates for the dollar were regularly quoted), and did not begin until after the “unpegging” of the leading exchanges in 1919, so that the business world has only begun to adapt itself. Moreover, for the ordinary man, dealing in forward exchange has, it seems, a smack of speculation about it. Unlike Manchester cotton spinners, who have learnt by long experience that it is not the hedging of open cotton commitments on the Liverpool futures market, but the failure to do so, which is speculative, merchants, who buy or sell goods of which the price is expressed in a foreign currency, do not yet regard it as part of the normal routine of prudent business to hedge these indirect exchange commitments by a transaction in forward exchange.

However, in reality, merchants don’t use these options as much as you might expect. The concept of forward dealings in exchange isn’t widely understood. The rates are rarely shown in newspapers. There are few financial topics that are as important but have received so little discussion or publicity. This situation didn’t exist before the war (even then, forward rates for the dollar were regularly quoted), and it only started after the “unpegging” of the main exchanges in 1919, so the business world is just beginning to adjust. Additionally, for the average person, dealing in forward exchange seems a bit speculative. Unlike Manchester cotton spinners, who have learned through experience that not hedging open cotton commitments on the Liverpool futures market is the real speculation, merchants buying or selling goods priced in foreign currency don’t yet see it as part of standard prudent business practice to hedge these indirect exchange commitments with a forward exchange transaction.

It is important, on the other hand, not to exaggerate the extent to which, at the present time, merchants122 can by this means protect themselves from risk. In the first place, for reasons, some of which will be considered below, it is only in certain of the leading exchanges that these transactions can be carried out at a reasonable charge. It is not clear that even the banks themselves have yet learnt to look on the provision for their clients of such facilities at fair and reasonable rates as one of the most useful services they can offer. They have been too much influenced, perhaps, by the fear that these facilities might tend at the same time to increase speculation.

It’s crucial, however, not to overstate how much merchants122 can protect themselves from risk right now. First of all, for various reasons that will be discussed below, these transactions can only be conducted at a reasonable cost in certain major exchanges. It's not even clear that banks have fully recognized that providing their clients with such services at fair and reasonable rates is one of the most valuable services they can offer. They may have been too swayed by the fear that these services could also increase speculation.

But there is a further qualification, not to be overlooked, to the value of forward transactions as a protection against risk. The price of a particular commodity, in terms of a particular currency, does not exactly respond to changes in the value of that currency on the exchange markets of the world, with the result that a movement in a country’s exchanges may, in the case of a commodity of which that country is a large seller or a large purchaser, change the commodity’s world-value expressed in terms of gold. In that case a merchant, even though he is hedged in respect of the exchange itself, may lose, in respect of his unsold trading stocks, through a movement in the world-value of the commodity he is dealing in, directly occasioned by the exchange fluctuation.

But there’s another important point to consider regarding the value of forward transactions as a safeguard against risk. The price of a certain commodity, in a specific currency, doesn’t perfectly react to changes in that currency's value in global exchange markets. As a result, fluctuations in a country’s exchanges can affect the world value of a commodity, especially if that country is a major seller or buyer of it, changing the commodity's value when measured in gold. In this case, a merchant, even if they’re protected against exchange rate changes, might still lose on their unsold stock due to a change in the world value of the commodity they’re trading in, caused directly by those exchange fluctuations.

* * * * *

If we turn to the theoretical analysis of the123 forward market, what is it that determines the amount and the sign (whether plus or minus) of the divergence between the spot and forward rates as recorded above?

If we look at the theoretical analysis of the123 forward market, what factors determine the amount and the direction (either positive or negative) of the difference between the spot and forward rates mentioned above?

If dollars one month forward are quoted cheaper than spot dollars to a London buyer in terms of sterling, this indicates a preference by the market, on balance, in favour of holding funds in New York during the month in question rather than in London,—a preference the degree of which is measured by the discount on forward dollars. For if spot dollars are worth $4.40 to the pound and dollars one month forward $4.40½ to the pound, then the owner of $4.40 can, by selling the dollars spot and buying them back one month forward, find himself at the end of the month with $4.40½, merely by being during the month the owner of £1 in London instead of $4.40 in New York. That he should require and can obtain half a cent, which, earned in one month, is equal to about 1½ per cent per annum, to induce him to do the transaction, shows, and is, under conditions of competition, a measure of, the market’s preference for holding funds during the month in question in New York rather than in London.

If dollars one month forward are priced lower than spot dollars for a London buyer in terms of sterling, it shows that the market, overall, prefers to keep funds in New York during that month instead of London. The extent of this preference is reflected in the discount on forward dollars. For instance, if spot dollars are worth $4.40 per pound and dollars one month forward are $4.40½ per pound, then an owner of $4.40 can sell the dollars at the spot rate and buy them back at the forward rate to end up with $4.40½ at the end of the month, simply by having £1 in London instead of $4.40 in New York for that month. The fact that he needs a half cent, which earns about 1½ percent annually in one month, to motivate him to make that transaction illustrates the market’s preference for holding funds in New York during that month rather than in London, particularly under competitive conditions.

Conversely, if francs, lire, and marks one month forward are quoted dearer than the spot rates to a London buyer, this indicates a preference for holding funds in London rather than in Paris, Rome, or Berlin.

Conversely, if francs, lire, and marks are priced higher one month ahead than the spot rates for a buyer in London, it shows a preference for keeping funds in London instead of Paris, Rome, or Berlin.

124

124

The difference between the spot and forward rates is, therefore, precisely and exactly the measure of the preference of the money and exchange market for holding funds in one international centre rather than in another, the exchange risk apart, that is to say under conditions in which the exchange risk is covered. What is it that determines these preferences?

The difference between the spot and forward rates is, therefore, the exact measure of the preference of the money and exchange market for keeping funds in one international center over another, excluding exchange risk, meaning under conditions where the exchange risk is managed. What factors determine these preferences?

1. The most fundamental cause is to be found in the interest rates obtainable on “short” money—that is to say, on money lent or deposited for short periods of time in the money markets of the two centres under comparison. If by lending dollars in New York for one month the lender could earn interest at the rate of 5½ per cent per annum, whereas by lending sterling in London for one month he could only earn interest at the rate of 4 per cent, then the preference observed above for holding funds in New York rather than in London is wholly explained. That is to say, forward quotations for the purchase of the currency of the dearer money market tend to be cheaper than spot quotations by a percentage per month equal to the excess of the interest which can be earned in a month in the dearer market over what can be earned in the cheaper. It must be noticed that the governing factor is the rate of interest obtainable for short periods, so that a country where, owing to the absence or ill-development of an organised money market, it is difficult to lend125 money satisfactorily at call or for very short periods, may, for the purposes of this calculation, reckon as a low interest-earning market, even though the prevailing rate of interest for longer periods is not low at all. This consideration generally tends to make London and New York more attractive markets for short money than any Continental centres.

1. The main reason can be found in the interest rates available on "short" money—that is, money lent or deposited for short periods in the money markets of the two cities being compared. If lending dollars in New York for one month yields an interest rate of 5.5% per year, while lending pounds in London for one month only offers 4%, then the preference for holding funds in New York instead of London is completely clarified. This means that forward quotes for buying currency from the more expensive money market are usually cheaper than spot quotes by a percentage per month equal to the difference in the interest earned in the more expensive market versus the cheaper one. It’s important to note that the key factor is the interest rate available for short periods, so a country where, due to a lack or poor development of a structured money market, it’s difficult to lend money effectively on call or for very short durations, may be considered a low-interest market for these purposes, even if the longer-term interest rates are not low at all. This consideration generally makes London and New York more appealing markets for short money than any continental centers.

The effect of the cheap money rates ruling in London from the middle of 1922 to the middle of 1923 in diminishing the attractiveness of London as a depository of funds is strikingly shown, in the above tables, by the cheapening of the forward quotations of foreign currencies relatively to the spot quotations. In the case of the dollar the forward quotation had risen by the beginning of 1923 to a rate 3 per cent per annum above the spot quotation (i.e. forward dollars were 3 per cent per annum cheaper than spot dollars in terms of sterling), which meant (subject to modification by the other influences to be mentioned below) that the effective rate for short loans approached 3 per cent higher in New York than in London.

The impact of the low interest rates in London from mid-1922 to mid-1923 in reducing the appeal of London as a place to hold funds is clearly illustrated in the tables above, as evidenced by the decline in forward exchange rates of foreign currencies compared to the spot rates. By early 1923, the forward rate for the dollar had increased to a level that was 3 percent per year higher than the spot rate (i.e., forward dollars were 3 percent per year cheaper than spot dollars in terms of sterling). This indicated, subject to adjustments from other factors to be discussed later, that the effective rate for short-term loans was about 3 percent higher in New York than in London.

In the case of francs forward quotations which had been below spot, so long as money was dear in London, rose above the spot quotations, thus indicating that the relative dearness of money in London as compared with Paris had disappeared; whilst in the case of lire forward quotations, although still below spot quotations, rose, under the same influence, nearer to the spot level. Nevertheless, in the case of126 both these currencies, a preponderance of bearish anticipations about their future prospects probably also played a part, for the reasons given in detail below, in producing the observed result.

In the case of forward quotes for francs that were below the spot rate, as long as money was expensive in London, they rose above the spot quotes, showing that the relative high cost of money in London compared to Paris had gone away. Meanwhile, for lire forward quotes, even though they were still below the spot rates, they also moved closer to the spot level under the same circumstances. However, for both of these currencies, a stronger expectation of negative outcomes regarding their future likely contributed to the observed result, for the reasons explained in detail below.

The most interesting figures, however, are those relating to marks, which illustrate vividly what I have mentioned on page 23 above concerning the enormous money rates of interest current in Germany subsequent to the collapse of October 1922, as a result of the effort of the real rate of interest to remain positive in face of a general anticipation of a catastrophic collapse of the monetary unit. It will be noticed that the effective short money rate of interest in terms of marks ranged from 50 per cent per annum upwards, until finally the quotations were merely nominal.

The most interesting figures, though, are those related to marks, which clearly illustrate what I mentioned on page 23 about the incredibly high interest rates in Germany after the collapse in October 1922. This was due to the attempt to keep the real interest rate positive even when everyone expected a total collapse of the currency. It’s worth noting that the effective short-term interest rate in marks was over 50 percent per year, eventually leading to rates that were basically just numbers.

2. If questions of credit did not enter in, the factor of the rate of interest on short loans would be the dominating one. Indeed, as between London and New York, it probably is so under existing conditions. Between London and Paris it is still important. But elsewhere the various uncertainties of financial and political risk, which the war has left behind, introduce a further element which sometimes quite transcends the factor of relative interest. The possibility of financial trouble or political disturbance, and the quite appreciable probability of a moratorium in the event of any difficulties arising, or of the sudden introduction of127 exchange regulations which would interfere with the movement of balances out of the country, and even sometimes the contingency of a drastic demonetisation,—all these factors deter bankers, even when the exchange risk proper is eliminated, from maintaining large floating balances at certain foreign centres. Such risks prevent the business from being based, as it should be, on a mathematical calculation of interest rates; they obliterate by their possible magnitude the small “turns” which can be earned out of differences between interest rates plus a normal banker’s commission; and, being incalculable, they may even deter conservative bankers from doing the business on a substantial scale at any reasonable rate at all. In the case of Roumania or Poland, for example, this factor is, at times, the dominating one.

2. If credit issues weren't a factor, the interest rate on short loans would take precedence. Actually, it probably does between London and New York under current conditions. It's still significant between London and Paris. However, in other places, the various uncertainties of financial and political risks that the war has left behind introduce an additional element that sometimes overshadows the interest factor. The potential for financial issues or political unrest, along with a noticeable chance of a moratorium if difficulties arise, or the sudden implementation of exchange regulations that could disrupt the movement of funds out of the country, and even the possibility of severe demonetization—all these factors make banks hesitant, even when exchange risk is ruled out, to keep large floating balances at certain foreign centers. Such risks prevent business from relying solely on a mathematical calculation of interest rates; they overshadow the small "gains" that can be derived from differences between interest rates plus a standard bank commission; and, being unpredictable, they may even dissuade cautious bankers from engaging in business on a significant scale at any reasonable rate. In situations involving Roumania or Poland, for instance, this factor can sometimes be the most influential.

3. There is a third factor of some significance. We have assumed so far that the forward rate is fixed at such a level that the dealer or banker can cover himself by a simultaneous spot transaction and be left with a reasonable profit for his trouble. But it is not necessary to cover every forward transaction by a corresponding spot transaction; it may be possible to “marry” a forward sale with a forward purchase of the same currency. For example, whilst some of the market’s clients may wish to sell forward dollars, other clients will wish to buy forward dollars. In this case the market can set off these, one against128 the other, in its books, and there will be no need of any movement of cash funds in either direction. The third factor depends, therefore, on whether it is the sellers or the buyers of forward dollars who predominate. To fix our minds, let us suppose that money-market conditions exist in which a sale of forward dollars against the purchase of spot dollars, at a discount of 1½ per cent per annum for the former, yields neither profit nor loss. Now if in these conditions the purchasers of forward dollars, other than arbitragers, exceed sellers of forward dollars, then this excess of demand for forward dollars can be met by arbitragers, who have cash resources in London, at a discount which falls short of 1½ per cent per annum by such amount (say ½ per cent) as will yield the arbitragers sufficient profit for their trouble. If, however, sellers of forward dollars exceed the purchasers, then a sufficient discount has to be accepted by the former to induce arbitrage the other way round—that is to say, by arbitragers who have cash resources in New York—namely, a discount which exceeds 1½ per cent per annum by, say, ½ per cent. Thus the discount on forward dollars will fluctuate between 1 and 2 per cent per annum according as buyers or sellers predominate.

3. There’s a third factor that’s quite important. So far, we’ve assumed that the forward rate is set at a level where the dealer or banker can secure themselves with a simultaneous spot transaction and still make a reasonable profit for their efforts. However, it’s not necessary to cover every forward transaction with a corresponding spot transaction; it might be possible to “marry” a forward sale with a forward purchase of the same currency. For example, while some clients in the market may want to sell forward dollars, others will want to buy them. In this scenario, the market can offset these transactions against each other in its records, meaning there won’t be any cash movement in either direction. Therefore, the third factor depends on whether there are more sellers or buyers of forward dollars. To clarify, let’s assume we’re in money-market conditions where selling forward dollars against buying spot dollars, at a discount of 1½ percent per annum for the former, results in neither profit nor loss. Now, if under these conditions the buyers of forward dollars, apart from arbitrageurs, outnumber the sellers, this excess demand can be fulfilled by arbitrageurs with cash resources in London, at a discount that’s lower than 1½ percent per annum by a certain margin (say ½ percent), which will give the arbitrageurs a sufficient profit for their efforts. On the other hand, if sellers of forward dollars outnumber buyers, the sellers will need to offer a larger discount to attract arbitrage in the opposite direction—that is, from arbitrageurs with cash resources in New York—at a discount that exceeds 1½ percent per annum by, for example, ½ percent. Thus, the discount on forward dollars will fluctuate between 1 and 2 percent per annum, depending on whether buyers or sellers are in the majority.

4. Lastly, we have to provide for the case, quite frequent in practice, where our assumption of a large and free market breaks down. A business in forward exchange can only be transacted by banks or similar129 institutions. If the bulk of the business in a particular exchange is in a few hands, or if there is a tacit agreement between the principal institutions concerned to maintain differences which will allow more than a competitive profit, then the surcharge representing the profit of a bank for arbitraging between spot and forward transactions may much exceed the moderate figure indicated above. The quotations of the rates charged in Milan for forward dealings in lire, when compared with the rates current in London at the same date, indicate that a bank which is free to operate in both markets can frequently make an abnormal profit.

4. Lastly, we need to consider the common situation where our assumption of a large and open market fails. A business in forward exchange can only be carried out by banks or similar129 institutions. If most of the business in a specific exchange is controlled by a few players, or if there’s an unspoken agreement among the main institutions involved to keep differences that allow for more than just competitive profit, then the extra charge that represents a bank's profit from arbitraging between spot and forward transactions can be much higher than the moderate amount mentioned earlier. The rates charged for forward dealings in lire in Milan, compared to the rates in London on the same date, show that a bank that operates freely in both markets can often make an unusually high profit.

But there is a further contingency of considerable importance which occurs when speculation is exceptionally active and is all one way. It must be remembered that the floating capital normally available, and ready to move from centre to centre for the purpose of taking advantage of moderate arbitrage profits between spot and forward exchange, is by no means unlimited in amount, and is not always adequate to the market’s requirements. When, for example, the market is feeling unusually bullish of the European exchanges as against sterling, or of sterling as against dollars, the pressure to sell forward sterling or dollars, as the case may be, may drive the forward price of these currencies to a discount on their spot price which represents an altogether abnormal profit to any one who is in a position to130 buy these currencies forward and sell them spot. This abnormal discount can only disappear when the high profit of arbitrage between spot and forward has drawn fresh capital into the arbitrage business. So few persons understand even the elements of the theory of the forward exchanges that there was an occasion in 1920, even between London and New York, when a seller of spot dollars could earn at the rate of 6 per cent per annum above the London rate for short money by converting his dollars into sterling and providing at the same time by a forward sale of the sterling for reconversion into dollars in a month’s time; whilst, according to figures supplied me, it was possible, at the end of February 1921, by selling spot sterling in Milan and buying it back a month forward, to earn at the rate of more than 25 per cent per annum over and above any interest obtainable on a month’s deposit of cash lire in Milan.

But there’s another important situation that happens when speculation is really active and trending in one direction. It’s important to remember that the available floating capital, which can easily move around to take advantage of small profit opportunities between spot and forward exchange, is not unlimited and doesn’t always meet the market's needs. For instance, when the market is feeling particularly optimistic about European exchanges compared to sterling, or about sterling compared to dollars, the pressure to sell either forward sterling or dollars could push the forward price of these currencies to a discount compared to their spot price, which represents an unusual profit for anyone who can buy these currencies forward and sell them at the spot price. This unusual discount can only go away when the high profit from arbitrage between spot and forward attracts new capital into the arbitrage market. Very few people even grasp the basics of the theory behind forward exchanges, so there was a time in 1920, even between London and New York, when someone selling spot dollars could earn 6 percent per year above the London short-term interest rate by converting their dollars into sterling and simultaneously securing a forward sale of the sterling for conversion back into dollars in a month. Additionally, according to information I received, at the end of February 1921, by selling spot sterling in Milan and buying it back a month forward, it was possible to earn over 25 percent per year beyond any interest that could be gained from a month’s deposit of cash lire in Milan.

It is interesting to notice that when the differences between forward and spot rates have become temporarily abnormal, thus indicating an exceptional pressure of speculative activity, the speculators have often turned out to be right. For example, the abnormal discount on forward dollars, which persisted more or less from November 1920 to February 1921, thus indicating that the market was a bull of sterling, coincided with the sensational rise of sterling from 3.45 to 3.90. This discount was at its maximum when sterling touched its lowest131 point and at its minimum (in the middle of May 1921) when sterling reached its highest point on that swing, which showed a remarkably accurate anticipation of events by the balance of professional opinion. The comparatively high discount on forward dollars current at the end of 1922 may, in the same way, have been partly due to an excess of bull speculation in favour of sterling based on an expectation of its recovery towards par, and not merely to the cheapness of money in London as compared with New York.

It’s interesting to note that when the differences between forward and spot rates become unusually abnormal, signaling a strong presence of speculative activity, the speculators often turn out to be correct. For example, the unusual discount on forward dollars, which lasted more or less from November 1920 to February 1921, indicating that the market was bullish on sterling, coincided with the dramatic rise of sterling from 3.45 to 3.90. This discount was at its highest when sterling hit its lowest point and at its lowest (in mid-May 1921) when sterling reached its peak in that cycle, showing a remarkably accurate prediction of events by the majority of professional opinions. Similarly, the relatively high discount on forward dollars at the end of 1922 may have also been partly due to an excess of bullish speculation for sterling based on the expectation of its recovery towards par, and not just because of the lower cost of money in London compared to New York.

The same thing seems to have been true for the franc. In January and February 1921, the abnormal premium on the forward franc indicated that, in the view of the market, the franc had fallen too low, which turned out to be the case. They turned round at the precise moment when the franc reached its highest value (end of July 1921), and were right again. During the first five months of 1922, when the franc was almost stable, spot and forward quotations were practically at par with one another, whilst the progressive fall of the franc since June 1922 has been accompanied by a steady and sometimes substantial discount on forward francs; indicating, on this test, that the professional market was bearish of francs and therefore right once more. The lira tells somewhat the same tale. Thus, whilst the reader can see for himself by a study of the tables that no precise generalisation would be accurate, nevertheless the market has been broadly right when it132 has taken a very decided view, as measured by forward rates.

The same seems to have been true for the franc. In January and February 1921, the unusual premium on the forward franc suggested that, according to the market, the franc had dropped too low, which turned out to be accurate. They reversed their stance at the exact moment the franc hit its highest value (end of July 1921), and they were right again. During the first five months of 1922, when the franc was nearly stable, spot and forward quotes were almost equal, while the gradual decline of the franc since June 1922 was marked by a consistent and sometimes significant discount on forward francs, indicating that the professional market was pessimistic about francs and therefore correct once more. The lira shows a similar story. So, while the reader can see for themselves through the tables that no precise generalization would be accurate, the market has generally been correct when it has taken a strong position, as reflected by forward rates.

This result may seem surprising in view of the huge amounts which exchange speculators in European currencies, more particularly on the bull side, are reputed to have lost. But the mass of amateur speculators throughout the world operate by cash purchases of the currency of which they are bulls, forward transactions being neither known nor available to them. Such speculation may afford temporary support to the spot exchange, but it has no influence on the difference between spot and forward, the subject now under discussion. The above conclusion is limited to the fact that when the type of professional speculation which makes use of the forward market is exceptionally active and united in its opinion, it has proved roughly correct, and has, therefore, been a useful factor in moderating the extreme fluctuations which would have occurred otherwise.

This result may seem surprising considering the huge amounts that speculators in European currencies, especially those on the buying side, are believed to have lost. However, most amateur speculators around the world operate by buying the currency they are optimistic about, as forward transactions are neither familiar nor accessible to them. This kind of speculation might provide temporary support to the spot exchange, but it doesn’t affect the difference between spot and forward, which is the topic we're discussing now. The conclusion above is limited to the fact that when professional speculation that utilizes the forward market is particularly active and aligns in its views, it tends to be largely accurate and has therefore been a helpful factor in reducing the extreme fluctuations that would have happened otherwise.

* * * * *

Out of the various practical conclusions which might be drawn from this discussion and the figures which accompany it, I will pick out three.

Out of the different practical conclusions we can take from this discussion and the numbers that go along with it, I’ll highlight three.

1. Those exchanges in which the fluctuations are wildest and the merchant is most in need of facilities for hedging his risk are precisely those in which facilities for forward dealing at moderate rates are133 least developed. But this is to be explained, not necessarily by the instability of the exchange in itself, but by certain accompanying circumstances, such as distrust of the country’s internal arrangements or its banking credit, a fear of the sudden imposition of exchange regulations or of a moratorium, and the other analogous influences mentioned above (pp. 126–7). There is no theoretical reason why there should not be an excellent forward market in a highly unstable exchange. In those countries, therefore, where regulation is still premature, it may nevertheless be possible to mitigate the evil consequences of fluctuation by organising facilities for forward dealings.

1. The exchanges where the price swings are the most extreme and where traders need better options to manage their risks are actually the ones where resources for forward trading at reasonable rates are the least available. However, this isn’t just about the instability of the exchange itself; it’s also influenced by other factors, such as a lack of trust in the country’s internal policies or its banking system, concerns about abrupt exchange regulations or a payment freeze, and other similar factors mentioned earlier (pp. 126–7). There’s no theoretical reason that an excellent forward market couldn’t exist even in a highly unstable exchange. Therefore, in countries where regulation is still developing, it might still be possible to reduce the negative effects of fluctuations by setting up options for forward trading.

This is a function which the State banks of such countries could usefully perform. For this they must either themselves command a certain amount of foreign currency or they must provide facilities for accepting short-period deposits in their own currency from foreign bankers, on conditions which inspire these bankers with complete confidence in the freedom and liquidity of such deposits. Various technical devices could be suggested. But the simplest method might be for the State banks themselves to enter the forward market and offer to buy or sell forward exchange at a reasonable discount or premium on the spot quotation. I suggest that they should deal not direct with the public but only with approved banks and financial houses, from whom134 they should require adequate security; that they should quote every day their rates for buying and selling exchange either one or three months forward; but that such quotation should take the form, not of a price for the exchange itself, but of a percentage difference between spot and forward, and should be a quotation for the double transaction of a spot deal one way and a simultaneous forward deal the other—e.g. the Bank of Italy might offer to sell spot sterling and buy forward sterling at a premium of ⅛ per cent per month for the former over the latter, and to buy spot sterling and sell forward sterling at par. For the transaction of such business the State banks would require to command a certain amount of resources abroad, either in cash or in borrowing facilities. But this fund would be a revolving one, automatically replenished at the maturity of the forward contracts, so that it need not be on anything like the scale necessary for a fund for the purpose of supporting the exchange. Nor is it a business which involves any more risk than is inherent in all banking business as such; from exchange risk proper is free.

This is a function that state banks in these countries could effectively carry out. To do this, they must either have a certain amount of foreign currency themselves or provide options for accepting short-term deposits in their own currency from foreign bankers, under terms that give these bankers complete confidence in the accessibility and liquidity of those deposits. Various technical strategies could be proposed. However, the simplest approach might be for state banks to enter the forward market and offer to buy or sell forward exchange at a reasonable discount or premium compared to the spot rate. I propose that they should not deal directly with the public but only with approved banks and financial institutions, from whom they should require adequate security; they should quote their rates for buying and selling exchange either one or three months forward on a daily basis. This quote should not be a price for the exchange itself, but a percentage difference between the spot and forward rates, representing a dual transaction of a spot deal in one direction and a simultaneous forward deal in the other—e.g. the Bank of Italy might offer to sell spot sterling and buy forward sterling at a premium of ⅛ percent per month for the former over the latter, and to buy spot sterling and sell forward sterling at par. For carrying out this business, state banks would need to have certain resources available abroad, either in cash or through borrowing options. However, this fund would be revolving, automatically replenished at the maturity of the forward contracts, meaning it doesn’t need to be as large as what would be necessary for a fund aimed at supporting the exchange. Additionally, this is not a business that involves any more risk than is inherent in all banking activities in general; it is free from exchange risk.

With free forward markets thus established no merchant need run an exchange risk unless he wishes to, and business might find a stable foothold even in a fluctuating world. A recommendation in favour of action along these lines was included amongst the Financial Resolutions of the Genoa Conference of 1922.

With free forward markets now established, no merchant has to take on exchange risk unless they choose to, allowing business to find a stable footing even in a changing world. A suggestion to pursue this action was included in the Financial Resolutions of the Genoa Conference in 1922.

135

135

I shall develop below (Chap. V.) a proposal that the Bank of England should strengthen its control by fixing spot and forward prices for gold every Thursday just as it now fixes its discount rate. But other Central Banks also would increase their control over fluctuations in exchange if they were to adopt the above plan of quoting rates for forward exchange in terms of spot exchange. By varying these rates they would be able, in effect, to vary the interest offered for foreign balances, as a policy distinct from whatever might be their bank-rate policy for the purpose of governing the interest obtainable on home balances.

I will detail a proposal below (Chap. V.) suggesting that the Bank of England should enhance its control by setting spot and forward gold prices every Thursday, just like it currently sets its discount rate. However, other Central Banks could also improve their influence over exchange rate fluctuations by adopting the aforementioned plan of quoting forward exchange rates based on spot exchange rates. By adjusting these rates, they would effectively be able to alter the interest offered for foreign balances, independent of their bank-rate policy aimed at managing the interest available on home balances.

2. It is not unusual at present for banks to endeavour to distinguish between speculative dealings in forward exchange and dealings which are intended to hedge a commercial transaction, with a view to discouraging the former; whilst official exchange regulations in many countries have been aimed at such discrimination. I think that this is a mistake. Banks should take stringent precautions to make sure that their clients are in a position to meet any losses which may accrue without serious embarrassment. But, having fully assured themselves on this point, it is not useful that they should inquire further—for the following reasons.

2. Nowadays, it's common for banks to try to distinguish between speculative trading in forward exchange and trading meant to hedge a commercial transaction, aiming to discourage the former; meanwhile, official exchange regulations in many countries have focused on this distinction. I believe this approach is misguided. Banks should take strong precautions to ensure that their clients can handle any potential losses without significant issues. However, once they have confirmed this point, it’s not helpful for them to look deeper—for the following reasons.

In the first place, it is almost impossible to prevent the evasion of such regulations; whilst, if the business is driven to methods of evasion, it tends to be pressed136 underground, to yield excessive profits to middlemen, and to fall into undesirable hands.

In the first place, it's nearly impossible to stop people from getting around such regulations; meanwhile, if the business is pushed to find ways to evade them, it tends to go underground, leads to huge profits for middlemen, and ends up in the wrong hands.136

But, what is more important and is less appreciated, the speculator with resources can provide a useful, indeed almost an essential, service. Since the volume of actual trade is spread unevenly through the year, the seasonal fluctuation, as explained above, is bound to occur with undue force unless some financial, non-commercial factor steps in to balance matters. A free forward market, from which speculative transactions are not excluded, will give by far the best facilities for the trader, who does not wish to speculate, to avoid doing so. The same sort of advantages will be secured for merchants generally as are afforded, for example, to the cotton trade by the dealings in “futures” in the New York and Liverpool markets. Where risk is unavoidably present, it is much better that it should be carried by those who are qualified or are desirous to bear it, than by traders, who have neither the qualification nor the desire to do so, and whose minds it distracts from their own business. The wide fluctuations in the leading exchanges over the past three years, as distinct from their persisting depreciation, have been due, not to the presence of speculation, but to the absence of a sufficient volume of it relatively to the volume of trade.

But what's even more important, and often overlooked, is that a speculator with resources can provide a valuable, even essential, service. Since the actual trading volume varies throughout the year, the seasonal fluctuations, as mentioned earlier, will be more pronounced unless some financial, non-commercial factor steps in to stabilize things. A free forward market that allows speculative transactions will offer the best opportunities for traders who don’t want to speculate to avoid doing so. Merchants in general will benefit similarly to how the cotton industry gains from “futures” trading in the New York and Liverpool markets. When risk is inevitably present, it's much better for those who are qualified or willing to take on that risk to do so, rather than traders who neither have the skills nor the desire to take on additional risk, which distracts them from their own business. The significant fluctuations in the major exchanges over the past three years, aside from their ongoing depreciation, have been caused not by speculation but by the lack of sufficient volume of it compared to the trading volume.

3. A failure to analyse the relation between spot and forward exchange may be, sometimes, partly responsible for a mistaken bank-rate policy. Dear137 money—that is to say, high interest rates for short-period loans—has two effects. The one is indirect and gradual—namely, in diminishing the volume of credit quoted by the banks. This effect is much the same now as it always was. It is desirable to produce it when prices are rising and business is trying to expand faster than the supply of real capital and effective demand can permit in the long run. It is undesirable when prices are falling and trade is depressed.

3. Not analyzing the relationship between spot and forward exchange can sometimes lead to an incorrect bank-rate policy. Expensive money—that is, high interest rates for short-term loans—has two effects. One is indirect and gradual—specifically, it reduces the amount of credit offered by banks. This effect is pretty much the same now as it has always been. It's useful to create this effect when prices are rising and businesses are trying to grow faster than the available real capital and effective demand can support in the long run. It's not helpful when prices are falling and trade is struggling.

The other effect of dear money, or rather of dearer money in one centre than in another, used to be to draw gold from the cheaper centre for temporary employment in the dearer. But nowadays the only immediate effect is to cause a new adjustment of the difference between the spot and forward rates of exchange between the two centres. If money becomes dearer in London, the discount on forward dollars diminishes or gives way to a premium. The effect has been pointed out above of the relative cheapening of money in London in the latter half of 1922 in increasing the discount on forward dollars, and of the relative raising of money-rates in the middle of 1923 in diminishing the discount. Such are, in present circumstances, the principal direct consequences of a moderate difference between interest rates in the two centres, apart, of course, from the indirect, long-period influence. Since no one is likely to remit money temporarily from one money market138 to another on any important scale, with an uncovered exchange risk, merely to take advantage of ½ or 1 per cent per annum difference in the interest rate, the direct effect of dearer money on the absolute level of the exchanges, as distinguished from the difference between spot and forward, is very small, being limited to the comparatively slight influence which the relation between spot and forward rates exerts on exchange speculators.39 The pressure of arbitragers between spot and forward exchange, seeking to take advantage of the new situation, leads to a rapid adjustment of the difference between these rates, until the business of temporary remittance, as distinct from exchange speculation, is no more profitable than it was before, and consequently does not occur on any increased scale; with the result that there is no marked effect on the absolute level of the spot rate.

The other effect of expensive money, or rather of more expensive money in one center than in another, used to be that it would pull gold from the cheaper center for temporary use in the more expensive one. But nowadays, the only immediate effect is to create a new adjustment in the difference between the spot and forward exchange rates between the two centers. If money becomes more expensive in London, the discount on forward dollars decreases or turns into a premium. The effect noted earlier of the relatively cheaper money in London in the latter half of 1922 increased the discount on forward dollars, while the relative rise in money rates in the middle of 1923 reduced the discount. In the current situation, these are the main direct consequences of a moderate difference in interest rates between the two centers, aside from the indirect, long-term influence. Since no one is likely to temporarily transfer money from one market to another on any significant scale, with an uncovered exchange risk, just to benefit from a ½ or 1 percent per annum difference in the interest rate, the direct effect of more expensive money on the absolute level of exchanges—distinct from the difference between spot and forward—is very small, limited to the relatively minor influence that the relationship between spot and forward rates has on exchange speculators.138 The pressure from arbitragers between spot and forward exchange, looking to take advantage of the new situation, leads to a quick adjustment of the difference between these rates until the business of temporary remittance, as opposed to exchange speculation, is no more profitable than it was before and therefore does not happen on a larger scale; as a result, there is no significant impact on the absolute level of the spot rate.

39 If interest rates are raised in London, the discount on forward dollars will decrease or a premium will appear. This is likely to have some influence in encouraging speculative sales of forward dollars (how much influence depends on the proportion borne by the difference between the spot and forward rates to the probable range of fluctuation of the spot rate which the speculator anticipates); and in so far as this is the case, the covering sales of spot dollars by banks will move the rate of exchange in favour of London.

39 If interest rates go up in London, the discount on forward dollars will drop or a premium will show up. This is likely to encourage some speculative sales of forward dollars (the extent of the influence depends on how the difference between the spot and forward rates relates to the expected fluctuations of the spot rate that the speculator predicts); and to the degree this happens, the banks' sales of spot dollars will shift the exchange rate in favor of London.

The reasons given for the maintenance of a close relationship between the Bank of England’s rate and that of the American Federal Reserve Board sometimes show confusion. The eventual influence of an effective high bank-rate on the general situation is undisputed; but the belief that a moderate difference139 between bank-rates in London and New York reacts directly on the sterling-dollar exchange, as it used to do under a régime of convertibility, is a misapprehension. The direct reaction of this difference is on the discount for forward dollars as against spot dollars; and it cannot much affect the absolute level of the spot rate unless the change in relative money-rates is comparable in magnitude (as it used to be but no longer is) with the possible range of exchange fluctuations.

The reasons provided for the close relationship between the Bank of England's interest rate and that of the American Federal Reserve can sometimes be unclear. While the overall impact of a high bank rate on the economic situation is unquestionable, the idea that a slight difference in bank rates between London and New York directly affects the sterling-dollar exchange—like it did when currency convertibility was in place—is a misunderstanding. The immediate effect of this difference is seen in the discount for forward dollars compared to spot dollars; it doesn't significantly influence the absolute level of the spot rate unless the change in relative interest rates is similar in scale (as it used to be but isn't anymore) compared to the potential range of exchange rate fluctuations.


Our first two chapters, on the evils proceeding from instability in the purchasing power of money and on the part played by the exigencies of Public Finance, have indicated the practical importance of our subject to the welfare of society. In the third chapter an attempt has been made to lay a foundation of theory upon which to raise constructions. We can now turn, in this and the following chapter, to Remedies.

Our first two chapters, discussing the problems caused by fluctuations in the value of money and the role of Public Finance needs, have shown how important our topic is for the well-being of society. In the third chapter, we've tried to establish a theoretical foundation to build upon. Now, we can shift our focus, in this chapter and the next, to Remedies.

The instability of money has been compounded, in most countries except the United States, of two elements: the failure of the national currencies to remain stable in terms of what was supposed to be the standard of value, namely gold; and the failure of gold itself to remain stable in terms of purchasing power. Attention has been mainly concentrated (e.g. by the Cunliffe Committee) on the first of these two factors. It is often assumed that the restoration of the gold standard, that is to say, of the convertibility of each national currency at a fixed rate in terms of gold, must be, in any case, our objective;141 and that the main question of controversy is whether national currencies should be restored to their pre-war gold value or to some lower value nearer to the present facts; in other words, the choice between Deflation and Devaluation.

The instability of money has been made worse, in most countries except the United States, by two factors: the failure of national currencies to stay stable according to what was supposed to be the standard of value, which is gold; and the failure of gold itself to maintain stable purchasing power. Attention has mainly focused (e.g. by the Cunliffe Committee) on the first of these factors. It's often assumed that restoring the gold standard, meaning the ability to convert each national currency at a fixed rate to gold, must be our goal; 141 and that the main point of debate is whether national currencies should return to their pre-war gold value or to a lower value that reflects current realities; in other words, the choice between Deflation and Devaluation.

This assumption is hasty. If we glance at the course of prices during the last five years, it is obvious that the United States, which has enjoyed a gold standard throughout, has suffered as severely as many other countries, that in the United Kingdom the instability of gold has been a larger factor than the instability of the exchange, that the same is true even of France, and that in Italy it has been nearly as large. On the other hand, in India, which has suffered violent exchange fluctuations, the standard of value, as we shall see below, has been more stable than in any other country.

This assumption is rushed. If we look at the price trends over the last five years, it's clear that the United States, which has maintained a gold standard all along, has faced challenges just as severe as many other countries. In the UK, the instability of gold has had a bigger impact than the unstable exchange rates. The same goes for France, and in Italy, the impact has been almost as significant. On the flip side, in India, which has experienced wild fluctuations in exchange rates, the value standard has actually been more stable than in any other country.

We should not, therefore, by fixing the exchanges get rid of our currency troubles. It is even possible that this step might weaken our control. The problem of stabilisation has several sides, which we must consider one by one:

We shouldn't think that setting fixed exchanges will solve our currency issues. In fact, this move could even weaken our control. The stabilization problem has several aspects, which we need to examine individually:

1. Devaluation versus Deflation. Do we wish to fix the standard of value, whether or not it be gold, near the existing value? Or do we wish to restore it to the pre-war value?

1. Devaluation versus Deflation. Do we want to set the value standard, whether it's gold or something else, close to its current value? Or do we want to bring it back to what it was before the war?

2. Stability of Prices versus Stability of Exchange. Is it more important that the value of a national currency should be stable in terms of purchasing142 power, or stable in terms of the currency of certain foreign countries?

2. Stability of Prices versus Stability of Exchange. Is it more important for a national currency's value to remain stable in terms of purchasing power, or to stay stable compared to the currencies of certain foreign countries?

3. The Restoration of a Gold Standard. In the light of our answers to the first two questions, is a gold standard, however imperfect in theory, the best available method for attaining our ends in practice?

3. Restoring a Gold Standard. Considering our responses to the first two questions, is a gold standard, despite its theoretical flaws, the most effective way to achieve our goals in practice?

Having decided between these alternative aims, we can proceed, in the next chapter, to some constructive suggestions.

Having chosen between these different goals, we can move on, in the next chapter, to some helpful suggestions.

I. Devaluation versus Deflation.

The policy of reducing the ratio between the volume of a country’s currency and its requirements of purchasing power in the form of money, so as to increase the exchange value of the currency in terms of gold or of commodities, is conveniently called Deflation.

The strategy of decreasing the ratio between the amount of a country’s currency and its demand for purchasing power as money, in order to boost the currency's exchange value relative to gold or commodities, is commonly referred to as Deflation.

The alternative policy of stabilising the value of the currency somewhere near its present value, without regard to its pre-war value, is called Devaluation.

The alternative policy of keeping the currency's value stable close to its current value, regardless of its value before the war, is called Devaluation.

Up to the date of the Genoa Conference of April 1922, these two policies were not clearly distinguished by the public, and the sharp opposition between them has been only gradually appreciated. Even now (October 1923) there is scarcely any European country in which the authorities have made it clear whether their policy is to stabilise the value of their currency or to raise it. Stabilisation at the existing level has been recommended by International143 Conferences;40 and the actual value of many currencies tends to fall rather than to rise. But, to judge from other indications, the heart’s desire of the State Banks of Europe, whether they pursue it successfully, as in Czecho-Slovakia, or unsuccessfully, as in France, is to raise the value of their currencies. In only one country so far have practical steps been taken to fix the exchange, namely in Austria.

Up until the Genoa Conference in April 1922, the public didn't clearly understand the difference between these two policies, and the strong opposition between them has only been gradually recognized. Even now (October 1923), there's hardly a European country where the authorities have made it clear whether their policy is to stabilize the value of their currency or to increase it. Stabilizing at the current level has been recommended by International143 Conferences;40 and many currencies tend to lose value rather than gain it. However, judging by other signs, the main goal of the State Banks of Europe, whether they're achieving it successfully, as in Czecho-Slovakia, or unsuccessfully, as in France, is to increase the value of their currencies. So far, only one country has taken practical steps to fix the exchange rate, which is Austria.

40 Whilst the Conference of Genoa (April 1922) affirmed the doctrine in general, representatives of the countries chiefly affected were united in declaring that it must not be applied to them in particular. Signor Peano, M. Picard, and M. Theunis, speaking on behalf of Italy, France, and Belgium, announced, each for his own country, that they would have nothing to do with devaluating, and were determined to restore their respective currencies to their pre-war values. Reform is not likely to come by joint, simultaneous action. The experts of Genoa recognised this when they “ventured to suggest” that “a considerable service will be rendered by that country which first decides boldly to set the example of securing immediate stability in terms of gold” by devaluation.

40 While the Conference of Genoa (April 1922) generally supported the doctrine, the representatives of the countries most affected agreed that it shouldn't apply to them specifically. Signor Peano, M. Picard, and M. Theunis, speaking for Italy, France, and Belgium, each declared that their countries would have nothing to do with devaluation and were committed to restoring their currencies to their pre-war values. Reform is unlikely to happen through joint, simultaneous action. The experts at Genoa recognized this when they "ventured to suggest" that "a significant service will be provided by the country that first boldly chooses to set the example of securing immediate stability in terms of gold" through devaluation.

The simple arguments against Deflation fall under two heads.

The basic arguments against deflation can be categorized into two main points.

In the first place, Deflation is not desirable, because it effects, what is always harmful, a change in the existing Standard of Value, and redistributes wealth in a manner injurious, at the same time, to business and to social stability. Deflation, as we have already seen, involves a transference of wealth from the rest of the community to the rentier class and to all holders of titles to money; just as inflation involves the opposite. In particular it involves a transference from all borrowers, that is to say from traders, manufacturers, and farmers, to lenders, from the active to the inactive.

First of all, deflation is not desirable because it causes a harmful shift in the existing standard of value and redistributes wealth in a way that damages both businesses and social stability. As we've already discussed, deflation leads to a transfer of wealth from the general community to the rentier class and anyone who holds money; this is the opposite of what inflation does. Specifically, it transfers wealth from all borrowers—meaning traders, manufacturers, and farmers—to lenders, moving resources from the active to the inactive.

144

144

But whilst the oppression of the taxpayer for the enrichment of the rentier is the chief lasting result, there is another, more violent, disturbance during the period of transition. The policy of gradually raising the value of a country’s money to (say) 100 per cent above its present value in terms of goods—I repeat here the arguments of Chapter I.—amounts to giving notice to every merchant and every manufacturer, that for some time to come his stock and his raw materials will steadily depreciate on his hands, and to every one who finances his business with borrowed money that he will, sooner or later, lose 100 per cent on his liabilities (since he will have to pay back in terms of commodities twice as much as he has borrowed). Modern business, being carried on largely with borrowed money, must necessarily be brought to a standstill by such a process. It will be to the interest of every one in business to go out of business for the time being; and of every one who is contemplating expenditure to postpone his orders so long as he can. The wise man will be he who turns his assets into cash, withdraws from the risks and the exertions of activity, and awaits in country retirement the steady appreciation promised him in the value of his cash. A probable expectation of Deflation is bad enough; a certain expectation is disastrous. For the mechanism of the modern business world is even less adapted to fluctuations in the value of money upwards than it is to fluctuations downwards.

But while the burden on taxpayers to enrich the rentier is the main lasting effect, there's also another, more intense disruption during the transition. The plan to gradually increase a country’s money value to (let’s say) 100 percent above its current value in terms of goods—I reiterate the points from Chapter I.—means that every merchant and manufacturer is being warned that for a while, their stock and raw materials will consistently lose value. Anyone financing their business with borrowed money will eventually face a loss of 100 percent on their debts (since they’ll have to repay twice as much in goods as they borrowed). Since modern businesses mostly rely on loans, this situation will inevitably halt progress. It will be in the best interest of everyone in business to step back temporarily; and anyone considering spending will delay their orders for as long as possible. The smart move is for someone to convert their assets into cash, step away from the risks and demands of business, and wait in rural seclusion for the steady rise in the value of their cash that’s promised. A likely expectation of deflation is already harmful; a guaranteed expectation is catastrophic. The mechanics of the modern business landscape are even less suited for upward fluctuations in money value than they are for downward ones.

145

145

In the second place, in many countries, Deflation, even were it desirable, is not possible; that is to say, Deflation in sufficient degree to restore the currency to its pre-war parity. For the burden which it would throw on the taxpayer would be insupportable. I need add nothing on this to what I have already written in the second chapter above. This practical impossibility might have rendered the policy innocuous, if it were not that, by standing in the way of the alternative policy, it prolongs the period of uncertainty and severe seasonal fluctuation, and even, in some cases, can be carried into effect sufficiently to cause much interference with business. The fact, that the restoration of their currencies to the pre-war parity is still the declared official policy of the French and Italian Governments, is preventing, in those countries, any rational discussion of currency reform. All those—and in the financial world they are many—who have reasons for wishing to appear “correct,” are compelled to talk foolishly. In Italy, where sound economic views have much influence and which may be nearly ripe for currency reform, Signor Mussolini has threatened to raise the lira to its former value. Fortunately for the Italian taxpayer and Italian business, the lira does not listen even to a dictator and cannot be given castor oil. But such talk can postpone positive reform; though it may be doubted if so good a politician would have propounded such a policy, even in bravado and exuberance, if he had146 understood that, expressed in other but equivalent words, it was as follows: “My policy is to halve wages, double the burden of the National Debt, and to reduce by 50 per cent the prices which Sicily can get for her exports of oranges and lemons.”

In many countries, deflation, even if it were desirable, is not possible; that is to say, a significant enough deflation to bring the currency back to its pre-war value. The burden it would place on taxpayers would be unbearable. I don't need to add anything more on this than what I've already covered in the second chapter above. This practical impossibility might have made the policy harmless, were it not for the fact that it blocks alternative policies, prolonging uncertainty and severe seasonal fluctuations. In some cases, it can be carried out enough to seriously disrupt business. The fact that restoring their currencies to pre-war values remains the official policy of the French and Italian Governments prevents any rational discussion of currency reform in those countries. Those who feel the need to appear “correct,” especially in the financial world, are forced to speak foolishly. In Italy, where sound economic ideas hold considerable sway and which may be nearly ready for currency reform, Signor Mussolini has threatened to raise the lira to its former value. Fortunately for the Italian taxpayer and businesses, the lira doesn’t respond even to a dictator and cannot be manipulated like a puppet. However, such talk can delay necessary reform; it can be questioned whether such a savvy politician would have suggested this policy, even out of bravado, if he had understood that, in different but equivalent terms, it essentially meant: “My policy is to halve wages, double the National Debt burden, and reduce by 50 percent the prices that Sicily can fetch for its orange and lemon exports.”

One single country—Czechoslovakia—has made the experiment on a modest but sufficient scale. Comparatively free from the burden of internal debt, and free also from serious budgetary deficits, Czechoslovakia was able in the course of 1922, in pursuance of the policy of her Finance Minister, Dr. Alois Rasin, to employ the proceeds of certain foreign loans to improve the exchange value of the Czech crown to nearly three times the rate which had been touched in the previous year. The policy has cost her an industrial crisis and serious unemployment. To what purpose? I do not know. Even now the Czech crown is not worth a sixth of its pre-war parity; and it remains unstabilised, fluttering before the breath of the seasons and the wind of politics. Is, therefore, the process of appreciation to continue indefinitely? If not, when and at what point is stabilisation to be effected? Czechoslovakia was better placed than any country in Europe to establish her economic life on the basis of a sound and fixed currency. Her finances were in equilibrium, her credit good, her foreign resources adequate, and no one could have blamed her for devaluating the crown, ruined by no fault of hers147 and inherited from the Habsburg Empire. Pursuing a misguided policy in a spirit of stern virtue, she preferred the stagnation of her industries and a still fluctuating standard.41

One single country—Czechoslovakia—has conducted the experiment on a modest but sufficient scale. Relatively free from internal debt and also from significant budget deficits, Czechoslovakia was able, in 1922, following the policy of its Finance Minister, Dr. Alois Rasin, to use the funds from certain foreign loans to boost the exchange value of the Czech crown to nearly three times the rate it had reached the year before. However, this policy has led to an industrial crisis and serious unemployment. For what purpose? I don’t know. Even now, the Czech crown is worth less than a sixth of its pre-war value, and it remains unstable, fluctuating with the seasons and political winds. Will this process of appreciation continue indefinitely? If not, when and how will stabilization happen? Czechoslovakia was in a better position than any other European country to establish its economic life on a stable and sound currency. Its finances were balanced, its credit was good, its foreign resources were sufficient, and no one could have criticized it for devaluing the crown, which had been ruined through no fault of its own and was inherited from the Habsburg Empire. Instead of taking a practical approach, it chose to stick to a misguided policy out of a sense of strict discipline, resulting in stagnation in its industries and an unstable currency standard.147

41 I cannot criticise the work, in his second term of office (1922), of Dr. Rasin, now fallen by the hand of an assassin, without reference to his great achievement during his first term (1919) in rescuing his country’s currency from the surrounding chaos. The stamping of the Austrian notes and the levy on holders of titles to money which accompanied it was the only drastic, courageous, and successful measure of finance carried through anywhere in Europe at that epoch; the story of it from Dr. Rasin’s own pen can be read in his The Financial Policy of Czecho-Slovakia. Before he had finished other influences became dominant. But, when in 1922 this austere and disinterested Minister returned to office, he missed, in my judgment, his opportunity. He could have completed his task by establishing the currency on a fixed and stable basis, instead of which he used his great authority to disorder trade by a futile process of Deflation.

41 I can't criticize Dr. Rasin's work during his second term in office (1922), now that he has fallen victim to an assassin, without acknowledging his significant achievement during his first term (1919) in saving his country's currency from the surrounding chaos. The issuance of Austrian notes and the tax on money holders that came with it was the only bold, effective, and successful financial measure implemented anywhere in Europe at that time; the story of it can be found in Dr. Rasin’s own writing in The Financial Policy of Czecho-Slovakia. By the time he completed his term, other influences had become more dominant. But when this stern and selfless Minister returned to office in 1922, he, in my opinion, missed his chance. He could have wrapped up his work by stabilizing the currency on a fixed basis, but instead, he used his significant authority to disrupt trade through a pointless process of deflation.

* * * * *

If the restoration of many European currencies to their pre-war parity with gold is neither desirable nor possible, what are the forces or the arguments which have established this undesirable impossibility as the avowed policy of most of them? The following are the most important:

If bringing many European currencies back to their pre-war value with gold isn't desirable or possible, what factors or arguments have made this undesirable impossibility the official policy for most of them? The following are the key points:

1. To leave the gold value of a country’s currency at the low level to which war has driven it is an injustice to the rentier class and to others whose income is fixed in terms of currency, and practically a breach of contract; whilst to restore its value would meet a debt of honour.

1. Keeping the gold value of a country’s currency low because of war is unfair to the rentier class and to others with fixed incomes, and it's basically a breach of contract; on the other hand, restoring its value would honor a debt.

The injury done to pre-war holders of fixed interest-bearing stocks is beyond dispute. Real justice, indeed, might require the restoration of the purchasing power,148 and not merely the gold value, of their money incomes, a measure which no one in fact proposes; whilst nominal justice has not been infringed, since these investments were not in gold bullion but in the legal tender of the realm. Nevertheless, if this class of investors could be dealt with separately, considerations of equity and the expedience of satisfying reasonable expectation would furnish a strong case.

The harm done to people who held fixed interest-bearing stocks before the war is undeniable. Real justice might actually call for restoring the purchasing power, not just the gold value, of their money incomes, a suggestion that no one really makes; while nominal justice hasn’t been violated, since these investments weren’t in gold bullion but in the country’s legal tender. Still, if this group of investors could be treated separately, fairness and the need to meet reasonable expectations would make a compelling argument.

But this is not the actual situation. The vast issues of War Loans have swamped the pre-war holdings of fixed interest-bearing stocks, and society has largely adjusted itself to the new situation. To restore the value of pre-war holdings by Deflation means enhancing at the same time the value of war and post-war holdings, and thereby raising the total claims of the rentier class not only beyond what they are entitled to, but to an intolerable proportion of the total income of the community. Indeed justice, rightly weighed, comes down on the other side. Much the greater proportion of the money contracts still outstanding were entered into when money was worth more nearly what it is worth now than what it was worth in 1913. Thus, in order to do justice to a minority of creditors, a great injustice would be done to a great majority of debtors.

But this isn't the real situation. The massive issues of War Loans have overwhelmed the pre-war investments in fixed interest-bearing stocks, and society has largely adapted to the new reality. Restoring the value of pre-war holdings through Deflation would also increase the value of war and post-war holdings, which would elevate the total claims of the rentier class not only beyond what they deserve but to an unacceptable level of the overall income of the community. In fact, fairness, when properly considered, leans in the opposite direction. A much larger share of the money contracts still in effect were made when money was worth closer to its current value than to what it was worth in 1913. Therefore, to achieve justice for a minority of creditors, a significant injustice would be inflicted on a large majority of debtors.

This aspect of the matter has been admirably argued by Professor Irving Fisher.42 We forget, he149 says, that not all contracts require the same adjustment in order to secure justice, and that while we are debating whether we ought to deflate to secure ideal justice for those who made contracts on old price levels, new contracts are constantly being made at the new price levels. An estimate of the volume of contracts now outstanding, classified according to their age, would show that some contracts are a day old, some are a month old, some are a year old, some are a decade old, and some are a century old, the great mass, however, being of very recent origin. Consequently the average, or centre of gravity, of the total existing indebtedness is probably always somewhat near the present. Before the war, Professor Fisher estimated, very roughly, that contracts in the United States were on the average about one year old.

This aspect of the issue has been effectively argued by Professor Irving Fisher. He says we often forget that not all contracts need the same adjustments to ensure fairness. While we’re discussing whether we should lower prices to achieve ideal fairness for those who made contracts at older price levels, new contracts are continuously being created at the new price levels. If we were to estimate the number of contracts currently in effect, sorted by their age, we would see that some contracts are only one day old, some are a month old, some are a year old, some are a decade old, and some are a century old, with the majority being quite recent. Therefore, the average, or center of gravity, of total existing debt is likely always somewhat close to the present. Before the war, Professor Fisher roughly estimated that contracts in the United States were, on average, about one year old.

42 In his article “Devaluation versus Deflation,” published in the eleventh Manchester Guardian Reconstruction Supplement (Dec. 7, 1922).

42 In his article “Devaluation versus Deflation,” published in the eleventh Manchester Guardian Reconstruction Supplement (Dec. 7, 1922).

When, therefore, the depreciation of the currency has lasted long enough for society to adjust itself to the new values, Deflation is even worse than Inflation. Both are “unjust” and disappoint reasonable expectation. But whereas Inflation, by easing the burden of national debt and stimulating enterprise, has a little to throw into the other side of the balance, Deflation has nothing.

When the currency has been devalued for long enough for society to adapt to the new values, deflation is even worse than inflation. Both are “unfair” and let people down. But while inflation can lighten the load of national debt and boost business to some extent, deflation offers no benefits at all.

2. The restoration of a currency to its pre-war gold value enhances a country’s financial prestige and promotes future confidence.

2. Restoring a currency to its pre-war gold value boosts a country’s financial reputation and builds future confidence.

Where a country can hope to restore its pre-war parity at an early date, this argument cannot be150 neglected. This might be said of Great Britain, Holland, Sweden, Switzerland, and (perhaps) Spain, but of no other European country. The argument cannot be extended to those countries which, even if they could raise somewhat the value of their legal-tender money, could not possibly restore it to its old value. It is of the essence of the argument that the exact pre-war parity should be recovered. It would not make much difference to the financial prestige of Italy whether she stabilised the lira at 100 to the £ sterling or at 60; and it would be much better for her prestige to stabilise it definitely at 100 than to let it fluctuate between 60 and 100.

Where a country can realistically hope to regain its pre-war value soon, this argument should not be overlooked. This applies to Great Britain, the Netherlands, Sweden, Switzerland, and possibly Spain, but no other European nations. The argument does not apply to those countries that, even if they could increase the value of their currency, would never be able to bring it back to its original value. The core of the argument is that the exact pre-war value should be restored. It wouldn’t significantly impact Italy's financial reputation whether it stabilizes the lira at 100 to the pound sterling or at 60; it would be far better for its reputation to stabilize it clearly at 100 rather than allow it to fluctuate between 60 and 100.

This argument is limited, therefore, to those countries the gold value of whose currencies is within (say) 5 or 10 per cent of their former value. Its force in these cases depends, I think, upon what answer we give to the problem discussed below, namely, whether we intend to pin ourselves in the future, as in the past, to an unqualified gold standard. If we still prefer such a standard to any available alternative, and if future “confidence” in our currency is to depend not on the stability of its purchasing power but on the fixity of its gold-value, then it may be worth our while to stand the racket of Deflation to the extent of 5 or 10 per cent. This view is in accordance with that expressed by Ricardo in analogous circumstances a hundred years ago.43 If,151 on the other hand, we decide to aim for the future at stability of the price level rather than at a fixed parity with gold, in that case cadit quaestio.

This argument is limited to those countries whose currency's gold value is within (let's say) 5 or 10 percent of its previous value. Its strength in these situations hinges on how we respond to the question discussed below, which is whether we plan to commit ourselves in the future, as we have in the past, to an absolute gold standard. If we still favor such a standard over any other available options, and if future “confidence” in our currency is based not on the stability of its purchasing power but on the consistency of its gold value, then it might be worthwhile to endure the disruption of Deflation to the extent of 5 or 10 percent. This perspective aligns with what Ricardo expressed in similar circumstances a hundred years ago.43 If, 151, on the other hand, we choose to focus on stability of the price level instead of maintaining a fixed parity with gold, then cadit quaestio.

43 See below, p. 153.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Check it out below, __A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_1__.

In any case this argument does not affect our main conclusion, that the right policy for countries of which the currency has suffered a prolonged and severe depreciation is to devaluate, and to fix the value of the currency at that figure in the neighbourhood of the existing value to which commerce and wages are adjusted.

In any case, this argument doesn't change our main conclusion: the best approach for countries whose currency has experienced a long-term and significant decline is to devalue and establish the currency's value around the current level that commerce and wages are aligned with.

3. If the gold value of a country’s currency can be increased, labour will profit by a reduced cost of living, foreign goods will be obtainable cheaper, and foreign debts fixed in terms of gold (e.g. to the United States) will be discharged with less effort.

3. If a country's currency can increase in gold value, labor will benefit from a lower cost of living, foreign goods will be available at a lower price, and foreign debts fixed in gold (e.g. to the United States) will be paid off more easily.

This argument, which is pure delusion, exercises quite as much influence as the other two. If the franc is worth more, wages, it is argued, which are paid in francs, will surely buy more, and French imports, which are paid for in francs, will be so much cheaper. No! If francs are worth more they will buy more labour as well as more goods,—that is to say, wages will fall; and the French exports, which pay for the imports, will, measured in francs, fall in value just as much as the imports. Nor will it make in the long run any difference whatever in the amount of goods the value of which England will have to transfer to America to pay her dollar debts, whether in the end sterling settles down at four dollars to152 the pound, or at its pre-war parity. The burden of this debt depends on the value of gold, in terms of which it is fixed, not on the value of sterling. It is not easy, it seems, for men to apprehend that their money is a mere intermediary, without significance in itself, which flows from one hand to another, is received and is dispensed, and disappears when its work is done from the sum of a nation’s wealth.

This argument, which is completely misguided, has just as much influence as the other two. If the franc is worth more, people claim that wages paid in francs will surely buy more, and French imports, which are paid for in francs, will be much cheaper. No! If francs are worth more, they will buy more labor as well as more goods—that is to say, wages will decrease; and the French exports, which pay for the imports, will, measured in francs, drop in value just as much as the imports. In the long run, there will be no difference in the amount of goods that England has to transfer to America to pay off her dollar debts, whether sterling settles at four dollars to 152 the pound or returns to its pre-war value. The burden of this debt depends on the value of gold, based on which it is established, not on the value of sterling. It seems difficult for people to understand that their money is just a middleman, meaningless on its own, flowing from one person to another, being received and spent, and disappearing from a nation's wealth when its purpose is fulfilled.

* * * * *

In concluding this section, let me quote on the issue between Deflation and Devaluation two classic authorities, Gibbon and Ricardo, the one to represent the imposing but false wisdom of the would-be upright statesman, the other to speak in clear tones the voice of instructed reason.

In closing this section, let me quote two classic authorities on the issue between Deflation and Devaluation: Gibbon, who represents the grand yet misguided wisdom of the would-be upright statesman, and Ricardo, who speaks with the clear voice of informed reason.

In the eleventh chapter of The Decline and Fall, Gibbon deems incredible a story of how in A.D. 274 Aurelian’s deflationary zeal to restore the integrity of the coin excited an insurrection which caused the death of 7000 soldiers. “We might naturally expect,” he says, “that the reformation of the coin should have been an action equally popular with the destruction of those obsolete accounts, which by the emperor’s order were burnt in the forum of Trajan. In an age when the principles of commerce were so imperfectly understood, the most desirable end might perhaps be effected by harsh and injudicious means; but a temporary grievance of such a nature can scarcely excite and support a serious civil war. The153 repetition of intolerable taxes, imposed either on the land or on the necessaries of life, may at last provoke those who will not or who cannot relinquish their country. But the case is far otherwise in every operation which, by whatsoever expedients, restores the just value of money.”

In the eleventh chapter of The Decline and Fall, Gibbon finds it hard to believe a story about how in CE 274, Aurelian’s push to restore the value of the coin sparked a rebellion that led to the deaths of 7,000 soldiers. “We would naturally think,” he says, “that reforming the coin would have been a popular move, much like the destruction of those outdated accounts that the emperor ordered to be burned in the forum of Trajan. In a time when the principles of commerce were poorly understood, achieving the ideal outcome might have been attempted through harsh and misguided measures; however, a temporary issue of this kind is unlikely to ignite and sustain a serious civil war. The 153 repeated intolerable taxes, imposed either on land or on essential goods, may eventually drive those who cannot or will not leave their country to revolt. But the situation is quite different with any action that restores the true value of money, regardless of the methods used.”

Rome may have understood the principles of commerce imperfectly in the third century and not perfectly in the twentieth; but that does not save her citizens from experiencing their applications. Signor Mussolini might peruse with interest the annals of Aurelian, who, “ignorant or impatient of the restraints of civil institutions,” fell by the hand of an assassin within a year of his deflation of the currency, “regretted by the army, detested by the Senate, but universally acknowledged as a warlike and fortunate prince, the useful though severe reformer of a degenerate State.”

Rome might not have fully grasped the principles of commerce in the third century or even in the twentieth, but that didn’t stop its citizens from experiencing their effects. Signor Mussolini might find it interesting to read about Aurelian, who, “ignorant or impatient of the constraints of civil institutions,” was assassinated within a year of his currency devaluation, “regretted by the army, detested by the Senate, but widely recognized as a warlike and fortunate leader, the useful yet harsh reformer of a declining State.”

Ricardo, speaking in the House of Commons on the 12th of June 1822,44 gave his opinion that: “If in the year 1819 the value of the currency had stood at 14s. for the pound note, which was the case in the year 1813, he should have thought that, on a balance of all the advantages and disadvantages of the case,154 it would have been as well to fix the currency at the then value, according to which most of the existing contracts had been made; but when the currency was within 5 per cent of its par value, he thought they had made the best selection in recurring to the old standard.”

Ricardo, speaking in the House of Commons on the 12th of June 1822,44 expressed his view that: “If in 1819 the value of the currency had been 14s. for the pound note, as it was in 1813, I would have thought that, considering all the pros and cons of the situation,154 it would have been better to set the currency at that value, since most of the existing contracts were based on it; but when the currency was within 5 percent of its par value, I believed we had made the right choice by going back to the old standard.”

44 The great debate of June 11 and 12, 1822, on Mr. Western’s Motion concerning the Resumption of Cash Payments, well illustrates, more particularly in the speeches of the opener, Mr. Western, and of the opposer, Mr. Huskisson, the regularity of the evils which follow a deflationary raising of the standard, and the unchanging antithesis between the temperaments of deflationists and devaluers, though I doubt if any present-day deflationists could make a speech at the same time so able and so unfair as Mr. Huskisson’s.

44 The significant debate on June 11 and 12, 1822, regarding Mr. Western’s Motion about the Resumption of Cash Payments clearly demonstrates, especially through the speeches of the initiator, Mr. Western, and the opponent, Mr. Huskisson, the consistent issues that arise from raising the monetary standard during deflation. It also highlights the ongoing clash between the mindsets of deflationists and those in favor of devaluation, although I question whether any modern deflationists could deliver a speech as skillful and biased as Mr. Huskisson’s.

The same is repeated in his Protection to Agriculture45 where he approves the restoration of the old standard when gold was £4 : 2s. per standard ounce, but adds that, if it had been £5 : 10s., “no measure could have been more inexpedient than to make so violent a change in all subsisting engagements.”

The same idea is expressed in his Protection to Agriculture45 where he supports bringing back the old standard when gold was £4:2s. per standard ounce, but notes that if it had been £5:10s., “there would have been no greater mistake than to make such a drastic change in all existing agreements.”

45 Works, p. 468.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Works, p. 468.

II. Stability of Prices versus Stability of Exchange.

Since, subject to the qualification of Chapter III., the rate of exchange of a country’s currency with the currency of the rest of the world (assuming for the sake of simplicity that there is only one external currency) depends on the relation between the internal price level and the external price level, it follows that the exchange cannot be stable unless both internal and external price levels remain stable. If, therefore, the external price level lies outside our control, we must submit either to our own internal price level or to our exchange being pulled about by external influences. If the external price level is unstable, we cannot keep both our own price level155 and our exchanges stable. And we are compelled to choose.

Since, according to the rules in Chapter III, the exchange rate of a country’s currency with the currency of the rest of the world (assuming, for simplicity, that there's only one foreign currency) depends on the relationship between domestic price levels and external price levels, it follows that the exchange cannot be stable unless both domestic and external price levels remain stable. If the external price level is beyond our control, we have to either accept our own domestic price level or let our exchange rate be influenced by external factors. If the external price level is unstable, we cannot maintain both our domestic price level155 and our exchange rates stable. Therefore, we are forced to make a choice.

In pre-war days, when almost the whole world was on a gold standard, we had all plumped for stability of exchange as against stability of prices, and we were ready to submit to the social consequences of a change of price level for causes quite outside our control, connected, for example, with the discovery of new gold mines in foreign countries or a change of banking policy abroad. But we submitted, partly because we did not dare trust ourselves to a less automatic (though more reasoned) policy, and partly because the price fluctuations experienced were in fact moderate. Nevertheless, there were powerful advocates of the other choice. In particular, the proposals of Professor Irving Fisher for a Compensated Dollar, amounted, unless all countries adopted the same plan, to putting into practice a preference for stability of internal price level over stability of external exchange.

In the pre-war era, when almost the entire world was using the gold standard, we all chose stability of exchange over stability of prices, and we accepted the social impacts of price level changes due to factors beyond our control, like discovering new gold mines in other countries or shifts in banking policies abroad. We went along with this, partly because we didn’t trust ourselves to a less automatic (though more thoughtful) approach, and partly because the price fluctuations we saw were actually quite moderate. However, there were strong supporters of the alternative option. Notably, Professor Irving Fisher's proposals for a Compensated Dollar essentially suggested that unless all countries adopted the same approach, it would prioritize stability of internal price levels over stability of external exchange.

The right choice is not necessarily the same for all countries. It must partly depend on the relative importance of foreign trade in the economic life of the country. Nevertheless, there does seem to be in almost every case a presumption in favour of the stability of prices, if only it can be achieved. Stability of exchange is in the nature of a convenience which adds to the efficiency and prosperity of those who are engaged in foreign trade. Stability of prices,156 on the other hand, is profoundly important for the avoidance of the various evils described in Chapter I. Contracts and business expectations, which presume a stable exchange, must be far fewer, even in a trading country such as England, than those which presume a stable level of internal prices. The main argument to the contrary seems to be that exchange stability is an easier aim to attain, since it only requires that the same standard of value should be adopted at home and abroad; whereas an internal standard, so regulated as to maintain stability in an index number of prices, is a difficult scientific innovation, never yet put into practice.

The right choice isn't necessarily the same for every country. It should partly depend on how important foreign trade is to the country's economy. However, it seems there is almost always an expectation for price stability, if it can be achieved. Stable exchange rates are convenient and enhance the efficiency and prosperity of those involved in foreign trade. On the other hand, price stability is crucial for avoiding the various problems mentioned in Chapter I. Contracts and business expectations that rely on stable exchange rates are likely to be much fewer, even in a trading nation like England, than those that assume a stable level of domestic prices. The main argument against this is that achieving exchange stability is simpler, as it only requires the same value standard to be used both at home and abroad. In contrast, creating an internal standard that maintains stability in a price index is a complex scientific challenge that hasn't been successfully implemented yet. 156

There has been an interesting example recently of a country which, more perhaps by chance than by design, has secured the advantages of a relatively stable level of internal prices at the expense of a fluctuating exchange, namely India. Public attention is so much fixed on the exchange as the test of the success of a financial policy, that the Government of India, under severe reproaches for what has happened, have not defended themselves as effectively as they might. During the boom of 1919–20, when world prices were soaring, the exchange value of the rupee was allowed to rise by successive stages, with the result that the highest level reached by the Indian index number in 1920 exceeded by only 12 per cent the average figure for 1919, whereas for England the figure was 29 per cent. The Report of the Indian Currency157 Committee, on which the Government of India acted somewhat clumsily without enough allowance for rapidly changing conditions, was avowedly influenced by the importance in such a country as India, especially in the political circumstances of that time, of avoiding a violent upward movement of internal prices. The most just criticism of the Government of India’s action, in the light of after-events, is that they went too far in attempting to raise the rupee so high as 2s. 8d.,—a rate not contemplated by the Currency Committee. Prices outside India never rose so high as to justify an exchange exceeding 2s. 3d. on the criterion of keeping Indian prices stable at the 1919 level. On the other hand, when world prices collapsed, the rupee exchange was allowed to fall with them, again with the result that the lowest point touched by the Indian index number in 1921 was only 16 per cent below the highest in 1920, whereas for England the figure was 50 per cent. The following table gives the details:

There’s been an intriguing example recently of a country that, more by chance than by design, has managed to maintain a relatively stable level of internal prices at the cost of a fluctuating exchange rate, namely India. Public focus is so intensely on the exchange as a measure of the success of financial policy that the Government of India, facing intense criticism for the situation, hasn’t defended themselves as well as they could have. During the boom of 1919–20, when global prices were skyrocketing, the exchange value of the rupee was allowed to rise in successive stages. As a result, the highest level reached by the Indian index number in 1920 was only 12 percent above the average figure for 1919, while for England it was 29 percent. The Report of the Indian Currency157 Committee, which the Government of India handled somewhat clumsily without enough consideration for rapidly changing conditions, was clearly influenced by the need in a country like India, especially given the political context of that time, to avoid a drastic upward movement of internal prices. The most valid criticism of the Indian Government's actions, in hindsight, is that they overreached in trying to raise the rupee value to 2s. 8d.—a rate not anticipated by the Currency Committee. Prices outside India didn’t rise high enough to justify an exchange exceeding 2s. 3d. if the goal was to keep Indian prices stable at the 1919 level. On the flip side, when global prices plummeted, the rupee exchange was allowed to drop with them, which resulted in the lowest point touched by the Indian index number in 1921 being only 16 percent below the highest in 1920, while for England the figure was 50 percent. The following table provides the details:

  Indian
Prices.
English
Prices.46
Value of Rupee in Sterling.
Purchasing
Power Parity.
Actual
Exchange.
Average 1919 100 100 100 100
Highest 1920 112 129 115 152
Lowest 1921   95   65   69   72
Average 1922   90   64   71   74

46 Statist.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Statist.

158

158

If the Government of India had been successful in stabilising the rupee-sterling exchange, they would necessarily have subjected India to a disastrous price fluctuation comparable to that in England. Thus the unthinking assumption, in favour of the restoration of a fixed exchange as the one thing to aim at, requires more examination than it sometimes receives.

If the Government of India had managed to stabilize the rupee-sterling exchange rate, it would have inevitably exposed India to a harmful price fluctuation similar to that in England. Therefore, the unexamined belief that restoring a fixed exchange rate is the ultimate goal needs more scrutiny than it often gets.

Especially is this the case if the prospect that a majority of countries will adopt the same standard is still remote. When by adopting the gold standard we could achieve stability of exchange with almost the whole world, whilst any other standard would have appeared as a solitary eccentricity, the solid advantages of certainty and convenience supported the conservative preference for gold. Nevertheless, even so, the convenience of traders and the primitive passion for solid metal might not, I think, have been adequate to preserve the dynasty of gold, if it had not been for another, half-accidental circumstance; namely, that for many years past gold had afforded not only a stable exchange but, on the whole, a stable price level also. In fact, the choice between stable exchanges and stable prices had not presented itself as an acute dilemma. And when, prior to the development of the South African mines, we seemed to be faced with a continuously falling price level, the fierceness of the bimetallic controversy testified to the discontent provoked as soon as the existing standard appeared seriously incompatible with the stability of prices.

This is especially true if the likelihood of most countries adopting the same standard still seems distant. When adopting the gold standard allowed for stable exchanges with nearly the entire world, while any other standard would have seemed like an oddity, the clear benefits of reliability and convenience bolstered the traditional preference for gold. However, I believe that even so, the convenience for traders and the basic desire for solid metal may not have been enough to keep gold dominant if it weren't for another somewhat random factor; specifically, that for many years gold had provided not only stable exchanges but also, overall, a stable price level. In reality, choosing between stable exchanges and stable prices had not seemed like a pressing issue. And when, before the discovery of the South African mines, we appeared to be facing a steadily declining price level, the intensity of the bimetallic debate reflected the dissatisfaction that arose as soon as the existing standard seemed seriously at odds with price stability.

159

159

Indeed, it is doubtful whether the pre-war system for regulating the international flow of gold would have been capable of dealing with such large or sudden divergencies between the price levels of different countries as have occurred lately. The fault of the pre-war régime, under which the rates of exchange between a country and the outside world were fixed, and the internal price level had to adjust itself thereto (i.e. was chiefly governed by external influences), was that it was too slow and insensitive in its mode of operation. The fault of the post-war régime, under which the price level mainly depends on internal influences (i.e. internal currency and credit policy) and the rates of exchange with the outside world have to adjust themselves thereto, is that it is too rapid in its effect and over-sensitive, with the result that it may act violently for merely transitory causes. Nevertheless, when the fluctuations are large and sudden, a quick reaction is necessary for the maintenance of equilibrium; and the necessity for quick reaction has been one of the factors which have rendered the pre-war method inapplicable to post-war conditions, and have made every one nervous of proclaiming a final fixation of the exchange.

Indeed, it's questionable whether the system for managing the international gold flow before the war could handle the recent large and sudden differences in price levels between countries. The issue with the pre-war regime, where exchange rates were fixed with the outside world and internal prices had to adjust accordingly (i.e., were mainly influenced by external factors), was that it was too slow and unresponsive. The problem with the post-war regime, where internal factors (i.e., domestic currency and credit policy) primarily determine the price level and exchange rates must adjust to that, is that it reacts too quickly and is overly sensitive, which can lead to drastic changes for only temporary reasons. Still, when fluctuations are significant and abrupt, a rapid response is needed to maintain balance; this necessity for quick action has made the pre-war approach unsuitable for post-war conditions and has caused anxiety about establishing a permanent exchange rate.

We are familiar with the causal chain along which the pre-war method reached its result. If gold flowed out of the country’s central reserves, this modified discount policy and the creation of credit, thus affecting the demand for, and hence the price of,160 the class of goods most sensitive to the ease of credit, and gradually, through the price of these goods, spreading its influence to the prices of goods generally, including those which enter into international trade, until at the new level of price foreign goods began to look dear at home and domestic goods cheap abroad, and the adverse balance was redressed. But this process might take months to work itself out. Nowadays, the gold reserves might be dangerously depleted before the compensating forces had time to operate. Moreover, the movement of the rate of interest up or down sometimes had more effect in attracting foreign capital or encouraging investment abroad than in influencing home prices. Where the disequilibrium was purely seasonal, this was an unqualified advantage; for it was much better that foreign funds should ebb and flow between the slack and the busy seasons than that prices should go up and down. But where it was due to more permanent causes, the adjustment even before the war might be imperfect; for the stimulus to foreign loans, whilst restoring the balance for the time being, might obscure the real seriousness of the situation, and enable a country to live beyond its resources for a considerable time at the risk of ultimate default.

We understand the chain of events that led to the pre-war method achieving its outcome. When gold left the country’s central reserves, it changed the discount policy and created credit, which affected the demand for, and therefore the price of, 160 the types of goods that were most sensitive to easy credit. Gradually, through the prices of these goods, this influence spread to the prices of goods overall, including those involved in international trade, until, at the new price level, foreign goods appeared expensive at home while domestic goods seemed cheap abroad, correcting the negative balance. However, this process could take months. Nowadays, the gold reserves could be dangerously low before the balancing forces had a chance to take effect. Additionally, changes in interest rates sometimes had a greater impact on attracting foreign capital or encouraging investment abroad than on influencing domestic prices. Where the imbalance was simply seasonal, this was a clear benefit; it was much better for foreign funds to fluctuate between slow and busy seasons than for prices to rise and fall. But when the imbalance was due to more permanent factors, even before the war, the adjustment could be inadequate. The push for foreign loans, while temporarily restoring balance, might hide the true seriousness of the situation, allowing a country to live beyond its means for a significant time while risking eventual default.

Compare with this the instantaneous effects of the post-war method. If at the existing rate of exchange the amount of sterling offered in the161 exchange market during the course of the morning exceeds the amount of dollars offered, there is no gold available for export at a fixed price to bridge the gulf. Consequently the dollar rate of exchange must move until at the new rate the offerings of each of the two currencies in exchange for one another exactly balance in amount. But it is the inevitable result of this that within half an hour the relative prices of commodities entering into English-American trade, such as cotton and electrolytic copper, have adjusted themselves accordingly. Unless the American prices move to meet them half-way, the English prices immediately rise correspondent to the movement of the exchange.

Compare this with the immediate effects of the post-war method. If, at the current exchange rate, the amount of sterling available in the161 exchange market this morning is greater than the amount of dollars offered, there's no gold available for export at a fixed price to close the gap. As a result, the dollar exchange rate has to adjust until the amounts of each currency offered in exchange for one another are perfectly balanced. This adjustment inevitably leads to a situation where, within half an hour, the relative prices of commodities involved in English-American trade, like cotton and electrolytic copper, have adjusted themselves accordingly. Unless American prices adjust to meet them halfway, English prices will immediately rise in line with the movement of the exchange.

This means that relative prices can be knocked about by the most fleeting influences of politics and of sentiment, and by the periodic pressure of seasonal trades. But it also means that the post-war method is a most rapid and powerful corrective of real disequilibria in the balance of international payments arising from whatever causes, and a wonderful preventive in the way of countries which are inclined to spend abroad beyond their resources.

This means that relative prices can be influenced by temporary political factors and public sentiment, as well as the regular fluctuations of seasonal trades. However, it also means that the post-war method is a fast and effective way to correct real imbalances in international payment balances that arise from various causes, serving as a great deterrent for countries that tend to overspend abroad beyond their means.

Thus when there are violent shocks to the pre-existing equilibrium between the internal and external price-levels, the pre-war method is likely to break down in practice, simply because it cannot bring about the re-adjustment of internal prices quick enough. Theoretically, of course, the pre-war method must162 be able to make itself effective sooner or later, provided the movement of gold is allowed to continue without restriction, until the inflation or deflation of prices has taken place to the necessary extent. But in practice there is usually a limit to the rate and to the amount by which the actual currency or the metallic backing for it can be allowed to flow abroad. If the supply of money or credit is reduced faster than social and business arrangements allow prices to fall, intolerable inconveniences result. Perhaps some of the incidents of debasement of the coinage which are sprinkled through the currency history of the late Middle Ages were really due to a similar cause. Prior to the discovery of the New World the precious metals were, over a long period, becoming progressively scarcer in Europe through natural wastage in the absence of adequate new supplies, and the drain to the East; with the result that from time to time the price level in England (for example) would be established on too high a level in relation to European prices. The resulting tendency of silver to flow abroad, being accentuated perhaps by some special temporary cause, would give rise to complaints of a “scarcity of currency,” which really means an outflow of money faster than social organisation permits prices to fall. No doubt some of the debasements were helped by the fact that they profited incidentally a necessitous Exchequer. But they may have been, nevertheless,163 the best available expedient for meeting the currency problem.47 We shall look on Edward III.’s debasements of sterling money with a more tolerant eye if we regard them as a method of carrying into effect a preference for stability of internal prices over stability of external exchanges, celebrating that monarch as an enlightened forerunner of Professor Irving Fisher in advocacy of the “compensated dollar,” only more happy than the latter in his opportunities to carry theory into practice.

Thus, when there are sudden shocks to the balance between internal and external price levels, the pre-war method is likely to fail in practice simply because it can’t readjust internal prices quick enough. Theoretically, the pre-war method should eventually be effective, as long as the flow of gold is allowed to continue unrestricted until prices inflate or deflate to the required extent. However, in practice, there’s usually a limit to how quickly and how much the actual currency or its metallic backing can be allowed to leave the country. If the supply of money or credit shrinks faster than social and business structures allow for prices to drop, serious issues arise. Some incidents of coin debasement throughout the currency history of the late Middle Ages may have actually been caused by similar factors. Before the discovery of the New World, precious metals were gradually becoming rarer in Europe due to natural wastage without adequate new supplies and the drain to the East. As a result, from time to time, the price level in England (for example) would be set at too high a level compared to European prices. This would lead to a tendency for silver to flow abroad, possibly intensified by some temporary factor, causing complaints about a “scarcity of currency,” which really meant money was leaving faster than social organization allowed for prices to drop. While some debasements likely profited a desperate Exchequer, they may still have been the best solution to the currency problem. We might view Edward III’s debasements of sterling money more sympathetically if we see them as a way to prioritize the stability of internal prices over the stability of external exchanges, celebrating that monarch as an enlightened precursor to Professor Irving Fisher in advocating for the “compensated dollar,” only having better chances to put the theory into practice.

47 Cf. Hawtrey, Currency and Credit, chap. xvii.

47 Cf. Hawtrey, Currency and Credit, chap. xvii.

The reader should notice, further, the different parts played by discount policy under the one régime and under the other. With the pre-war method discount policy is a vital part of the process for restoring equilibrium between internal and external prices. With the post-war method it is not equally indispensable, since the fluctuation of the exchanges can bring about equilibrium without its aid;—though it remains, of course, as an instrument for influencing the internal price level and through this the exchanges, if we desire to establish either the one or the other at a different level from that which would have prevailed otherwise.

The reader should also notice the different roles that discount policy plays in each system. With the pre-war approach, discount policy is essential for balancing internal and external prices. With the post-war approach, it’s not as crucial, since exchange rate fluctuations can achieve balance on their own; however, it still serves as a tool for influencing internal price levels and, in turn, the exchanges, if we want to set either at a level different from what would have occurred otherwise.

III. The Restoration of a Gold Standard.

Our conclusions up to this point are, therefore, that, when stability of the internal price level and stability of the external exchanges are incompatible,164 the former is generally preferable; and that on occasions when the dilemma is acute, the preservation of the former at the expense of the latter is, fortunately perhaps, the line of least resistance.

Our conclusions so far are that when maintaining the stability of internal prices and the stability of external exchanges are in conflict, the former is usually preferable. And in situations where the conflict is especially intense, it's fortunate that opting to preserve internal price stability at the cost of external exchanges is typically the easiest choice.

The restoration of the gold standard (whether at the pre-war parity or at some other rate) certainly will not give us complete stability of internal prices and can only give us complete stability of the external exchanges if all other countries also restore the gold standard. The advisability of restoring it depends, therefore, on whether, on the whole, it will give us the best working compromise obtainable between the two ideals.

The reinstatement of the gold standard (whether at the pre-war rate or another) definitely won’t guarantee complete stability of internal prices and can only provide total stability in external exchanges if other countries also reinstate the gold standard. So, the decision to restore it relies on whether, overall, it will offer the best practical compromise between the two ideals.

The advocates of gold, as against a more scientific standard, base their cause on the double contention, that in practice gold has provided and will provide a reasonably stable standard of value, and that in practice, since governing authorities lack wisdom as often as not, a managed currency will, sooner or later, come to grief. Conservatism and scepticism join arms—as they often do. Perhaps superstition comes in too; for gold still enjoys the prestige of its smell and colour.

The supporters of gold, as opposed to a more scientific standard, argue that, in reality, gold has offered and will continue to offer a fairly stable value standard, and that, since governments often make poor decisions, a managed currency will eventually fail. Conservatism and skepticism often team up in this case. Maybe superstition plays a role too; after all, gold still has the allure of its scent and appearance.

The considerable success with which gold maintained its stability of value in the changing world of the nineteenth century was certainly remarkable. I have applauded it in the first chapter. After the discoveries of Australia and California it began to depreciate dangerously, and before the exploitation165 of South Africa it began to appreciate dangerously. Yet in each case it righted itself and retained its reputation.

The significant success of gold in keeping its value stable during the changing world of the nineteenth century was truly impressive. I praised this in the first chapter. After the discoveries in Australia and California, it started to lose value dangerously, and before the exploitation of South Africa, it began to gain value dangerously. However, in both cases, it bounced back and maintained its reputation.

But the conditions of the future are not those of the past. We have no sufficient ground for expecting the continuance of the special conditions which preserved a sort of balance before the war. For what are the underlying explanations of the good behaviour of gold during the nineteenth century?

But the conditions of the future aren't the same as those of the past. We have no solid reason to expect that the special conditions that maintained a kind of balance before the war will continue. So, what are the underlying reasons for gold's stable performance during the nineteenth century?

In the first place, it happened that progress in the discovery of gold mines roughly kept pace with progress in other directions—a correspondence which was not altogether a matter of chance, because the progress of that period, since it was characterised by the gradual opening up and exploitation of the world’s surface, not unnaturally brought to light pari passu the remoter deposits of gold. But this stage of history is now almost at an end. A quarter of a century has passed by since the discovery of an important deposit. Material progress is more dependent now on the growth of scientific and technical knowledge, of which the application to gold-mining may be intermittent. Years may elapse without great improvement in the methods of extracting gold; and then the genius of a chemist may realise past dreams and forgotten hoaxes, transmuting base into precious like Subtle, or extracting gold from sea-water as in the Bubble. Gold is liable to be either too dear or too cheap. In either case, it is too much to expect166 that a succession of accidents will keep the metal steady.

First of all, it turned out that the discovery of gold mines progressed roughly alongside advances in other areas—a connection that wasn’t entirely coincidental, since the advancements of that time, marked by the gradual exploration and utilization of the Earth's surface, naturally revealed distant gold deposits. However, this phase of history is almost over now. It’s been twenty-five years since a significant new deposit was discovered. Nowadays, material progress relies more on the advancement of scientific and technical knowledge, with its application to gold mining being sporadic. Years can go by without major improvements in gold extraction methods; then, a brilliant chemist might bring past dreams and forgotten schemes to life, turning base metals into gold like Subtle, or extracting gold from seawater as in the Bubble. Gold can often be either too expensive or too cheap. In either scenario, it's unrealistic to expect that a series of random events will stabilize the value of the metal.

But there was another type of influence which used to aid stability. The value of gold has not depended on the policy or the decisions of a single body of men; and a sufficient proportion of the supply has been able to find its way, without any flooding of the market, into the Arts or into the hoards of Asia for its marginal value to be governed by a steady psychological estimation of the metal in relation to other things. This is what is meant by saying that gold has “intrinsic value” and is free from the dangers of a “managed” currency. The independent variety of the influences determining the value of gold has been in itself a steadying influence. The arbitrary and variable character of the proportion of gold reserves to liabilities maintained by many of the note-issuing banks of the world, so far from introducing an incalculable factor, was an element of stability. For when gold was relatively abundant and flowed towards them, it was absorbed by their allowing their ratio of gold reserves to rise slightly; and when it was relatively scarce, the fact that they had no intention of ever utilising their gold reserves for any practical purpose, permitted most of them to view with equanimity a moderate weakening of their proportion. A great part of the flow of South African gold between the end of the Boer War and 1914 was able to find its way into the central gold reserves167 of European and other countries with the minimum effect on prices.

But there was another kind of influence that helped maintain stability. The value of gold hasn’t relied on the policies or decisions of a single group of people; a good amount of the supply has been able to enter the market steadily, without flooding it, either into the Arts or into the hoards of Asia, which means its marginal value is determined by a consistent psychological assessment of the metal in relation to other things. This is what people mean when they say gold has “intrinsic value” and is protected from the risks of a “managed” currency. The independent variety of influences that determine the value of gold has, in itself, been a stabilizing factor. The random and changeable nature of the ratio of gold reserves to liabilities maintained by many of the note-issuing banks around the world, instead of introducing an unpredictable factor, served as a source of stability. When gold was relatively plentiful and flowed toward them, they absorbed it by allowing their gold reserve ratios to rise slightly; and when it was relatively scarce, the fact that they had no plans to use their gold reserves for any specific purpose allowed most of them to remain calm about a moderate decline in their ratios. A significant amount of South African gold between the end of the Boer War and 1914 was able to go into the central gold reserves167 of European and other countries with minimal impact on prices.

But the war has effected a great change. Gold itself has become a “managed” currency. The West, as well as the East, has learnt to hoard gold; but the motives of the United States are not those of India. Now that most countries have abandoned the gold standard, the supply of the metal would, if the chief user of it restricted its holdings to its real needs, prove largely redundant. The United States has not been able to let gold fall to its “natural” value, because it could not face the resulting depreciation of its standard. It has been driven, therefore, to the costly policy of burying in the vaults of Washington what the miners of the Rand have laboriously brought to the surface. Consequently gold now stands at an “artificial” value, the future course of which almost entirely depends on the policy of the Federal Reserve Board of the United States. The value of gold is no longer the resultant of the chance gifts of Nature and the judgment of numerous authorities and individuals acting independently. Even if other countries gradually return to a gold basis, the position will not be greatly changed. The tendency to employ some variant of the gold-exchange standard and the probably permanent disappearance of gold from the pockets of the people are likely to mean that the strictly necessary gold reserves of the Central Banks of the gold-standard countries will fall168 considerably short of the available supplies. The actual value of gold will depend, therefore, on the policy of three or four of the most powerful Central Banks, whether they act independently or in unison. If, on the other hand, pre-war conventions about the use of gold in reserves and in circulation were to be restored—which is, in my opinion, the much less probable alternative—there might be, as Professor Cassel has predicted, a serious shortage of gold leading to a progressive appreciation in its value.

But the war has caused a major change. Gold itself has become a "managed" currency. Both the West and the East have learned to hoard gold; however, the motives of the United States differ from those of India. Now that most countries have dropped the gold standard, if the main user limited its holdings to what it truly needs, much of the metal would be largely unnecessary. The United States has not been able to let gold reach its "natural" value, as it couldn't handle the resulting depreciation of its standard. Consequently, it has resorted to the expensive policy of storing what the miners from the Rand have worked hard to extract. As a result, gold is now at an "artificial" value, the future trajectory of which mostly hinges on the policy of the Federal Reserve Board of the United States. The value of gold is no longer determined by the random gifts of nature and the judgments of various authorities and individuals acting independently. Even if other countries gradually revert to a gold basis, the situation won’t change much. The trend toward using some form of a gold-exchange standard and the likely permanent removal of gold from people's pockets will probably mean that the strictly necessary gold reserves of the Central Banks in gold-standard countries will fall significantly short of the available supplies. The actual value of gold will therefore depend on the decisions of three or four of the most powerful Central Banks, whether they act alone or together. On the other hand, if pre-war agreements about the use of gold in reserves and circulation were reinstated—which I believe is the much less likely alternative—there could be, as Professor Cassel has predicted, a serious gold shortage leading to a gradual increase in its value.

Nor must we neglect the possibility of a partial demonetisation of gold by the United States through a closing of its mints to further receipts of gold. The present policy of the United States in accepting unlimited imports of gold can be justified, perhaps, as a temporary measure, intended to preserve tradition and to strengthen confidence through a transitional period. But, looked at as a permanent arrangement, it could hardly be judged otherwise than as a foolish expense. If the Federal Reserve Board intends to maintain the value of the dollar at a level which is irrespective of the inflow or outflow of gold, what object is there in continuing to accept at the mints gold which is not wanted, yet costs a heavy price? If the United States mints were to be closed to gold, everything, except the actual price of the metal, could continue precisely as before.

We also shouldn't overlook the possibility that the United States might partially demonetize gold by stopping its mints from accepting any more gold. The current policy of the United States to accept unlimited gold imports might be justifiable as a temporary measure to uphold tradition and build confidence during a transitional period. However, if we consider it a permanent solution, it would likely be seen as a wasteful expense. If the Federal Reserve Board aims to keep the dollar's value stable, regardless of gold's movement in or out, then what's the point of continuing to accept gold at the mints when it's not needed and comes with a heavy cost? If the U.S. mints were closed to gold, everything else could continue exactly as it is, except for the actual price of the metal.

Confidence in the future stability of the value of gold depends therefore on the United States being169 foolish enough to go on accepting gold which it does not want, and wise enough, having accepted it, to maintain it at a fixed value. This double event might be realised through the collaboration of a public understanding nothing with a Federal Reserve Board understanding everything. But the position is precarious; and not very attractive to any country which is still in a position to choose what its future standard is to be.

Confidence in the future stability of gold's value relies on the United States being169 naïve enough to keep accepting gold that it doesn’t need, and smart enough, once it has accepted it, to maintain its value at a fixed rate. This scenario could happen through a public that knows little and a Federal Reserve Board that knows everything working together. However, the situation is unstable; it’s not very appealing for any country that still has a choice about what its future standard should be.

This discussion of the prospects of the stability of gold has partly answered by anticipation the second principal argument in favour of the restoration of an unqualified gold standard, namely that this is the only way of avoiding the dangers of a “managed” currency.

This discussion about the stability of gold has somewhat addressed the second main argument for restoring a pure gold standard, which is that it’s the only way to avoid the risks associated with a “managed” currency.

It is natural, after what we have experienced, that prudent people should desiderate a standard of value which is independent of Finance Ministers and State Banks. The present state of affairs has allowed to the ignorance and frivolity of statesmen an ample opportunity of bringing about ruinous consequences in the economic field. It is felt that the general level of economic and financial education amongst statesmen and bankers is hardly such as to render innovations feasible or safe; that, in fact, a chief object of stabilising the exchanges is to strap down Ministers of Finance.

It’s only natural, after everything we've been through, that sensible people want a standard of value that isn’t controlled by Finance Ministers and State Banks. The current situation has given clueless and careless politicians plenty of chances to create disastrous effects in the economy. It seems that the overall level of economic and financial knowledge among politicians and bankers is not high enough to make changes practical or secure; in fact, one of the main goals of stabilizing the exchanges is to restrict Finance Ministers.

These are reasonable grounds of hesitation. But the experience on which they are based is by no means170 fair to the capacities of statesmen and bankers. The non-metallic standards, of which we have experience, have been anything rather than scientific experiments coolly carried out. They have been a last resort, involuntarily adopted, as a result of war or inflationary taxation, when the State finances were already broken or the situation out of hand. Naturally in these circumstances such practices have been the accompaniment and the prelude of disaster. But we cannot argue from this to what can be achieved in normal times. I do not see that the regulation of the standard of value is essentially more difficult than many other objects of less social necessity which we attain successfully.

These are valid reasons for hesitation. However, the experiences they’re based on don’t accurately reflect the abilities of politicians and bankers. The non-metallic standards we’ve encountered have been anything but scientific experiments conducted calmly. They were a last resort, adopted involuntarily due to war or inflationary taxation, when government finances were already in disarray or the situation was out of control. Naturally, in these situations, such practices led to disaster. But we can’t use this to judge what can be achieved in normal times. I don't believe that regulating the standard of value is fundamentally more difficult than many other less critical objectives that we manage successfully.

If, indeed, a providence watched over gold, or if Nature had provided us with a stable standard ready-made, I would not, in an attempt after some slight improvement, hand over the management to the possible weakness or ignorance of Boards and Governments. But this is not the situation. We have no ready-made standard. Experience has shown that in emergencies Ministers of Finance cannot be strapped down. And—most important of all—in the modern world of paper currency and bank credit there is no escape from a “managed” currency, whether we wish it or not;—convertibility into gold will not alter the fact that the value of gold itself depends on the policy of the Central Banks.

If there really was a higher power looking out for gold, or if Nature had given us a stable standard that was already made, I wouldn't need to leave the management to the potential weaknesses or lack of knowledge of Boards and Governments while trying to make some small improvements. But that's not the case. We don’t have a ready-made standard. Experience has shown that during emergencies, Finance Ministers can't be restrained. And—most importantly—in today's world of paper money and bank credit, we can't avoid a "managed" currency, whether we like it or not; being convertible to gold won’t change the fact that the value of gold itself relies on the policies of the Central Banks.

It is worth while to pause a moment over the last171 sentence. It differs significantly from the doctrine of gold reserves which we learnt and taught before the war. We used to assume that no Central Bank would be so extravagant as to keep more gold than it required or so imprudent as to keep less. From time to time gold would flow out into the circulation or for export abroad; experience showed that the quantity required on these occasions bore some rough proportion to the Central Bank’s liabilities; a decidedly higher proportion than this would be fixed on to provide for contingencies and to inspire confidence; and the creation of credit would be regulated largely by reference to the maintenance of this proportion. The Bank of England, for example, would allow itself to be swayed by the tides of gold, permitting the inflowing and outflowing streams to produce their “natural” consequences unchecked by any ideas as to preventing the effect on prices. Already before the war, the system was becoming precarious by reason of its artificiality. The “proportion” was by the lapse of time losing its relation to the facts and had become largely conventional. Some other figure, greater or less, would have done just as well.48 The War broke down the convention; for the withdrawal of gold from actual circulation destroyed one of the elements of reality lying behind the convention, and the suspension of convertibility172 destroyed the other. It would have been absurd to regulate the bank rate by reference to a “proportion” which had lost all its significance; and in the course of the past ten years a new policy has been evolved. The bank rate is now employed, however incompletely and experimentally, to regulate the expansion and deflation of credit in the interests of business stability and the steadiness of prices. In so far as it is employed to procure stability of the dollar exchange, where this is inconsistent with stability of internal prices, we have a relic of pre-war policy and a compromise between discrepant aims.

It's worth taking a moment to think about the last171 sentence. It’s quite different from the gold reserve concept we learned and taught before the war. We used to believe that no Central Bank would be so wasteful as to keep more gold than it needed, or so reckless as to keep less. Occasionally, gold would flow into circulation or be exported; our experience showed that the amount needed on these occasions roughly matched the Central Bank’s liabilities. A noticeably higher amount would be set aside to cover unexpected situations and to build confidence; and the creation of credit would largely depend on maintaining this ratio. The Bank of England, for example, would let itself be influenced by gold flows, allowing the incoming and outgoing streams to have their “natural” effects without trying to control the impact on prices. Even before the war, the system was becoming shaky due to its artificial nature. The “proportion” was losing its relevance over time and had become mostly conventional. Any other number, whether higher or lower, would have worked just as well. The war shattered this convention; the withdrawal of gold from actual circulation eliminated one key element of reality supporting the convention, and the suspension of convertibility172 took away the other. It would have been ridiculous to set the bank rate based on a “proportion” that had lost all meaning; and over the past decade, a new policy has developed. The bank rate is now used, even if imperfectly and as an experiment, to manage the expansion and contraction of credit with the goal of stabilizing business and keeping prices steady. To the extent it’s used to achieve stability in the dollar exchange, even when that conflicts with internal price stability, we see a leftover from pre-war policies and a compromise between conflicting goals.

48 Vide, for what I wrote about this in 1914, The Economic Journal, xxiv. p. 621.

48 See, for what I wrote about this in 1914, The Economic Journal, xxiv. p. 621.

Those who advocate the return to a gold standard do not always appreciate along what different lines our actual practice has been drifting. If we restore the gold standard, are we to return also to the pre-war conceptions of bank-rate, allowing the tides of gold to play what tricks they like with the internal price-level, and abandoning the attempt to moderate the disastrous influence of the credit-cycle on the stability of prices and employment? Or are we to continue and develop the experimental innovations of our present policy, ignoring the “bank ratio” and, if necessary, allowing unmoved a piling up of gold reserves far beyond our requirements or their depletion far below them?

Those who push for a return to a gold standard don’t always realize how far we've strayed from our current practices. If we go back to the gold standard, are we also going to revert to pre-war ideas about interest rates, letting the flow of gold mess with our internal price levels and giving up on efforts to curb the negative effects of credit cycles on price and job stability? Or will we continue to build on the experimental changes of our current policy, disregarding the “bank ratio” and, if needed, allowing our gold reserves to grow well beyond what we need or shrink far below that level?

In truth, the gold standard is already a barbarous relic. All of us, from the Governor of the Bank of England downwards, are now primarily interested in173 preserving the stability of business, prices, and employment, and are not likely, when the choice is forced on us, deliberately to sacrifice these to the out-worn dogma, which had its value once, of £3 : 17 : 10½ per ounce. Advocates of the ancient standard do not observe how remote it now is from the spirit and the requirements of the age. A regulated non-metallic standard has slipped in unnoticed. It exists. Whilst the economists dozed, the academic dream of a hundred years, doffing its cap and gown, clad in paper rags, has crept into the real world by means of the bad fairies—always so much more potent than the good—the wicked Ministers of Finance.

Honestly, the gold standard is just an outdated concept now. Everyone, from the Governor of the Bank of England on down, is focused on maintaining the stability of businesses, prices, and jobs, and when it comes down to it, we’re not going to intentionally compromise these for an old belief that once had value, like the £3 : 17 : 10½ per ounce. Supporters of the old standard don’t seem to realize how distant it has become from the needs and spirit of our time. A regulated non-metallic standard has quietly taken its place. It exists. While economists were asleep, the academic dream that’s been around for a century, now dressed in paper scraps, has slowly entered reality through the bad influences—always stronger than the good ones—represented by the unscrupulous Finance Ministers.

For these reasons enlightened advocates of the restoration of gold, such as Mr. Hawtrey, do not welcome it as the return of a “natural” currency, and intend, quite decidedly, that it shall be a “managed” one. They allow gold back only as a constitutional monarch, shorn of his ancient despotic powers and compelled to accept the advice of a Parliament of Banks. The adoption of the ideas present in the minds of those who drafted the Genoa Resolutions on Currency is an essential condition of Mr. Hawtrey’s adherence to gold. He contemplates “the practice of continuous co-operation among central banks of issue” (Res. 3), and an international convention, based on a gold exchange standard, and designed “with a view to preventing undue fluctuations174 in the purchasing power of gold” (Res. 11).49 But he is not in favour of resuming the gold standard irrespective of “whether the difficulties in regard to the future purchasing power of gold have been provided against or not.” “It is not easy,” he admits, “to promote international action, and should it fail, the wisest course for the time being might be to concentrate on the stabilisation of sterling in terms of commodities, rather than tie the pound to a metal, the vagaries of which cannot be foreseen.”50

For these reasons, enlightened supporters of bringing back gold, like Mr. Hawtrey, don’t see it as a return to a “natural” currency, and they firmly believe it should be a “managed” one. They only allow gold back as a constitutional monarch, stripped of its ancient despotic powers and required to follow the advice of a Parliament of Banks. Adopting the ideas from those who created the Genoa Resolutions on Currency is a key condition for Mr. Hawtrey’s support of gold. He envisions “the practice of continuous cooperation among central banks of issue” (Res. 3), and an international agreement based on a gold exchange standard, aimed at “preventing undue fluctuations in the purchasing power of gold” (Res. 11). But he is not in favor of resuming the gold standard regardless of “whether the difficulties regarding the future purchasing power of gold have been addressed or not.” “It is not easy,” he acknowledges, “to promote international action, and if that fails, the best plan for now might be to focus on stabilizing sterling in relation to commodities, rather than tying the pound to a metal whose unpredictabilities cannot be anticipated.”

49 Monetary Reconstruction, p. 132.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Monetary Reconstruction, p. 132.

50 Loc. cit. p. 22.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ p. 22.

It is natural to ask, in face of advocacy of this kind, why it is necessary to drag in gold at all. Mr. Hawtrey lays no stress on the obvious support for his compromise, namely the force of sentiment and tradition, and the preference of Englishmen for shearing a monarch of his powers rather than of his head. But he adduces three other reasons: (1) that gold is required as a liquid reserve for the settlement of international balances of indebtedness; (2) that it enables an experiment to be made without cutting adrift from the old system; and (3) that the vested interests of gold producers must be considered. These objects, however, are so largely attained by my own suggestions in the following chapter, that I need not dwell on them here.

It’s understandable to wonder, when faced with this kind of argument, why we even need to involve gold at all. Mr. Hawtrey doesn’t emphasize the clear support for his compromise, like the power of sentiment and tradition, or the preference of English people for stripping a monarch of his power rather than his life. But he provides three other reasons: (1) gold is needed as a liquid reserve for settling international debts; (2) it allows for an experiment to be conducted without completely abandoning the old system; and (3) we have to take into account the interests of gold producers. However, these goals are largely addressed by my own suggestions in the following chapter, so I don’t need to elaborate on them here.

On the other hand, I see grave objections to reinstating gold in the pious hope that international co-operation will keep it in order. With the existing175 distribution of the world’s gold, the reinstatement of the gold standard means, inevitably, that we surrender the regulation of our price level and the handling of the credit cycle to the Federal Reserve Board of the United States. Even if the most intimate and cordial co-operation is established between the Board and the Bank of England, the preponderance of power will still belong to the former. The Board will be in a position to disregard the Bank. But if the Bank disregard the Board, it will render itself liable to be flooded with, or depleted of, gold, as the case may be. Moreover, we can be confident beforehand that there will be much suspicion amongst Americans (for that is their disposition) of any supposed attempt on the part of the Bank of England to dictate their policy or to influence American discount rates in the interests of Great Britain. We must also be prepared to incur our share of the vain expense of bottling up the world’s redundant gold.

On the other hand, I see serious concerns about bringing back gold with the hopeful expectation that international cooperation will keep it in check. With the current175 distribution of the world’s gold, restoring the gold standard means that we will inevitably give up control over our price levels and the management of the credit cycle to the Federal Reserve Board of the United States. Even if a close and friendly cooperation is established between the Board and the Bank of England, the power will still rest mostly with the former. The Board will be able to ignore the Bank. If the Bank chooses to ignore the Board, it risks being overwhelmed or drained of gold, depending on the situation. Moreover, we can be sure that there will be a lot of skepticism among Americans (as is their nature) about any perceived attempt by the Bank of England to dictate their policies or influence American discount rates for the benefit of Great Britain. We must also be ready to face our share of the pointless expense of containing the world's excess gold.

It would be rash in present circumstances to surrender our freedom of action to the Federal Reserve Board of the United States. We do not yet possess sufficient experience of its capacity to act in times of stress with courage and independence. The Federal Reserve Board is striving to free itself from the pressure of sectional interests; but we are not yet certain that it will wholly succeed. It is still liable to be overwhelmed by the impetuosity of a cheap money campaign. A suspicion of British influence176 would, so far from strengthening the Board, greatly weaken its resistance to popular clamour. Nor is it certain, quite apart from weakness or mistakes, that the simultaneous application of the same policy will always be in the interests of both countries. The development of the credit cycle and the state of business may sometimes be widely different on the two sides of the Atlantic.

It would be unwise in the current situation to give up our freedom to act to the Federal Reserve Board of the United States. We still don't have enough experience with its ability to act courageously and independently during tough times. The Federal Reserve Board is working to break free from the influence of specific interests, but we aren’t sure it will be completely successful. It could still be swayed by the urgency of a cheap money campaign. A fear of British influence would, rather than strengthen the Board, actually weaken its ability to stand up to public pressure. Additionally, it's not guaranteed that applying the same policy simultaneously will always benefit both countries. The ups and downs of the credit cycle and the state of business may sometimes be very different on either side of the Atlantic.

Therefore, since I regard the stability of prices, credit, and employment as of paramount importance, and since I feel no confidence that an old-fashioned gold standard will even give us the modicum of stability that it used to give, I reject the policy of restoring the gold standard on pre-war lines. At the same time I doubt the wisdom of attempting a “managed” gold standard jointly with the United States, on the lines recommended by Mr. Hawtrey, because it retains too many of the disadvantages of the old system without its advantages, and because it would make us too dependent on the policy and on the wishes of the Federal Reserve Board.

Therefore, since I consider the stability of prices, credit, and employment to be extremely important, and since I have no faith that an outdated gold standard will even provide us with the minimal stability it once did, I reject the idea of restoring the gold standard as it was before the war. At the same time, I question the wisdom of trying a "managed" gold standard in partnership with the United States, as suggested by Mr. Hawtrey, because it keeps too many of the drawbacks of the old system while lacking its benefits, and it would make us too reliant on the policies and decisions of the Federal Reserve Board.


A sound constructive scheme must provide—if it is to satisfy the arguments and the analysis of this book:

A noise constructive plan must provide—if it is to meet the arguments and analysis of this book:

I. A method for regulating the supply of currency and credit with a view to maintaining, so far as possible, the stability of the internal price level; and

I. A way to manage the supply of money and credit to keep, as much as possible, the stability of the internal price level; and

II. A method for regulating the supply of foreign exchange so as to avoid purely temporary fluctuations, caused by seasonal or other influences and not due to a lasting disturbance in the relation between the internal and the external price level.

II. A way to manage the supply of foreign exchange to prevent short-term fluctuations caused by seasonal or other factors, and not because of a permanent imbalance between the internal and external price levels.

I believe that in Great Britain the ideal system can be most nearly and most easily reached by an adaptation of the actual system which has grown up, half haphazard, since the war. After the general idea has been exhibited by an application in detail to the case of Great Britain, it will be sufficient to deal somewhat briefly with the modifications required in the case of other countries.

I think that in Great Britain, the best system can be most effectively achieved by adapting the current system that has developed somewhat randomly since the war. Once the overall concept has been demonstrated with specific examples for Great Britain, it will be enough to briefly address the changes needed for other countries.

178

178

I. Great Britain.

The system actually in operation to-day is broadly as follows:

The system currently in use today is generally as follows:

(1) The internal price level is mainly determined by the amount of credit created by the banks, chiefly the Big Five; though in a depression, when the public are increasing their real balances, a greater amount of credit has to be created to support a given price level (in accordance with the theory explained above in Chapter III., p. 84) than is required in a boom, when real balances are being diminished.

(1) The internal price level is mostly determined by the amount of credit created by the banks, especially the Big Five; however, during a depression, when people are increasing their real balances, a larger amount of credit needs to be created to maintain a specific price level (as explained in Chapter III., p. 84) compared to a boom, when real balances are decreasing.

The amount of credit, so created, is in its turn roughly measured by the volume of the banks’ deposits—since variations in this total must correspond to variations in the total of their investments, bill-holdings, and advances. Now there is no necessary reason a priori why the proportion between the banks’ deposits and their “cash in hand and at the Bank of England” should not fluctuate within fairly wide limits in accordance with circumstances. But in practice the banks usually work by rule of thumb and do not depart widely from their preconceived “proportions.”51 In recent times their aggregate179 deposits have always been about nine times their “cash.” Since this is what is generally considered a “safe” proportion, it is bad for a bank’s reputation to fall below it, whilst on the other hand it is bad for its earning power to rise above it. Thus in one way or another the banks generally adjust their total creation of credit in one form or another (investments, bills, and advances) up to their capacity as measured by the above criterion; from which it follows that the volume of their “cash” in the shape of Bank and Currency Notes and Deposits at the Bank of England closely determines the volume of credit which they create.

The amount of credit created is roughly measured by the total of the banks’ deposits—since changes in this total need to align with changes in their investments, bill holdings, and loans. There’s no specific reason a priori why the ratio between banks’ deposits and their “cash on hand and at the Bank of England” shouldn’t vary within fairly broad limits depending on the situation. However, in practice, banks typically operate by instinct and don’t stray far from their established “ratios.” In recent years, their total deposits have consistently been about nine times their “cash.” Since this is generally seen as a “safe” ratio, it can hurt a bank’s reputation to drop below it, while it can also negatively impact its earning potential to go above it. Thus, in one way or another, banks usually adjust their overall credit creation (investments, bills, and loans) according to this measure; from this, it follows that the amount of their “cash” in the form of Bank and Currency Notes and Deposits at the Bank of England closely determines the amount of credit they create.

51 The Joint Stock banks have published monthly returns since January 1921. Excluding the half-yearly statement when a little “window-dressing” is temporarily arranged, the extreme range of fluctuation has been between 11·0 per cent and 11·9 per cent in the proportion of “cash” to deposits, and between 41·1 per cent and 50·1 per cent in the proportion of advances to deposits. These figures cover two and a half years of widely varying conditions. The “proportions” of individual banks differ amongst themselves, and the above is an average result, the steadiness of which is strengthened by the fact that each big bank is pretty steadfast in its own policy.

51 The Joint Stock banks have released monthly reports since January 1921. Excluding the half-yearly statement when some "window-dressing" is briefly applied, the extreme range of fluctuation has been between 11.0 percent and 11.9 percent for the proportion of "cash" to deposits, and between 41.1 percent and 50.1 percent for the proportion of advances to deposits. These figures span two and a half years of significantly varying conditions. The "proportions" of individual banks vary from each other, and the above numbers represent an average result, which is reinforced by the fact that each major bank tends to maintain a consistent policy.

In order to follow, therefore, the train of causation a stage further, we must consider what determines the volume of their “cash.” Its amount can only be altered in one or other of three ways: (a) by the public requiring more or fewer notes in circulation, (b) by the Treasury borrowing more or less from the Currency Note Reserve, and (c) by the Bank of England increasing or diminishing its assets.52

To further trace the cause-and-effect relationship, we need to look at what influences the amount of their “cash.” This amount can only change in one of three ways: (a) if the public needs more or fewer notes in circulation, (b) if the Treasury borrows more or less from the Currency Note Reserve, and (c) if the Bank of England increases or decreases its assets.52

52 For the aggregate of its liabilities in the shape of deposits and of notes in circulation automatically depends on the volume of its assets.

52 The total amount of its liabilities, such as deposits and notes in circulation, automatically depends on the size of its assets.

To complete the argument, one further factor, not yet mentioned, must be introduced, namely (d) the proportion of the banks’ second-line reserve in the shape of their holdings of Treasury Bills, which can be regarded as cash at one remove. In determining what is a safe proportion of “cash,” they pay some180 regard to the amount of Treasury Bills which they hold, since by reducing this holding they can immediately increase their “cash” and compel the Treasury to borrow more either from the Currency Note Reserve or from the Bank of England. The ninefold proportion referred to above presumes a certain minimum holding of Treasury Bills, and might have to be modified if a sufficient volume of such Bills was not available. This factor (d) is, however, also important because the banks in their turn are open to pressure by the Treasury, whenever it draws to itself the resources of their depositors—whether by taxation or by offering them attractive longer-dated loans—and uses them to pay off, if not Ways and Means advances from the Bank of England (which reduces the banks’ first-line reserve of cash), then alternatively Treasury Bills held by the banks themselves (which reduces their second-line reserve of bills).

To wrap up the argument, one more factor that hasn't been mentioned yet needs to be introduced, specifically (d) the proportion of the banks' second-line reserves in the form of their Treasury Bill holdings, which can be seen as cash at a slight remove. When determining what constitutes a safe proportion of “cash,” they consider the amount of Treasury Bills they hold, since by reducing this amount, they can quickly boost their “cash” and force the Treasury to borrow more either from the Currency Note Reserve or from the Bank of England. The ninefold proportion mentioned earlier assumes a minimum holding of Treasury Bills, and may need to be adjusted if there aren't enough of those Bills available. This factor (d) is also significant because the banks are subject to pressure from the Treasury whenever it taps into the funds of their depositors—whether through taxation or by enticing them with appealing long-term loans—and uses those funds to pay off either Ways and Means advances from the Bank of England (which decreases the banks' first-line cash reserves) or, alternatively, Treasury Bills held by the banks themselves (which lowers their second-line reserve of Bills).

Items (a), (b), (c), and (d) together, therefore, more or less settle the matter. For the purpose of the present argument, however, we need not pay much separate attention to (a) and (b), since their effect is, for the most part, reflected over again in (c) and (d). (a) depends partly on the volume of trade but mainly on the price level itself; and in practice fluctuations in (a) do not directly affect the banks’ “cash,”—for if more notes are required under (a), more notes are issued, the Treasury borrowing a181 corresponding additional amount from the Currency Note Reserve, in which case the Treasury either repays the Bank of England, which diminishes the Bank’s assets and consequently the other banks’ “cash,” or withdraws an equivalent amount of Treasury Bills, which diminishes the other banks’ second-line reserve; i.e. a change in (a) operates on the banks’ resources through (c) and (d).53 Whilst as for (b), a change in the amount of what the Treasury borrows from the Currency Note Reserve is reflected by a corresponding change in the opposite sense in what it borrows in Ways and Means Advances or in Treasury Bills.

Items (a), (b), (c), and (d) together, therefore, pretty much settle the issue. For this argument, though, we don’t need to focus much on (a) and (b), since their impact is mostly mirrored in (c) and (d). (a) is partly influenced by the volume of trade but mainly by the price level itself; and in practice, fluctuations in (a) don’t directly affect the banks’ “cash”—because if more notes are needed under (a), more notes are issued, with the Treasury borrowing a181 corresponding additional amount from the Currency Note Reserve. In this case, the Treasury either repays the Bank of England, which reduces the Bank’s assets and therefore the other banks’ “cash,” or withdraws an equivalent amount of Treasury Bills, which decreases the other banks’ second-line reserve; i.e. a change in (a) affects the banks’ resources through (c) and (d).53 As for (b), a change in the amount the Treasury borrows from the Currency Note Reserve is reflected by a corresponding change in the opposite direction in what it borrows in Ways and Means Advances or in Treasury Bills.

53 If the additional issue of notes is covered by transferring gold from the Bank of England, this is merely an alternative way of diminishing the Bank of England’s assets.

53 If the extra issue of notes is handled by moving gold from the Bank of England, this is just another method of reducing the Bank of England’s assets.

Thus we can concentrate our attention on (c) and (d) as the main determining factors of the price level.

Thus we can focus our attention on (c) and (d) as the main factors that determine the price level.

Now (c), namely the assets of the Bank of England, consist (so far as their variable part is concerned) of

Now (c), the assets of the Bank of England consist (as far as their variable part goes) of

(i.) Ways and Means advances to the Treasury.
(ii.) Gilt-edged and other investments.
(iii.) Advances to its customers and bills of exchange.
(iv.) Gold.

An increase in any of these items tends, therefore, to increase the other banks’ “cash,” thereby to stimulate the creation of credit, and hence to raise the price level; and contrariwise.

An increase in any of these items tends to raise the other banks’ “cash,” which encourages the creation of credit, and as a result, increases the price level; and vice versa.

And (d), namely the banks’ holdings of Treasury Bills, depend on the excess of the expenditure of the182 Treasury over and above what it secures (i.) from the public by taxation and loans, (ii.) from the Bank of England in Ways and Means advances, and (iii.) by borrowing from the Currency Note Reserve.

And (d), specifically the banks’ holdings of Treasury Bills, depend on how much the Treasury spends beyond what it collects (i.) from the public through taxes and loans, (ii.) from the Bank of England through Ways and Means advances, and (iii.) by borrowing from the Currency Note Reserve.

It follows that the capacity of the Joint Stock banks to create credit is mainly governed by the policies and actions of the Bank of England and of the Treasury. When these are settled, (a), (b), (c), and (d) are settled.

It follows that the ability of Joint Stock banks to create credit is primarily determined by the policies and actions of the Bank of England and the Treasury. Once these are established, (a), (b), (c), and (d) are established.

How far can these two authorities control their own actions and how far must they remain passive agents? In my opinion the control, if they choose to exercise it, is mainly in their own hands. As regards the Treasury, the extent to which they draw money from the public to discharge floating debt clearly depends on the rate of interest and the type of loan which they are prepared to offer. A point might be reached when they could not fund further on any reasonable terms; but within fairly wide limits the policy of the Treasury can be whatever the Chancellor of the Exchequer and the House of Commons may decide. The Bank of England also is, within sufficiently wide limits, mistress of the situation if she acts in conjunction with the Treasury. She can increase or decrease at will her investments and her gold by buying or selling the one or the other. In the case of advances and of bills, whilst their volume is not so immediately or directly controllable, here also adequate control can be obtained183 by varying the price charged, that is to say the bank rate.54

How much can these two authorities manage their own actions, and how much do they need to be passive players? In my view, the ability to control their actions, if they choose to use it, is primarily in their hands. For the Treasury, the amount they pull from the public to pay off short-term debt clearly relies on the interest rate and the kind of loans they are willing to offer. There might come a time when they can't secure funding on reasonable terms; however, within fairly broad limits, the Treasury's policy can be whatever the Chancellor of the Exchequer and the House of Commons decide. The Bank of England is also, within sufficiently broad limits, in control of the situation if it works alongside the Treasury. It can increase or decrease its investments and gold at will by buying or selling either. In terms of loans and bills, while their volume is not as directly controllable, adequate control can still be exercised by adjusting the fees charged, meaning the bank rate. 183 54

54 It is often assumed that the bank rate is the sole governing factor. But the bank rate can only operate by its reaction on (c), namely, the Bank of England’s assets. Formerly it acted pretty directly on two of the components of (c), namely, (c) (iii.) advances to customers and bills of exchange and (c) (iv.) gold. Now it acts only on one of them, namely, (c) (iii.). But changes in (c) (i.) the Bank’s advances to the Treasury and (c) (ii.) the Bank’s investments can often be nearly as potent in their effect on the creation of credit. Thus a low bank rate can be largely neutralised by a simultaneous reduction of (c) (i.) or (c) (ii.) and a high bank rate by an increase of these. Indeed the Bank of England can probably bring the money-market to heel more decisively by buying or selling securities than in any other way; and the utility of bank rate, operated by itself and without assistance from deliberate variations in the volume of (c) (ii.), is lessened by the various limitations which exist in practice to its freedom of movement, and to the limits within which it can move, upwards and downwards.

54 It’s often thought that the bank rate is the only deciding factor. But the bank rate only works by affecting (c), specifically the Bank of England’s assets. In the past, it influenced two parts of (c), which are (c) (iii.) loans to customers and bills of exchange and (c) (iv.) gold. Now it only impacts one, which is (c) (iii.). However, changes in (c) (i.) the Bank’s loans to the Treasury and (c) (ii.) the Bank’s investments can still have nearly as strong an effect on credit creation. So, a low bank rate can be mostly offset by a simultaneous drop in (c) (i.) or (c) (ii.), and a high bank rate can be countered by an increase in these factors. In fact, the Bank of England can probably control the money market more effectively by buying or selling securities than by any other means; and the effectiveness of the bank rate, when used alone without adjustments to the volume of (c) (ii.), is reduced by practical limitations on its movement and the range within which it can fluctuate, both up and down.

Therefore it is broadly true to say that the level of prices, and hence the level of the exchanges, depends in the last resort on the policy of the Bank of England and of the Treasury in respect of the above particulars;—though the other banks, if they strongly opposed the official policy, could thwart, or at least delay it to a certain extent—provided they were prepared to depart from their usual proportions.

Therefore, it is generally accurate to say that the level of prices, and consequently the level of exchanges, ultimately relies on the policies of the Bank of England and the Treasury regarding the points mentioned above; although the other banks could hinder, or at least postpone, this official policy to some extent if they vigorously opposed it—provided they were willing to adjust their usual ratios.

(2) Cash, in the form of Bank or Currency Notes, is supplied ad libitum, i.e. in such quantities as are called for by the amount of credit created and the internal price level established under (1). That is to say, in practice;—in theory, a limit to the issue of Currency Notes has been laid down, namely the maximum fiduciary issue actually attained in the preceding calendar year. Since this theoretical maximum was prescribed, it has never yet been actually184 operative; and, as the rule springs from a doctrine now out of date and out of accordance with most responsible opinion, it is probable that, if it were becoming operative, it would be relaxed. This is a matter where the recommendations of the Cunliffe Committee call for urgent change, unless we desire deliberately to pursue still further a process of Deflation. A point must come when, a year of brisk trade and employment following one of depression, there will be an increased demand for currency, which must be met unless the revival is to be deliberately damped down.

(2) Cash, in the form of banknotes or currency, is provided ad libitum, i.e. in the amounts needed based on the credit created and the internal price level established under (1). In practice—though theoretically, there is a limit to how many currency notes can be issued, specifically the maximum amount allowed based on the previous calendar year's fiduciary issue. Since this theoretical maximum was set, it has never actually been effective; and because this rule comes from an outdated doctrine that doesn't align with most responsible opinions today, it's likely that if it were to become effective, it would be relaxed. The recommendations from the Cunliffe Committee urgently call for change in this area, unless we want to actively continue a process of deflation. There will come a point when, following a year of strong trade and employment after a period of recession, demand for currency will increase, which must be addressed unless we want to deliberately suppress the recovery.

Thus the tendency of to-day—rightly I think—is to watch and to control the creation of credit and to let the creation of currency follow suit, rather than, as formerly, to watch and to control the creation of currency and to let the creation of credit follow suit.

Thus the tendency today—rightly, I believe—is to monitor and manage the creation of credit and allow the creation of currency to follow, instead of, as in the past, focusing on controlling the creation of currency and letting the creation of credit follow.

(3) The Bank of England’s gold is immobilised. It neither buys nor sells. The gold plays no part in our system. Occasionally, however, the Bank may ship a consignment to the United States, to help the Treasury in meeting its dollar liabilities. The South African and other gold which finds its way here comes purely as a commodity to a convenient entrepôt centre, and is mostly re-exported.

(3) The Bank of England’s gold is locked away. It neither buys nor sells. The gold doesn’t play any role in our system. Occasionally, though, the Bank might send a shipment to the United States to assist the Treasury in covering its dollar debts. The South African and other gold that arrives here comes purely as a commodity to a convenient entrepôt center and is mostly re-exported.

(4) The foreign exchanges are unregulated and left to look after themselves. From day to day they fluctuate in accordance with the seasons and other irregular influences. Over longer periods they185 depend, as we have seen, on the relative price levels established here and abroad by the respective credit policies adopted here and abroad. But whilst this is, for the most part, the actual state of affairs, it is not, as yet, the avowed or consistent policy of the responsible authorities. Fixity of the dollar exchange at the pre-war parity remains their aspiration; and it still may happen that the bank rate is raised for the purpose of influencing the exchange at a time when considerations of internal price level and credit policy point the other way.

(4) The foreign exchanges are unregulated and left to manage themselves. They fluctuate daily based on the seasons and other unpredictable factors. Over longer periods, they depend, as we've seen, on the relative price levels established both here and overseas by the respective credit policies in place. However, while this is largely the reality, it is not yet the stated or consistent policy of the responsible authorities. Maintaining a fixed dollar exchange at the pre-war level is still their goal, and it could happen that the bank rate is increased to influence the exchange at a time when internal price levels and credit policy suggest otherwise.

* * * * *

This, in brief—I apologise to the reader if I have compressed the argument unduly—is the present state of affairs, one essentially different from our pre-war system. It will be observed that in practice we have already gone a long way towards the ideal of directing bank rate and credit policy by reference to the internal price level and other symptoms of under- or over-expansion of internal credit, rather than by reference to the pre-war criteria of the amount of cash in circulation (or of gold reserves in the banks) or the level of the dollar exchange.

This, in short—I apologize to the reader if I’ve oversimplified the argument—is the current situation, which is fundamentally different from our system before the war. It’s noticeable that in practice we have already made significant progress toward the goal of managing bank rates and credit policy based on the internal price level and other indicators of under- or over-expansion of internal credit, instead of relying on the pre-war standards of cash in circulation (or gold reserves in the banks) or the dollar exchange rate.

I. Accordingly my first requirement in a good constructive scheme can be supplied merely by a development of our existing arrangements on more deliberate and self-conscious lines. Hitherto the Treasury and the Bank of England have looked forward to the stability of the dollar exchange186 (preferably at the pre-war parity) as their objective. It is not clear whether they intend to stick to this irrespective of fluctuations in the value of the dollar (or of gold); whether, that is to say, they would sacrifice the stability of sterling prices to the stability of the dollar exchange in the event of the two proving to be incompatible. At any rate, my scheme would require that they should adopt the stability of sterling prices as their primary objective—though this would not prevent their aiming at exchange stability also as a secondary objective by co-operating with the Federal Reserve Board in a common policy. So long as the Federal Reserve Board was successful in keeping dollar prices steady the objective of keeping sterling prices steady would be identical with the objective of keeping the dollar sterling exchange steady. My recommendation does not involve more than a determination that, in the event of the Federal Reserve Board failing to keep dollar prices steady, sterling prices should not, if it could be helped, plunge with them merely for the sake of maintaining a fixed parity of exchange.

I. Therefore, my first requirement for a good constructive plan can be met simply by developing our current systems in a more intentional and thoughtful way. Until now, the Treasury and the Bank of England have aimed for the stability of the dollar exchange (ideally at the pre-war parity) as their goal. It’s unclear whether they plan to maintain this position regardless of changes in the value of the dollar (or gold); that is, would they prioritize the stability of the dollar exchange over the stability of sterling prices if the two turn out to be incompatible? In any case, my plan would require them to adopt the stability of sterling prices as their primary goal—although this wouldn’t stop them from also targeting exchange stability as a secondary goal by working together with the Federal Reserve Board on a common policy. As long as the Federal Reserve Board succeeds in keeping dollar prices steady, the goal of maintaining stable sterling prices would align with the goal of keeping the dollar-sterling exchange steady. My recommendation does not require anything more than a commitment that, if the Federal Reserve Board fails to keep dollar prices steady, sterling prices should not, if it can be avoided, drop along with them just to maintain a fixed exchange rate.

If the Bank of England, the Treasury, and the Big Five were to adopt this policy, to what criteria should they look respectively in regulating bank-rate, Government borrowing, and trade-advances? The first question is whether the criterion should be a precise, arithmetical formula or whether it should be sought in a general judgement of the situation187 based on all the available data. The pioneer of price-stability as against exchange-stability, Professor Irving Fisher, advocated the former in the shape of his “compensated dollar,” which was to be automatically adjusted by reference to an index number of prices without any play of judgement or discretion. He may have been influenced, however, by the advantage of propounding a method which could be grafted as easily as possible on to the pre-war system of gold-reserves and gold-ratios. In any case, I doubt the wisdom and the practicability of a system so cut and dried. If we wait until a price movement is actually afoot before applying remedial measures, we may be too late. “It is not the past rise in prices but the future rise that has to be counteracted.”55 It is characteristic of the impetuosity of the credit cycle that price movements tend to be cumulative, each movement promoting, up to a certain point, a further movement in the same direction. Professor Fisher’s method may be adapted to deal with long-period trends in the value of gold but not with the, often more injurious, short-period oscillations of the credit cycle. Nevertheless, whilst it would not be advisable to postpone action until it was called for by an actual movement of prices, it would promote confidence and furnish an objective standard of value, if, an official index number having been compiled of such a character as to register the188 price of a standard composite commodity, the authorities were to adopt this composite commodity as their standard of value in the sense that they would employ all their resources to prevent a movement of its price by more than a certain percentage in either direction away from the normal, just as before the war they employed all their resources to prevent a movement in the price of gold by more than a certain percentage. The precise composition of the standard composite commodity could be modified from time to time in accordance with changes in the relative economic importance of its various components.

If the Bank of England, the Treasury, and the Big Five were to adopt this policy, what criteria should they each consider in regulating bank rates, government borrowing, and trade advances? The first question is whether the criterion should be a specific, mathematical formula or if it should come from a general assessment of the situation based on all available data. The pioneer of price stability over exchange stability, Professor Irving Fisher, supported the former approach with his “compensated dollar,” which was to be automatically adjusted according to an index of prices without any judgment or discretion involved. He may have been influenced by the ease of integrating a method that could fit neatly into the pre-war system of gold reserves and gold ratios. In any case, I question the wisdom and practicality of such a rigid system. If we wait until a price change is already happening before taking action, we might be too late. “It is not the past rise in prices but the future rise that needs to be countered.”55 The impulsiveness of the credit cycle means that price changes tend to accumulate, with each change encouraging further changes in the same direction, up to a point. Professor Fisher’s method may be suitable for addressing long-term trends in the value of gold, but not for the often more harmful short-term fluctuations of the credit cycle. However, while it wouldn't be wise to delay action until there’s an actual price movement, it would build confidence and provide an objective standard of value if, once an official index number is created to reflect the price of a standard composite commodity, the authorities were to use this composite commodity as their standard of value. They would use all their resources to keep its price from moving by more than a certain percentage in either direction from the normal, similar to how they previously used all their resources to prevent gold prices from changing more than a certain percentage. The specific makeup of the standard composite commodity could be adjusted over time in response to changes in the economic significance of its various components.

55 Hawtrey, Monetary Reconstruction, p. 105.

__A_TAG_PLACEHOLDER_0__ Hawtrey, Monetary Reconstruction, p. 105.

As regards the criteria, other than the actual trend of prices, which should determine the action of the controlling authority, it is beyond the scope of this volume to deal adequately with the diagnosis and analysis of the credit cycle. The more deeply that our researches penetrate into this subject, the more accurately shall we understand the right time and method for controlling credit-expansion by bank-rate or otherwise. But in the meantime we have a considerable and growing body of general experience upon which those in authority can base their judgements. Actual price-movements must of course provide the most important datum; but the state of employment, the volume of production, the effective demand for credit as felt by the banks, the rate of interest on investments of various types,189 the volume of new issues, the flow of cash into circulation, the statistics of foreign trade and the level of the exchanges must all be taken into account. The main point is that the objective of the authorities, pursued with such means as are at their command, should be the stability of prices.

Regarding the criteria, aside from the actual price trends that should guide the actions of the controlling authority, this volume does not aim to thoroughly address the diagnosis and analysis of the credit cycle. The deeper our research goes into this topic, the better we will understand the right timing and methods for controlling credit expansion through bank rates or other means. However, in the meantime, there's a substantial and growing body of general experience that those in authority can rely on for their decisions. Actual price movements must, of course, be the most critical data; however, the state of employment, production levels, effective demand for credit as perceived by banks, interest rates on various types of investments, the volume of new issuances, cash flow into circulation, foreign trade statistics, and exchange levels must all be considered. The main point is that the objective of the authorities, pursued with the means available to them, should be price stability.189

It would at least be possible to avoid, for example, such action as has been taken lately (in Great Britain) whereby the supply of “cash” has been deflated at a time when real balances were becoming inflated,—action which has materially aggravated the severity of the late depression. We might be able to moderate very greatly the amplitude of the fluctuations if it was understood that the time to deflate the supply of cash is when real balances are falling, i.e. when prices are rising out of proportion to the increase, if any, in the volume of cash, and that the time to inflate the supply of cash is when real balances are rising, and not, as seems to be our present practice, the other way round.

It would at least be possible to avoid, for example, actions like those taken recently (in Great Britain) that have reduced the supply of “cash” at a time when real balances were increasing—actions that have significantly worsened the recent depression. We could greatly lessen the extent of these fluctuations if it were clear that the right time to reduce the cash supply is when real balances are decreasing, meaning when prices are rising disproportionately to any increase in the cash volume, and that the right time to increase the cash supply is when real balances are increasing, not, as seems to be our current practice, the opposite.

II. How can we best combine this primary object with a maximum stability of the exchanges? Can we get the best of both worlds—stability of prices over long periods and stability of exchanges over short periods? It is the great advantage of the gold standard that it overcomes the excessive sensitiveness of the exchanges to temporary influences, which we analysed in Chapter III. Our object must be to secure this advantage, if we can, without committing190 ourselves to follow big movements in the value of gold itself.

II. How can we best combine this main goal with maximum stability of exchanges? Can we achieve the best of both worlds—price stability over long periods and exchange stability over short periods? The great advantage of the gold standard is that it reduces the excessive sensitivity of exchanges to temporary influences, as we discussed in Chapter III. Our aim must be to secure this advantage, if possible, without having to follow significant fluctuations in the value of gold itself.

I believe that we can go a long way in this direction if the Bank of England will take over the duty of regulating the price of gold, just as it already regulates the rate of discount. “Regulate,” but not “peg.” The Bank of England should have a buying and a selling price for gold, just as it did before the war, and this price might remain unchanged for considerable periods, just as bank-rate does. But it would not be fixed or “pegged” once and for all, any more than bank-rate is fixed. The Bank’s rate for gold would be announced every Thursday morning at the same time as its rate for discounting bills, with a difference between its buying and selling rates corresponding to the pre-war margin between £3 : 17 : 10½ per oz. and £3 : 17 : 9 per oz.; except that, in order to obviate too frequent changes in the rate, the difference might be wider than 1½d. per oz.—say, ½ to 1 per cent. A willingness on the part of the Bank both to buy and to sell gold at rates fixed for the time being would keep the dollar-sterling exchange steady within corresponding limits, so that the exchange rate would not move with every breath of wind but only when the Bank had come to a considered judgement that a change was required for the sake of the stability of sterling prices.

I believe we can make significant progress in this area if the Bank of England takes on the responsibility of regulating the price of gold, just as it currently regulates the discount rate. “Regulate,” but not “peg.” The Bank of England should provide a buying and a selling price for gold, similar to what it did before the war, and this price could stay the same for long periods, like the bank rate does. However, it wouldn’t be fixed or “pegged” permanently, just like the bank rate isn't. The Bank’s gold price would be announced every Thursday morning at the same time as its discount rate, with a difference between the buying and selling rates reflecting the pre-war margin of £3:17:10½ per oz. and £3:17:9 per oz.; however, to avoid too many frequent changes in the rate, the difference might be wider than 1½d. per oz.—perhaps around ½ to 1 percent. The Bank’s readiness to both buy and sell gold at these temporarily fixed rates would help keep the dollar-sterling exchange steady within certain limits, meaning the exchange rate wouldn’t fluctuate constantly but only when the Bank determined a change was necessary for the stability of sterling prices.

If the bank rate and the gold rate in conjunction were leading to an excessive influx or an excessive191 efflux of gold, the Bank of England would have to decide whether the flow was due to an internal or to an external movement away from stability. To fix our ideas, let us suppose that gold is flowing outwards. If this seemed to be due to a tendency of sterling to depreciate in terms of commodities, the correct remedy would be to raise the bank rate. If, on the other hand, it was due to a tendency of gold to appreciate in terms of commodities, the correct remedy would be to raise the gold rate (i.e. the buying price for gold). If, however, the flow could be explained by seasonal, or other passing influences, then it should be allowed to continue (assuming, of course, that the Bank’s gold reserves were equal to any probable calls on them) unchecked, to be redressed later on by the corresponding reaction.

If the bank rate and the gold rate together were causing too much gold to come in or go out, the Bank of England would need to determine whether the change was because of something happening internally or due to external factors affecting stability. To clarify, let’s say gold is flowing out. If this seemed to be happening because sterling was losing value compared to commodities, the right action would be to raise the bank rate. Conversely, if it was because gold was gaining value against commodities, the appropriate action would be to increase the gold rate (i.e., the price the bank pays for gold). However, if the outflow could be attributed to seasonal or other temporary factors, it should be allowed to proceed (as long as the Bank’s gold reserves could handle any anticipated demand) without interference, to be corrected later by the resulting changes.

Two subsidiary suggestions may be made for strengthening the Bank’s control:

Two additional suggestions could be offered to enhance the Bank's control:

(1) The service of the American debt will make it necessary for the British Treasury to buy nearly $500,000 every working day. It is clear that the particular method adopted for purchasing these huge sums will greatly affect the short-period fluctuations of the exchange. I suggest that this duty should be entrusted to the Bank of England to be carried out by them with the express object of minimising those fluctuations in the exchange which are due to the daily and seasonal ebb and flow of the ordinary trade demand. In particular the proper distribution192 of these purchases through the year might be so arranged as greatly to mitigate the normal seasonal fluctuation discussed in Chapter III. If the trade demand is concentrated in one half of the year the Treasury demand should be concentrated in the other half.

(1) The management of the American debt will require the British Treasury to buy nearly $500,000 every working day. It's clear that the way we go about purchasing these large amounts will significantly impact short-term exchange rate fluctuations. I propose that this responsibility should be given to the Bank of England to manage with the specific goal of reducing those exchange fluctuations caused by the daily and seasonal ups and downs of regular trade demand. In particular, the timing of these purchases throughout the year could be organized to greatly lessen the usual seasonal fluctuations mentioned in Chapter III. If trade demand is concentrated in one half of the year, the Treasury's demand should be focused in the other half.

(2) It would effect an improvement in the technique of the system here proposed, without altering its fundamental characteristics, if the Bank of England were to quote a daily price, not only for the purchase and sale of gold for immediate delivery, but also for delivery three months forward. The difference, if any, between the cash and forward quotations might represent either a discount or a premium of the latter on the former, according as the bank desired money rates in London to stand below or above those in New York. The existence of the forward quotation of the Bank of England would afford a firm foundation for a free market in forward exchange, and would facilitate the movement of funds between London and New York for short periods, in much the same way as before the war, whilst at the same time keeping down to a minimum the actual movement of gold bullion backwards and forwards. I need not develop this point further, because it is only an application of the argument of Section III. of Chapter III. which will be most readily intelligible to the reader, if he will refer back to the previous argument.

(2) It would improve the technique of the proposed system without changing its basic characteristics if the Bank of England were to provide a daily price for both the buying and selling of gold for immediate delivery as well as for delivery three months ahead. The difference, if any, between the cash and forward prices could indicate either a discount or a premium of the latter over the former, depending on whether the bank wanted money rates in London to be lower or higher than those in New York. The availability of a forward price from the Bank of England would provide a strong foundation for a free market in forward exchange and would help facilitate the movement of funds between London and New York for short periods, similar to before the war, while also minimizing the actual movement of gold bullion back and forth. I won't go into this further because it's just an application of the point made in Section III of Chapter III, which will be clearer to the reader if they refer back to the earlier argument.

193

193

There remains the question of the regulation of the Note Issue. My proposal here may appear shocking until the reader realises that, apart from its disregarding the conventions, it does not differ in substance from the existing state of affairs. The object of fixing the amount of gold to be held against a note issue is to set up a danger signal which cannot be easily disregarded, when a curtailment of credit and purchasing power is urgently required to maintain the legal tender money at its lawful parity. But this system, whilst far better than no system at all, is primitive in its ideas and is, in fact, a survival of an earlier evolutionary stage in the development of credit and currency. For it has two great disadvantages. In so far as we fix a minimum gold reserve against the note issue, the effect is to immobilise this quantity of gold and thus to reduce the amount actually available for use as a store of value to meet temporary or sudden deficits in the country’s international balance of payments. And in so far as we regard an approach towards the prescribed minimum or a departure upwards from it as a barometer warning us to curtail credit or encouraging us to expand it, we are using a criterion which most people would now agree in considering second-rate for the purpose, because it cannot give the necessary warning soon enough. If gold movements are actually taking place, this means that the disequilibrium has proceeded a very long way; and whilst this criterion194 may pull us up in time to preserve convertibility on the one hand or to prevent an excessive flood of gold on the other, it will not do so in time to avoid an injurious oscillation of prices. This method belongs indeed to a period when the preservation of convertibility was all that any one thought about (all indeed that there was to think about so long as we were confined to an unregulated gold standard), and before the idea of utilising bank-rate as a means of keeping prices and employment steady had become practical politics.

There’s still the question of how to regulate the Note Issue. My suggestion might seem shocking at first, but once you understand it, you'll see that it’s not really different from how things are now, aside from ignoring some conventions. The goal of setting a minimum amount of gold to back a note issue is to create a warning signal that’s hard to overlook when we need to decrease credit and purchasing power to keep legal tender money at its proper value. However, while this system is definitely better than having no system at all, it’s outdated and reflects an earlier stage of how credit and currency have evolved. It has two major drawbacks. First, by fixing a minimum gold reserve against the note issue, we essentially lock up that amount of gold, which limits how much is available as a reserve to deal with temporary or sudden deficits in the country’s international balance of payments. Second, using the approach of getting close to the minimum or moving above it as a guideline for whether to cut back or expand credit means relying on a standard that most people today would consider insufficient because it doesn't provide warnings quickly enough. If gold movements are happening, it indicates that the imbalance has already progressed significantly; and although this criterion might help us maintain convertibility on one side or stop an excessive influx of gold on the other, it won’t prevent serious price fluctuations in time. This method comes from a time when preserving convertibility was the only concern (which was all there was to think about as long as we were stuck to an unregulated gold standard), before the idea of using bank rate to stabilize prices and employment became a practical consideration.

We have scarcely realised how far our thoughts have travelled during the past five years. But to re-read the famous Cunliffe Report on Currency and Foreign Exchange after the War, published in 1918, brings vividly before one’s mind what a great distance we have covered since then. This document was published three months before the Armistice. It was compiled long before the unpegging of sterling and the great break in the European exchanges in 1919, before the tremendous boom and crash of 1920–21, before the vast piling up of the world’s gold in America, and without experience of the Federal Reserve policy in 1922–23 of burying this gold at Washington, withdrawing it from the exercise of its full effect on prices, and thereby, in effect, demonetising the metal. The Cunliffe Report is an unadulterated pre-war prescription—inevitably so considering that it was written after four years’ interregnum of war, before195 Peace was in sight, and without knowledge of the revolutionary and unforeseeable experiences of the past five years.

We hardly realize how far our thoughts have come over the past five years. But re-reading the well-known Cunliffe Report on Currency and Foreign Exchange after the War, published in 1918, clearly shows just how much we have progressed since then. This document was released three months before the Armistice. It was put together long before the unpegging of sterling and the major disruption in European exchanges in 1919, before the massive boom and crash of 1920–21, before the significant accumulation of the world’s gold in America, and without any knowledge of the Federal Reserve's policy in 1922–23 of locking this gold away in Washington, effectively removing it from influencing prices, and thereby demonetizing the metal. The Cunliffe Report is a purely pre-war guideline—inevitably so, considering it was written after four years of war, before195 peace was in sight, and without any understanding of the revolutionary and unpredictable experiences of the past five years.

Of all the omissions from the Cunliffe Report the most noteworthy is the complete absence of any mention of the problem of the stability of the price-level; and it cheerfully explains how the pre-war system, which it aims at restoring, operated to bring back equilibrium by deliberately causing a “consequent slackening of employment.” The Cunliffe Report belongs to an extinct and an almost forgotten order of ideas. Few think on these lines now; yet the Report remains the authorised declaration of our policy, and the Bank of England and the Treasury are said still to regard it as their marching orders.

Of all the things missing from the Cunliffe Report, the most significant is the complete lack of any mention of the problem of price-level stability. It happily explains how the pre-war system, which it aims to restore, worked to bring back equilibrium by intentionally causing a “resultant decrease in employment.” The Cunliffe Report belongs to a bygone and almost forgotten set of ideas. Few people think this way anymore; yet the Report still stands as the official statement of our policy, and the Bank of England and the Treasury are said to still consider it their guidelines.

Let us return to the regulation of note issue. If we agree that gold is not to be employed in the circulation, and that it is better to employ some other criterion than the ratio of gold reserves to note issue in deciding to raise or to lower the bank rate, it follows that the only employment for gold (nevertheless important) is as a store of value to be held as a war-chest against emergencies and as a means of rapidly correcting the influence of a temporarily adverse balance of international payments and thus maintaining a day-to-day stability of the sterling-dollar exchange. It is desirable, therefore, that the whole of the reserves should be under the control of the authority responsible for this, which, under196 the above proposals, is the Bank of England. The volume of the paper money, on the other hand, would be consequential, as it is at present, on the state of trade and employment, bank-rate policy and Treasury Bill policy. The governors of the system would be bank-rate and Treasury Bill policy, the objects of government would be stability of trade, prices, and employment, and the volume of paper money would be a consequence of the first (just—I repeat—as it is at present) and an instrument of the second, the precise arithmetical level of which could not and need not be predicted. Nor would the amount of gold, which it would be prudent to hold as a reserve against international emergencies and temporary indebtedness, bear any logical or calculable relation to the volume of paper money;—for the two have no close or necessary connection with one another. Therefore I make the proposal—which may seem, but should not be, shocking—of separating entirely the gold reserve from the note issue. Once this principle is adopted, the regulations are matters of detail. The gold reserves of the country should be concentrated in the hands of the Bank of England, to be used for the purpose of avoiding short-period fluctuations in the exchange. The Currency Notes may, just as well as not—since the Treasury is to draw the profit from them—be issued by the Treasury, without the latter being subjected to any formal regulations (which are likely to be either inoperative or injurious) as to their197 volume. Except in form, this régime would not differ materially from the existing state of affairs.

Let’s go back to how we manage the issuance of currency notes. If we agree that gold shouldn’t be used in circulation and that we should use a different standard than comparing gold reserves to currency issuance when deciding to raise or lower the interest rates, then it follows that the only role for gold—though still important—is to be kept as a reserve for emergencies and to quickly counteract the effects of a temporary unfavorable international payment balance, ensuring stable exchange rates between the sterling and the dollar on a daily basis. Therefore, it’s important that all reserves be managed by the authority that oversees this, which, as per the proposals mentioned, is the Bank of England. The amount of paper money in circulation would still depend on trade and employment levels, interest rate policies, and Treasury Bill policies. The governors of the system would rely on interest rate and Treasury Bill policies, the government’s goals would be stability in trade, prices, and employment, and the amount of paper money would be a result of the first set of factors (just as it is now) and a tool for achieving the second, the exact amount of which cannot and doesn’t need to be anticipated. The amount of gold that should be kept as a reserve against international crises and temporary debt wouldn’t have any logical or calculable connection to the amount of paper currency; they’re not closely related. So I propose—though it may seem shocking—that we completely separate the gold reserve from currency issuance. Once this principle is in place, the regulations will just be details. The country’s gold reserves should be centralized under the Bank of England for the purpose of preventing short-term fluctuations in exchange rates. The Treasury Notes can be issued by the Treasury, since the Treasury will profit from them, without being bound by any formal regulations (which are likely to be ineffective or harmful) regarding their amount. Except for the structure, this system wouldn’t differ much from the current setup.

The reader will observe that I retain for gold an important rôle in our system. As an ultimate safeguard and as a reserve for sudden requirements, no superior medium is yet available. But I urge that it is possible to get the benefit of the advantages of gold, without irrevocably binding our legal-tender money to follow blindly all the vagaries of gold and future unforeseeable fluctuations in its real purchasing power.

The reader will notice that I still see gold as playing a crucial role in our system. As a final backup and a reserve for unexpected needs, there's no better medium available. However, I emphasize that we can enjoy the benefits of gold without permanently tying our legal-tender currency to follow all the unpredictable changes of gold and its future buying power fluctuations.

II. The United States.

The above proposals are recommended to Great Britain and their details have been adapted to her case. But the principles underlying them remain just as true across the Atlantic. In the United States, as in Great Britain, the methods which are being actually pursued at the present time, half consciously and half unconsciously, are mainly on the lines I advocate. In practice the Federal Reserve Board often ignores the proportion of its gold reserve to its liabilities and is influenced, in determining its discount policy, by the object of maintaining stability in prices, trade, and employment. Out of convention and conservatism it accepts gold. Out of prudence and understanding it buries it. Indeed the theory and investigation of the credit cycle have been taken up so much more enthusiastically and pushed so198 much further by the economists of the United States than by those of Great Britain, that it would be even more difficult for the Federal Reserve Board than for the Bank of England to ignore such ideas or to avoid being, half-consciously at least, influenced by them.

The proposals mentioned above are advised for Great Britain, and their specifics have been tailored to her situation. However, the underlying principles hold true across the Atlantic as well. In the United States, similar to Great Britain, the methods currently being pursued—half consciously and half unconsciously—largely align with what I advocate. In practice, the Federal Reserve Board often overlooks the ratio of its gold reserves to its liabilities and is guided, when setting its discount policy, by the goal of maintaining stability in prices, trade, and employment. Out of convention and conservatism, it accepts gold. Out of caution and understanding, it sets it aside. In fact, the theory and study of the credit cycle have been embraced much more passionately and advanced further by American economists than by their British counterparts, making it even harder for the Federal Reserve Board to ignore these concepts or to avoid being at least half-consciously influenced by them.

The theory on which the Federal Reserve Board is supposed to govern its discount policy, by reference to the influx and efflux of gold and the proportion of gold to liabilities, is as dead as mutton. It perished, and perished justly, as soon as the Federal Reserve Board began to ignore its ratio and to accept gold without allowing it to exercise its full influence,56 merely because an expansion of credit and prices seemed at that moment undesirable. From that day gold was demonetised by almost the last country which still continued to do it lip-service, and a dollar standard was set up on the pedestal of the Golden Calf. For the past two years the United States has pretended to maintain a gold standard. In fact it has established a dollar standard; and, instead of ensuring that the value of the dollar shall conform to that of gold, it makes provision, at great expense, that the value of gold shall conform to that of the dollar. This is the way by which a rich199 country is able to combine new wisdom with old prejudice. It can enjoy the latest scientific improvements, devised in the economic laboratory of Harvard, whilst leaving Congress to believe that no rash departure will be permitted from the hard money consecrated by the wisdom and experience of Dungi, Darius, Constantine, Lord Liverpool, and Senator Aldrich.

The theory that the Federal Reserve Board is supposed to follow for its discount policy, based on the flow of gold and the ratio of gold to liabilities, is as dead as a doornail. It vanished, rightly so, as soon as the Federal Reserve Board started ignoring its ratio and accepting gold without letting it have its full impact, simply because expanding credit and prices didn’t seem desirable at that moment. From that point on, gold was effectively demonetized by almost the last country that still pretended to uphold it, and a dollar standard was established in place of the Golden Calf. For the past two years, the United States has pretended to maintain a gold standard. In fact, it has set up a dollar standard; and instead of making sure that the value of the dollar aligned with that of gold, it goes to great lengths to ensure that the value of gold matches that of the dollar. This is how a wealthy country can combine new ideas with old biases. It can take advantage of the latest scientific advancements developed in the economic lab at Harvard while allowing Congress to believe that no hasty changes will be allowed from the "hard money" upheld by the wisdom and experience of Dungi, Darius, Constantine, Lord Liverpool, and Senator Aldrich.

56 The influx of gold could not be prevented from having some inflationary effect because its receipt automatically increased the balances of the member banks. This uncontrollable element cannot be avoided so long as the United States Mints are compelled to accept gold. But the gold was not allowed to exercise the multiplied influence which the pre-war system presumed.

56 The influx of gold couldn’t be stopped from causing some inflation because getting it automatically raised the balances of the member banks. This uncontrollable factor can't be avoided as long as the United States Mints are required to accept gold. However, the gold wasn’t allowed to exert the amplified influence that the pre-war system assumed.

No doubt it is worth the expense—for those that can afford it. The cost of the fiction to the United States is not more than £100,000,000 per annum and should not average in the long run above £50,000,000 per annum. But there is in all such fictions a certain instability. When the accumulations of gold heap up beyond a certain point the suspicions of Congressmen may be aroused. One cannot be quite certain that some Senator might not read and understand this book. Sooner or later the fiction will lose its value.

No doubt it's worth the cost—for those who can afford it. The financial impact of the fiction on the United States is no more than £100,000,000 per year and should average around £50,000,000 annually in the long run. However, there’s an inherent instability in all such fictions. When gold accumulates beyond a certain level, Congress members might start to get suspicious. One can’t be entirely sure that some Senator won’t read and get the gist of this book. Eventually, the fiction will lose its worth.

Indeed it is desirable that this should be so. The new methods will work more efficiently and more economically when they can be pursued consciously, deliberately, and openly. The economists of Harvard know more than those of Washington, and it will be well that in due course their surreptitious victory should swell into public triumph. At any rate those who are responsible for establishing the principles of British currency should not overlook the possibility that some day soon the Mints of the United States200 may be closed to the acceptance of gold at a fixed dollar price.

Indeed, it's important that this is the case. The new methods will be more efficient and cost-effective when they can be pursued consciously, deliberately, and openly. The economists at Harvard know more than those in Washington, and it will be fitting that, in time, their hidden success should become a public achievement. At the very least, those who are responsible for establishing the principles of British currency should not overlook the possibility that, someday soon, the Mints of the United States200 may stop accepting gold at a fixed dollar price.

Closing the Mints to the compulsory acceptance of gold need not affect the existing obligation of convertibility;—the liability to encash notes in gold might still remain. Theoretically this might be regarded as a blemish on the perfection of the scheme. But, for the present at least, it is unlikely that such a provision would compel the United States to deflate,—which possibility is the only theoretical objection to it. On the other hand, the retention of convertibility would remain a safeguard satisfactory to old-fashioned people; and would reduce to a minimum the new and controversial legislation required to effect the change. Many people might agree to relieve the Mint of the liability to accept gold which no one wants, who would be dismayed at any tampering with convertibility. Moreover, in certain quite possible circumstances, the obligation of convertibility might really prove to be a safeguard against inflation brought about by political pressure contrary to the judgement of the Federal Reserve Board;—for we have not, as yet, sufficient experience as to the independence of the Federal Reserve system against the farmers, for example, or other compact interests possessing political influence.

Closing the mints to the mandatory acceptance of gold doesn't have to impact the current obligation of convertibility; the requirement to exchange notes for gold could still stay in place. In theory, this could be seen as a flaw in the perfection of the plan. However, at least for now, it’s unlikely that such a rule would force the United States to deflate—which is the only theoretical objection to it. On the flip side, keeping convertibility would still be a reassuring measure for traditionalists and would minimize the new and controversial legislation needed to implement the change. Many people might agree to free the Mint from the obligation to accept gold that no one wants, but they would be upset about any changes to convertibility. Additionally, in certain plausible scenarios, the obligation of convertibility might actually serve as a safeguard against inflation driven by political pressure that goes against the judgment of the Federal Reserve Board; we still don't have enough experience regarding the Federal Reserve system's independence from groups like farmers or other politically influential interests.

Meanwhile Mr. Hoover and many banking authorities in England and America, who look to the dispersion through the world of a reasonable proportion201 of Washington’s gold, by the natural operation of trade and investment, as a desirable and probable development, much misunderstand the situation. At present the United States is open to accept gold at a price in terms of goods above its natural value (above the value it would have, that is to say, if it were allowed to affect credit and, through credit, prices in orthodox pre-war fashion); and so long as this is the case, gold must continue to flow there. The stream can be stopped (so long as a change in the gold-value of the dollar is ruled out of the question) only in one of two ways;—either by a fall in the value of the dollar or by an increase in the value of gold in the outside world. The former of these alternatives, namely the depreciation of the dollar through inflation in the United States, is that on which many English authorities have based their hopes. But it could only come about by a reversal or defeat of the present policy of the Federal Reserve Board. Moreover, the volume of redundant gold is now so great, and the capacity of the rest of the world for its absorption so much reduced, that the inflation would need to be prolonged and determined to produce the required result. Dollar prices would have to rise very high before America’s impoverished customers, starving for real goods and having no use for barren metal, would relieve her of £200,000,000 worth of gold in preference to taking commodities. The banking authorities of the United States would be202 likely to notice in good time that, if the gold is not wanted and must be got rid of, it would be much simpler just to reduce the dollar price of gold. The only way of selling redundant stocks of anything, whether gold or copper or wheat, is to abate the price.

Meanwhile, Mr. Hoover and many banking officials in England and America, who view the distribution of a reasonable amount of Washington’s gold around the world through trade and investment as a desirable and likely outcome, are misunderstanding the situation. Right now, the United States is willing to accept gold at a higher price in terms of goods than its actual value (meaning, its value if it were allowed to influence credit and, through credit, prices in the usual pre-war way); as long as this continues, gold will keep flowing there. This flow can only be halted (as long as changing the gold value of the dollar is off the table) in one of two ways: either by the dollar losing value or by gold gaining value in the outside world. The first option, which is the dollar's depreciation due to inflation in the United States, is what many English authorities are hoping for. However, that would only happen if the current policy of the Federal Reserve Board were reversed or defeated. Furthermore, the amount of excess gold is now so large, and the rest of the world's ability to absorb it is so diminished, that inflation would have to be significant and sustained to achieve the desired outcome. Dollar prices would need to rise very high before America’s struggling customers, desperate for real goods and having no use for useless metal, would willingly part with £200,000,000 worth of gold instead of taking commodities. The banking authorities in the United States would likely realize in time that if the gold is unwanted and needs to be sold off, it would be much simpler to just lower the dollar price of gold. The only way to sell off excess inventory of anything, whether gold, copper, or wheat, is to lower the price.

The alternative method, namely the increase in the value of gold in the outside world, could scarcely be brought about unless some other country or countries stepped in to relieve the United States of the duty of burying unwanted gold. Great Britain, France, Italy, Holland, Sweden, Argentine, Japan, and many other countries have fully as much unoccupied gold as they require for an emergency store. Nor is there anything to prevent them from buying gold now if they prefer gold to other things.

The other option, specifically the rise in the value of gold globally, could hardly happen unless some other country or countries helped the United States out by taking on the burden of excess gold. Great Britain, France, Italy, Holland, Sweden, Argentina, Japan, and several other countries have just as much spare gold as they need for emergencies. There's also nothing stopping them from purchasing gold now if they prefer it over other assets.

The notion, that America can get rid of her gold by showing a greater readiness to make loans to foreign countries, is incomplete. This result will only follow if the loans are inflationary loans, not provided for by the reduction of expenditure and investment in other directions. Foreign investments formed out of real savings will no more denude the United States of her gold than they denude Great Britain of hers. But if the United States places a large amount of dollar purchasing power in the hands of foreigners, as a pure addition to the purchasing power previously in the hands of her own nationals, then no doubt prices will rise and we shall be back on the method203 of depreciating the dollar, just discussed, by a normal inflationary process. Thus the invitation to the United States to deal with the problem of her gold by increasing her foreign investments will not be effective unless it is intended as an invitation to inflate.

The idea that America can get rid of its gold by being more willing to lend money to foreign countries is incomplete. This will only happen if those loans lead to inflation, rather than being offset by cuts in spending and investment elsewhere. Foreign investments made from real savings won't drain the United States of its gold any more than they would drain Great Britain of its gold. However, if the United States gives a large amount of dollar purchasing power to foreigners, adding to the purchasing power already held by its own citizens, prices will likely rise, and we’ll go back to the method of depreciating the dollar through a normal inflationary process. Therefore, suggesting that the United States can solve its gold problem by increasing foreign investments won’t work unless it’s actually an invitation to inflate.

* * * * *

I argue, therefore, that the same policy which is wise for Great Britain is wise for the United States, namely to aim at the stability of the commodity-value of the dollar rather than at stability of the gold-value of the dollar, and to effect the former if necessary by varying the gold-value of the dollar.

I argue that the same policy that works for Great Britain also works for the United States. Specifically, we should focus on maintaining the stability of the dollar’s commodity value instead of its gold value, and if needed, we can achieve this by adjusting the dollar’s gold value.

If Great Britain and the United States were both embarked on this policy and if both were successful, our secondary desideratum, namely the stability of the dollar-exchange standard, would follow as a consequence. I agree with Mr. Hawtrey that the ideal state of affairs is an intimate co-operation between the Federal Reserve Board and the Bank of England, as a result of which stability of prices and of exchange would be achieved at the same time. But I suggest that it is wiser and more practical that this should be allowed to develop out of experience and mutual advantage, without either side binding itself to the other. If the Bank of England aims primarily at the stability of sterling, and the Federal Reserve Board at the stability of dollars, each authority letting the other into its confidence so far204 as may be, better results will be obtained than if sterling is unalterably fixed by law in terms of dollars and the Bank of England is limited to using its influence on the Federal Reserve Board to keep dollars steady. A collaboration which is not free on both sides is likely to lead to dissensions, especially if the business of keeping dollars steady involves a heavy expenditure in burying unwanted gold.

If Great Britain and the United States both adopted this policy and were successful, our secondary goal, which is the stability of the dollar-exchange standard, would follow as a result. I agree with Mr. Hawtrey that the ideal scenario is a close collaboration between the Federal Reserve Board and the Bank of England, leading to simultaneous stability in prices and exchange rates. However, I believe it’s wiser and more practical for this cooperation to develop from shared experience and mutual benefits, without either side being tightly bound to the other. If the Bank of England focuses primarily on stabilizing sterling and the Federal Reserve Board on stabilizing dollars, with each authority being open with the other as much as possible, we will achieve better results than if sterling is rigidly set by law in relation to dollars and the Bank of England is restricted to influencing the Federal Reserve Board to maintain dollar stability. A collaboration that isn’t flexible on both sides is likely to lead to conflicts, especially if maintaining dollar stability requires a significant expense in storing excess gold.

We have reached a stage in the evolution of money when a “managed” currency is inevitable, but we have not yet reached the point when the management can be entrusted to a single authority. The best we can do, therefore, is to have two managed currencies, sterling and dollars, with as close a collaboration as possible between the aims and methods of the managements.

We’ve reached a point in the evolution of money where a “managed” currency is unavoidable, but we haven’t yet arrived at a stage where we can trust a single authority to manage it. The best solution for now is to have two managed currencies, pounds and dollars, with as much collaboration as possible between the goals and methods of their managements.

III. Other Countries.

What course, in such an event, should other countries pursue? It is necessary to presume to begin with that we are dealing with countries which have not lost control of their currencies. But a stage can and should be reached before long at which nearly all countries have regained the control. In Russia, Poland, and Germany it is only necessary that the Governments should develop some other source of revenue than the inflationary or turn-over tax on the use of money discussed in Chapter II. In France and Italy it is only necessary that the205 franc and the lira should be devaluated at a level at which the service of the internal debt is within the capacity of the taxpayer.

What should other countries do in this situation? We need to start by assuming we're talking about countries that haven't lost control of their currencies. However, we can and should reach a point soon where almost all countries have regained that control. In Russia, Poland, and Germany, it's crucial for the governments to find other sources of revenue besides the inflationary tax or turnover tax on money usage discussed in Chapter II. In France and Italy, it's simply a matter of devaluing the franc and the lira to a point where the taxpayers can manage the internal debt.

Control having been regained, there are probably no countries, other than Great Britain and the United States, which would be justified in attempting to set up an independent standard. Their wisest course would be to base their currencies either on sterling or on dollars by means of an exchange standard, fixing their exchanges in terms of one or the other (though preserving, perhaps, a discretion to vary in the event of a serious divergence between sterling and dollars), and maintaining stability by holding reserves of gold at home and balances in London and New York to meet short-period fluctuations, and by using bank-rate and other methods to regulate the volume of purchasing power, and thus to maintain stability of relative price level, over longer periods.

Once control was regained, there are likely no countries other than Great Britain and the United States that would be justified in trying to establish an independent standard. Their best option would be to base their currencies on either the pound or the dollar through an exchange standard, aligning their exchanges with one or the other (while possibly allowing for some flexibility in case of a significant difference between the pound and the dollar), and maintaining stability by holding gold reserves domestically and balances in London and New York to handle short-term fluctuations. They should also use interest rates and other methods to manage the volume of purchasing power and maintain stability in relative price levels over the long term.

Perhaps the British Empire (apart from Canada) and the countries of Europe would adopt the sterling standard; whilst Canada and the other countries of North and South America would adopt the dollar standard. But each could choose freely, until, with the progress of knowledge and understanding, so perfect a harmony had been established between the two that the choice was a matter of indifference.

Perhaps the British Empire (besides Canada) and the countries in Europe would adopt the sterling standard, while Canada and the other nations in North and South America would go with the dollar standard. But each could decide freely, until, with the advancement of knowledge and understanding, a perfect harmony had been achieved between the two systems, making the choice a matter of indifference.


  • American debt, 191
  • Aurelian, 152
  • Austria, elasticity of demand for money, 48
  • value of note issue, 52
  • currency of, 55
  • Bank of England, and forward exchange, 135
  • and gold, 171, 184, 190, 192
  • and existing system, 178
  • Bank rate, and prices, 21
  • and forward exchange, 136
  • pre-war effect of, 159
  • “Big Five,” 178
  • British Empire, currency of, 205
  • Business class, 18, 29
  • Cannan, Professor, 47
  • Capital, diminution of, 29
  • Capital levy, versus currency depreciation, 63, 65
  • in Great Britain, 68
  • Cassel, Professor, 87, 92
  • Chervonetz, 51, 57
  • Consols, 12, 15
  • Credit-cycle, 83, 86, 187, 188
  • Cunliffe Committee, 140, 184, 194, 195
  • Cuno, Dr., 60
  • Currency depreciation, in history, 9, 11
  • advantage to debtor class, 10
  • incidence of, 42
  • versus capital levy, 63
  • social evils of, 65
  • Czecho-Slovakia, 143, 146
  • Debtor class, political influence of, 9
  • Deflation, 143
  • and distribution of wealth, 4
  • and production of wealth, 4, 32
  • meaning of, 82
  • arguments for, 147
  • and Aurelian, 152
  • Devaluation, 64, 67
  • and deflation, 141, 142
  • and currency reform, 145
  • Dollar, forward exchange in, 118, 123, 125
  • Edward III., 163
  • Equation of exchange, 93, 97, 99
  • Estcourt, Dr., 107
  • Exchange speculation, effect of, 112
  • and forward market, 130, 138
  • services of, 136
  • External purchasing power, 88
  • Federal Reserve Board, and gold, 86, 167, 175, 197
  • index number, 94
  • co-operation with, 186
  • Fisher, Prof. Irving, 78, 148, 155, 163, 187
  • Foreign exchange, and purchasing power parity, 87
  • forward market in, 115
  • stability of, 141, 154, 189
  • Forward market in exchanges, 115
  • as an insurance, 121
  • and interest rates, 124
  • and State banks, 133
  • 208and bank rate, 136
  • Franc, exchange, 73
  • purchasing power parity, 101, 104
  • seasonal movement, 111
  • forward exchange in, 116, 118, 120, 125
  • devaluation of, 143, 145
  • France, losses of investors, 13, 65
  • burden of internal debts, 70
  • Genoa Conference, 134, 142, 143, 173
  • Germany, interest rates in, 22
  • and currency inflation, 41
  • elasticity of demand for money in, 48
  • value of note issue, 51
  • currency of, 54
  • sums raised by inflation, 58
  • recent financial history, 61
  • equation of exchange, 99
  • Gibbon, 152
  • Gold and State banks, 81
  • price of, 190
  • cost of burying, 199
  • Gold discoveries, 164
  • Gold mining, 165
  • Gold standard, 9, 12
  • restoration of, 149, 163
  • Great Britain, capital levy in, 68
  • currency statistics of, 83
  • seasonal trade, 108
  • ideal currency, 177, 203
  • banking system of, 178, 185
  • note issue, 193
  • Harvard, economists of, 199
  • Hawtrey, R. G., 163, 173, 174, 176, 187, 203
  • Hoover, Mr., 200
  • Huskisson, 153
  • Index numbers, for regulating money, 187
  • India, 141
  • prices in, 156
  • Individualism, and monetary stability, 40
  • Inflation, and distribution of wealth, 4, 5
  • and production of wealth, 4, 32
  • and redistribution of wealth, 30
  • as a method of taxation, 41
  • importance of rate of, 49
  • sums raised by in Russia, 57
  • sums raised by in Germany, 58
  • meaning of, 82
  • Interest, “money” and “real” rates of, 20
  • Interest rates and forward exchange, 129
  • Internal purchasing power, 88
  • Investment system, 5
  • Investors, losses of, 13, 16
  • Italy, losses of investors, 14, 65
  • Bank of, and forward exchange, 134
  • Labour, effect of rising prices on, 27
  • Lasteyeri, M. de, 71
  • Lehfeldt, Professor, 48
  • Lira, purchasing power parity, 101
  • seasonal movement, 111
  • forward exchange in, 116, 119, 129
  • devaluation of, 143, 145
  • “Managed” currency, 166
  • Marks, speculation in, 113
  • forward exchange in, 119
  • Marshall, Dr., 78, 79
  • Middle Ages, and currency debasement, 162
  • Middle class, losses of, 30
  • Money, elasticity of demand for, 47
  • stability of, 40
  • future regulation of, 177
  • Moscow, and use of money, 46
  • Mussolini, 145, 153
  • Note issue, existing system in G.B., 183
  • suggested system, 193
  • Pigou, Professor, 74, 78
  • Poland, elasticity of demand for money, 48
  • Population, 31
  • Prices, index numbers for various countries, 1913–1923, 3
  • fluctuations in nineteenth century, 2
  • 209steadiness in nineteenth century, 11
  • raw materials, 1919–1922, 19
  • effect of expectation of rise or fall, 22, 33, 37
  • effect of falling, 24
  • stability of, 154
  • Profiteers, 25, 26, 28
  • Purchasing power parity, 87
  • Quantity theory, 42, 74
  • Rasin, Dr., 146, 147
  • Real balances, 78, 83
  • Reichsbank discount rate, 23, 60
  • Ricardo, 87, 152, 153, 154
  • Risk, and production, 35
  • Rupee exchange, 157
  • Russia, and currency inflation, 41, 63
  • value of note issue, 52
  • currency of, 55
  • Saving, 7
  • Seasonal movement of exchanges, 106, 108, 111, 177, 191
  • Sterling, purchasing power parity, 100, 102
  • seasonal movement, 111
  • forward exchange in, 116, 117, 125
  • Taxation, by means of inflation, 41
  • Treasury Bills, relation of, to currency, 179, 196
  • Trustee investments, 8
  • United States, proposals for, 197
  • closing mints of, 200
  • and redundant gold, 201
  • Vienna, and use of money, 46
  • Wages, and prices, 27, 29
  • “Ways and Means” advances, 180

THE END

THE END

Printed in Great Britain by R. & R. Clark, Limited, Edinburgh.

Printed in Great Britain by R. & R. Clark, Limited, Edinburgh.


BY THE SAME AUTHOR

8vo. 8s. 6d. net.

8vo. 8s. 6d. net.

THE ECONOMIC CONSEQUENCES OF THE PEACE

THE ECONOMIC CONSEQUENCES OF THE PEACE

THE TIMES.—“Mr. Keynes writes with knowledge; he was himself one of the chief actors in the Conference, and his book is an important political event.... He brings great literary ability, a broad view, a clear grasp of general principles, to bear upon the very complicated matters with which he is occupied, and in his hands these questions of coal, exchange, and reparation can be read with pleasure by the non-technical student.”

THE TIMES.—“Mr. Keynes writes with authority; he was directly involved in the Conference, and his book is a significant political event.... He applies impressive writing skills, a wide perspective, and a solid understanding of fundamental principles to the complex issues he addresses, making the topics of coal, exchange, and reparations accessible and enjoyable to the average reader.”

THE WESTMINSTER GAZETTE.—“Mr. Keynes has produced a smashing and unanswerable indictment of the economic settlement.”

THE WESTMINSTER GAZETTE.—“Mr. Keynes has created a powerful and irrefutable critique of the economic settlement.”

THE ATHENÆUM.—“This book is a perfectly well-equipped arsenal of facts and arguments, to which every one will resort for years to come who wishes to strike a blow against the forces of prejudice, delusion, and stupidity. It is not easy to make large numbers of men reasonable by a book, yet there are no limits to which, without undue extravagance, we may not hope that the influence of this book may extend.... Never was the case for reasonableness more powerfully put. It is enforced with extraordinary art. What might easily have been a difficult treatise, semi-official or academic, proves to be as fascinating as a good novel.”

THE ATHENÆUM.—“This book is a thoroughly equipped resource of facts and arguments, which anyone seeking to challenge prejudice, delusion, and ignorance will turn to for years to come. It's not easy to make large groups of people reasonable through a book, but there's no limit to how far we can hope this book’s influence will reach, without being too extravagant... Never has the case for reason been presented more powerfully. It's delivered with exceptional skill. What could have easily been a challenging, semi-official, or academic treatise turns out to be as engaging as a good novel.”

8vo. 7s. 6d. net.

8vo. 7.30 net.

A REVISION OF THE TREATY

A revision of the agreement

Being a Sequel to
“The Economic Consequences of the Peace.”

Being a Sequel to
“The Economic Consequences of the Peace.”

THE SPECTATOR.—“The sequel, like the earlier book, is a brilliant performance regarded as economic argument and compact analysis, and it also has the advantage of dealing in sardonic and sometimes pitiless humour.”

THE SPECTATOR.—“The sequel, just like the first book, is an impressive work considered to be an economic argument and concise analysis, and it also benefits from incorporating sardonic and occasionally merciless humor.”

THE NATION.—“We found Mr. Keynes’s second book to be of the same delightful texture as his first; showing a playfully impressive irony, alternating with warning seriousness, and the extraordinary power of economic analysis which has made him the greatest intellectual force in the work of European restoration.”

THE NATION.—“We found Mr. Keynes’s second book to be just as enjoyable as his first; it features a playfully striking irony, mixed with serious warnings, and an extraordinary skill in economic analysis that has made him the most significant intellectual influence in the effort to restore Europe.”

THE TIMES.—“Mr. Keynes has the gift of interesting his readers in problems that are at once vital and obscure.”

THE TIMES.—“Mr. Keynes has a talent for engaging his readers with issues that are both essential and complex.”

THE NEW STATESMAN.—“It is, like its predecessor, a pleasure to read, lucid and concise in its economic arguments, dashing in its political satires and its judgment of persons.”

THE NEW STATESMAN.—“Just like the previous one, it’s enjoyable to read, clear and straightforward in its economic arguments, bold in its political satire and judgments of people.”

8vo. 18s. net.

8vo. 18s. net.

A TREATISE ON PROBABILITY

A Guide to Probability

THE TIMES.—“Mr. Keynes’s book will certainly add to his reputation, and is, indeed, in our opinion, the best book he has yet written.”

THE TIMES.—“Mr. Keynes’s book will definitely enhance his reputation, and we believe it is, in fact, the best book he has written so far.”

THE NEW STATESMAN.—“The book will be at once ranked among the most important contributions to the subject.”

THE NEW STATESMAN.—“This book will definitely be considered one of the most important contributions to the topic.”

Prof. Pigou in the ECONOMIC JOURNAL.—“The problems which Mr. Keynes has touched, he has not only illuminated with a marvellous lucidity of style, but has also substantially advanced.”

Prof. Pigou in the ECONOMIC JOURNAL.—“The issues that Mr. Keynes has addressed, he has not only clarified with incredible clarity of expression, but has also made significant progress.”

THE MANCHESTER GUARDIAN.—“Mr. Keynes’s book is undoubtedly one of first-rate importance, and it is especially valuable on account of the extension of its subject beyond the bounds of purely mathematical probability.”

THE MANCHESTER GUARDIAN.—“Mr. Keynes’s book is definitely of great importance, and it's particularly valuable because it expands its topic beyond just mathematical probability.”

THE SPECTATOR.—“The book contains a great deal that the general reader will find both interesting and exhilarating.”

THE SPECTATOR.—“The book has a lot that the average reader will find both engaging and exciting.”

8vo. 7s. 6d. net.

8 vo. 7s. 6d. net.

INDIAN CURRENCY AND FINANCE

Indian Currency and Finance

THE ECONOMIC JOURNAL.—“The book is, and is likely long to remain, the standard work on its subject.... While academic students will be grateful for this acute and informing work, it will be read with as much interest, and perhaps even greater appreciation, by men of business and affairs.”

THE ECONOMIC JOURNAL.—“This book is, and will probably stay, the key work on its topic.... While students in academia will appreciate this insightful and informative piece, it will be read with just as much interest, and maybe even more appreciation, by business professionals and those involved in various affairs.”

THE SPECTATOR.—“Mr. Keynes’s careful and disinterested study of the monetary facts of twenty years, and his methodical marshalling of facts and figures, will be useful even to those—and they will probably be few—who are not convinced by his reasoning.”

THE SPECTATOR.—“Mr. Keynes's thorough and impartial analysis of the monetary data from the past twenty years, along with his organized presentation of facts and figures, will be helpful even to those—and they’re likely to be few—who aren't persuaded by his arguments.”

THE CLARE MARKET REVIEW.—“By his really masterly treatment of the Indian currency system, the author has made a very valuable addition to our economic literature.”

THE CLARE MARKET REVIEW.—“Through his expert analysis of the Indian currency system, the author has significantly contributed to our economic literature.”

LONDON: MACMILLAN AND CO., Ltd.

LONDON: MACMILLAN AND CO., Ltd.

Transcriber’s Notes

Punctuation, hyphenation, and spelling were made consistent when a predominant preference was found in the original book; otherwise they were not changed.

Punctuation, hyphenation, and spelling were made consistent when a clear preference was found in the original book; otherwise, they were left unchanged.

Simple typographical errors were corrected; unbalanced quotation marks were remedied when the change was obvious, and otherwise left unbalanced.

Simple typos were fixed; unbalanced quotation marks were corrected when the change was clear, and otherwise left unbalanced.

Some tables have been rearranged to make them narrower, and some have been repositioned to fall between nearby paragraphs.

Some tables have been adjusted to make them narrower, and some have been moved to fit between nearby paragraphs.

The index was not checked for proper alphabetization or correct page references.

The index wasn't checked for proper alphabetical order or accurate page references.

Page 98: “goods exported by Europe” probably was intended to be “goods exported by Westropa”.

Page 98: “goods exported by Europe” was probably meant to be “goods exported by Westropa”.


Download ePUB

If you like this ebook, consider a donation!